ML20141P249: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(StriderTol Bot change)
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
Line 19: Line 19:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:-                  -
{{#Wiki_filter:-
l l
l FEB 0 51986 i
FEB 0 51986 i
Docket No. 71-0551 Siemens Medical Systems, Inc.
Docket No. 71-0551 Siemens Medical Systems, Inc.
ATTN: Mr. Alfred F. Horndasch Therapy Service Department 186 Wood Avenue South                                                                                                                   l Iselin, NJ 08830
ATTN: Mr. Alfred F. Horndasch Therapy Service Department 186 Wood Avenue South l
.                                                                                                                                                                      l l
Iselin, NJ 08830 Gentlemen:
Gentlemen:
This refers to your {{letter dated|date=January 10, 1986|text=January 10, 1986 letter}} for approval of your Quality i
This refers to your {{letter dated|date=January 10, 1986|text=January 10, 1986 letter}} for approval of your Quality                                                                 i' Assurance Progran.
Assurance Progran.
Enclosed is a copy of revised 10 CFR 170, which became effective June 20, 1984.
Enclosed is a copy of revised 10 CFR 170, which became effective June 20, 1984.
Please notice 9170.31, fee Category 10F, which specifies fees for applications for Part 71 quality assurance approvals, including renewals and amendments thereto. Applicants in fee Category 10F pay an initial application fee of $150 and are subsequently billed at six-month intervals for all accisnulated NRC costs or upon completion of the review, whichever occurs sooner. The total fee assessed will be based on the actual NRC cost (professional staff-hours) to process the application as well as any contractual cost incurred.
Please notice 9170.31, fee Category 10F, which specifies fees for applications for Part 71 quality assurance approvals, including renewals and amendments thereto. Applicants in fee Category 10F pay an initial application fee of $150 and are subsequently billed at six-month intervals for all accisnulated NRC costs or upon completion of the review, whichever occurs sooner. The total fee assessed will be based on the actual NRC cost (professional staff-hours) to process the application as well as any contractual cost incurred.
Based on the above, please remit an application fee of $150 and mail it to my attention. If you have any questions concerning the fee, please let me know, l'
Based on the above, please remit an application fee of $150 and mail it to my attention.
Sincerely, Original SiFJ.t4 B1                                                     l
If you have any questions concerning the fee, please let me know, l
                                                                                                ~ G1enda1 * "
Sincerely, Original SiFJ.t4 B1
Glenda Jackson License Fee Management Staff Office of Administration
~ G1enda1 * "
                                                                                                      ~
Glenda Jackson License Fee Management Staff
~
Office of Administration


==Enclosure:==
==Enclosure:==
d ti-10 CFR 170 (June 20,1984) cx \\
W h 'y,f DISTRIBUTION:
POR Quality Assurance Fee File
\\
Y Matls. Fee File GJackson, LFMB 86031901G7 e60110 Len Gordon, FCTC, HMSS PDR ADOCK 07100551 LFMB R/F (2)
C PDR I
i
"'"" LFMS:ADM..
i l


10 CFR 170 (June 20,1984)                                                                                                      d    ti-cx \    W DISTRIBUTION:
===L GJackson:rej
POR h 'y,f ,
""" 2/.1 86
Quality Assurance Fee File                                                                                        \  Y Matls. Fee File GJackson, LFMB Len Gordon, FCTC, HMSS                                        86031901G7 e60110 PDR C        ADOCK 07100551 LFMB R/F (2)                                                                                              PDR i
.wennmnaMiss~ casa
            "'"" LFMS:ADM..                                                    i I
~
l    ===L GJackson:rej                                                       ,
OFFICI AL. RECORD COPY
              """ 2/.1     '
. _ _ -, _. _ -. _. ~ _ _. _ -. _ _
86
~-
                                                                    ~
,      .wennmnaMiss~ casa                                                         OFFICI AL. RECORD COPY
    . _ _ _ . - . . _ . _ _            . _ _ - , _ . _ - . _ . ~ _ _ . _ - . _ _                           _~- _ -._ _-_-_..-_-_.-_ _ _._


                                  -.                    ..~.-                                                                       - . _
..~.-
  ~  '
=
                                                  .                        =
x L!.UllttG.VE_LLE{.
x               .,
~
L!.UllttG.VE_LLE{ .
USA M
[g USA                                       M           -
- p
p                          ,
[g
" " 4. G s e s7sa
{fgg}
w_
w_
                                                    " " 4. G s e s7sa
. w w=
{fgg}                                                . w w=
c a a V O 1077 p
c a a V O 1077 p
()                  :{                                       GAMMATRON 1,2,3, R, S und CAESA.GAMMATRON Arbeiten an beladenen GAMMATRON.Anlagen T 2.910.012.01.01.05 a
:{
b]aSIEMENS 1
GAMMATRON 1,2,3, R, S und CAESA.GAMMATRON b]a T 2.910.012.01.01.05
GAMMATRON 1l 2,3, R, S and CAESA GAMMATRON
()
_ . . . . ***"***i-           ..
1 SIEMENS Arbeiten an beladenen GAMMATRON.Anlagen GAMMATRON 1l 2,3, R, S and CAESA GAMMATRON a
Work oraloaded GAMMATRON units
***"***i-Work oraloaded GAMMATRON units
          . y I.                                                                                                                   'X d m'/
. y I.
bh                                                                                                                                     '
'X d m'/
23i             Sicherheitshinweise                                             Safety notes k3 IIj 5
bh 23i Sicherheitshinweise Safety notes k3 IIj 5
: 1. Allgemeines                                               1. General i
1.
,,                                1.1. Arbeiten, insbesondere am Strahlerkopf, dUrfen             1.1. Work, especially that on the radiation head, may I l{    2       nur von informierten Fachkriften ausgefGhrt werden,             only be performed by trained experts. These experts must Diese Fachkrifte mGssen an einer information oder an             have taken part in a course or training session given by fu s             einem Kurs von US Med teilgenommen haben und eine               Siemens Med and possess a certification in writing that
Allgemeines 1.
                $j               scnriftliche Bescheinigung besitzen, daS sie Service an         they are entitled to perform servicing on charged Gamma.
General i
beladenen Gammatron Geriten durchfGhren dUrfen.                 tron units, 1.2. FGr das Be und Entladen eines Strahlerkopfes mit flj s
I l{
einer Cobalt 60-oder Caesium 1374uelle, bedarf es einer gesonderten Bescheinigung. Nur der Personenkreis, der 1.2. For loading and unloading a radiation head with a cobalt 60 caesium 137. source, a special certificate is re.
1.1. Arbeiten, insbesondere am Strahlerkopf, dUrfen 1.1. Work, especially that on the radiation head, may 2
quired. Only those persons possessing such a certificate g}             diese Bescheinigung besitzt, darf Ladungen durchfGhren.         may perform chargings. Charging may only be performed a                Ladungen dGrfen nur mit Kopplungsvorrichtungen durch.           with coupling devices. These coupling devices are suited ba((            gefGhrt werden. Die Kopplungsvorrichtungen passen nur           to fit the Siemens transport holder S 1747 (Please consult zum Siemens.Transportbehilter S 1747. (Siehe Rund.
nur von informierten Fachkriften ausgefGhrt werden, only be performed by trained experts. These experts must Diese Fachkrifte mGssen an einer information oder an have taken part in a course or training session given by fu s einem Kurs von US Med teilgenommen haben und eine Siemens Med and possess a certification in writing that
Circular VT 45 ha le dated 8.10.76), A gammatron may
$j scnriftliche Bescheinigung besitzen, daS sie Service an they are entitled to perform servicing on charged Gamma.
[Hi g i schreiben VT 45 ha te v. 8.10.76) Ein Gammatron darf erst mit einer Strahlenquelle beladen werden, wenn alle not be loaded with a radiation source until all pertinent regulations and impositions have been fulfilled in so far
beladenen Gammatron Geriten durchfGhren dUrfen.
                ! l             einschligigen Vorschriften und Auflagen erfGilt sind, so.
tron units, fl FGr das Be und Entladen eines Strahlerkopfes mit 1.2. For loading and unloading a radiation head with a 1.2.
U                                                                                                as they apply to radiation protection and installation on
einer Cobalt 60-oder Caesium 1374uelle, bedarf es einer cobalt 60 caesium 137. source, a special certificate is re.
{$               weit sie bauseitig den Strahlenschutz und die Installation       site. For this, the details in the project plan with radia-id               betreffen. Verbindlich dafGr sind die Angaben im Projekt.       tion orotection, details given in the dimensional plan and plan mit Strahlenschutzangaben,im MaSblatt und son.
s j
gesonderten Bescheinigung. Nur der Personenkreis, der quired. Only those persons possessing such a certificate g}
diese Bescheinigung besitzt, darf Ladungen durchfGhren.
may perform chargings. Charging may only be performed ba((
Ladungen dGrfen nur mit Kopplungsvorrichtungen durch.
with coupling devices. These coupling devices are suited a
gefGhrt werden. Die Kopplungsvorrichtungen passen nur to fit the Siemens transport holder S 1747 (Please consult
[Hi zum Siemens.Transportbehilter S 1747. (Siehe Rund.
Circular VT 45 ha le dated 8.10.76), A gammatron may schreiben VT 45 ha te v. 8.10.76) Ein Gammatron darf not be loaded with a radiation source until all pertinent g i erst mit einer Strahlenquelle beladen werden, wenn alle regulations and impositions have been fulfilled in so far
! l einschligigen Vorschriften und Auflagen erfGilt sind, so.
as they apply to radiation protection and installation on U
{$
weit sie bauseitig den Strahlenschutz und die Installation site. For this, the details in the project plan with radia-id betreffen. Verbindlich dafGr sind die Angaben im Projekt.
tion orotection, details given in the dimensional plan and plan mit Strahlenschutzangaben,im MaSblatt und son.
other documents by Siemens Medical are obligatory, stigen Unterlagen vom UB Med.
other documents by Siemens Medical are obligatory, stigen Unterlagen vom UB Med.
M* 11,           1.3. Personen, die Arbeiten gemia 1.1 und 1.2 durch.
M* 11, 1.3. Personen, die Arbeiten gemia 1.1 und 1.2 durch.
1.3 Persons performing work according to 1.1 and 1.2.
1.3 Persons performing work according to 1.1 and 1.2.
                " '              fGhren, sind strahlenexponierte Personen und unterliegen       above are exposed to radiation and thus subject to focal den Landesgesetzen Gber Strahlenschutz,2. B. in der legislation on radiation protection, for example in the Bundesrepublik Deutschland, der ersten Strahlenschutz.           Federal Republic of Germany, to the first Radiation g                 verordnung. Nur diese Personen, die einer Strahlenschutz.
fGhren, sind strahlenexponierte Personen und unterliegen above are exposed to radiation and thus subject to focal den Landesgesetzen Gber Strahlenschutz,2. B. in der legislation on radiation protection, for example in the Bundesrepublik Deutschland, der ersten Strahlenschutz.
Protection Ordinance. (Strahlenschutzverordnung). Only fg                 Gberwachung unterliegen, dGrfen sich im Kontrollbereich those persons subject to radiation protection monitoring 4{         aufhalten. Sie mGssen gesetzmiSig eine Strahlenschutz.
Federal Republic of Germany, to the first Radiation g
                        }                                                                        may be present in the check zone. They must, according
verordnung. Nur diese Personen, die einer Strahlenschutz.
              ;                  plakette und ein Pendosimeter und als werksmiSige Auf.           to legal requirements, wear a radiation protection badge j         l       lage ein akustisches Warngerit z. 2. TDL 3, Sach Nr.
Protection Ordinance. (Strahlenschutzverordnung). Only fg Gberwachung unterliegen, dGrfen sich im Kontrollbereich those persons subject to radiation protection monitoring 4{
and a pen dosimeter in addition to an acoustical warning g         }       44 21798 NH 019 tragen.
aufhalten. Sie mGssen gesetzmiSig eine Strahlenschutz.
instrument required by factory regulations, for example j] l                                                                                 TD L 3, part No 44 21798 NH 019.
may be present in the check zone. They must, according
di i 4
}
Mit einem Direktsichtdosimeter (z. 8. Graetz X 50) ist           in the case of a direct view dose meter (for example I                   bei Betreten des Bestrahlungsraumes der Strahlungspegel         Graetz X 50), the radiation level is to be checked upon
plakette und ein Pendosimeter und als werksmiSige Auf.
                  ,gg           zu kontrollieren und zu GberprGfen, ob der VerschluS ge.         enterir'g the radiation room as to whether the cover is j       schlossen ist. Das Direktsichtdosimeter muS immer bei           closed. The direct view dose meter must always be worn Betreten des Kontrollbereiches mitgenommen werden,             when entering the check zone.
to legal requirements, wear a radiation protection badge j
            ~
l lage ein akustisches Warngerit z. 2. TDL 3, Sach Nr.
r .!.
and a pen dosimeter in addition to an acoustical warning g
            ,kI}g{
}
deutsch/englisch T
44 21798 NH 019 tragen.
  /        L-                       SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT                                 Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen 0."C*.Z".* *~.C. C======C"=*
instrument required by factory regulations, for example j] l TD L 3, part No 44 21798 NH 019.
                            ,'";* r *. !.i=*~,'"*".1=0.".';:i" !*J':~%'O' **""
di 4
i Mit einem Direktsichtdosimeter (z. 8. Graetz X 50) ist in the case of a direct view dose meter (for example I
bei Betreten des Bestrahlungsraumes der Strahlungspegel Graetz X 50), the radiation level is to be checked upon
,gg zu kontrollieren und zu GberprGfen, ob der VerschluS ge.
enterir'g the radiation room as to whether the cover is j
schlossen ist. Das Direktsichtdosimeter muS immer bei closed. The direct view dose meter must always be worn Betreten des Kontrollbereiches mitgenommen werden, when entering the check zone.
~
r.!.
,kI}g{
deutsch/englisch T/
L -
SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen 0."C*.Z".* *~.C. C======C"=*
,'";* r *. !.i=*~,'"*".1=0.".';:i" !*J':~%'O' **""
(2b3$.h
(2b3$.h


i                                                                                                                     .
i 1.3.1 Die Gesetze und Bestimmungen zur elektrischen, 1.3.1 The laws and regulations regarding electrical, i
1.3.1 Die Gesetze und Bestimmungen zur elektrischen,             1.3.1 The laws and regulations regarding electrical, i                   mechanischen und strahlenschutztechnischen Sicherheit           mechanical and radiation safet'y must b's adhered to (for
mechanischen und strahlenschutztechnischen Sicherheit mechanical and radiation safet'y must b's adhered to (for
!                  . sind einzuhalten (fGr die B R D r. 8. VD E 0100, VD E 0107c     the Federal Republic of Garmany.for example VDE 0100,
. sind einzuhalten (fGr die B R D r. 8. VD E 0100, VD E 0107c the Federal Republic of Garmany.for example VDE 0100, VDE 0750, DIN 6846,1 Str.Sch.V).
,                    VDE 0750, DIN 6846,1 Str.Sch.V).                         .        VDE 0107, VDE 0750, DIN 8846,1 Str.Sch.V).
VDE 0107, VDE 0750, DIN 8846,1 Str.Sch.V).
i   \                                                                                                                                   ,,
i
\\
FGr Landesgesellschaften und Landesvertretungen gilt:
FGr Landesgesellschaften und Landesvertretungen gilt:
                                        ~
The following applies for branch offices and foreign sub-
The following applies for branch offices and foreign sub-Die in der BRD geltenden Gesetze und Bestimmungen               sidiaries:                       .
~
3                    sind einzuhalten, sofern diese nicht im Widerspruch zu ,     . The laws and regulations valid in the Federal Republic of
Die in der BRD geltenden Gesetze und Bestimmungen sidiaries:
!                    den nationalen Sicherheitsbestimmungen stehen.                 . Germany must be adhered to in so far as they are not in 1
sind einzuhalten, sofern diese nicht im Widerspruch zu,
direct conflict with local safety regulations.                   ,
. The laws and regulations valid in the Federal Republic of 3
den nationalen Sicherheitsbestimmungen stehen.
. Germany must be adhered to in so far as they are not in 1
direct conflict with local safety regulations.
/
/
a 1.4. Vor Aufnahme von Service-Arbeiten an einer Tele-           1.4. Before starting service work on a Telegamma j               '
1.4. Vor Aufnahme von Service-Arbeiten an einer Tele-1.4. Before starting service work on a Telegamma a
gamma-Anlage ist der Betreiber der Anlage zu verstin-           system, the operator of the system must be informed.
j gamma-Anlage ist der Betreiber der Anlage zu verstin-system, the operator of the system must be informed.
I                   digen.
I digen.
i 1                     1.4.1 Wenn Arbeiten durchgefGhrt werden,beidenen               1.4.1 When work is being performed, where radiation I                   Blockierungen. die den Strahlenschutz betref fen (Strahlen-     protection devices (pick-up units) are temporarily out of l                   fingergerite), vorGbergehend ausgesetzt werden mGssen,           function, this can only be performed with the agreement
i 1
!                  so darf dies nur nach Zustimmung des Strahlenschutzbe-         of the official concerned with the radiation protection of j                   auftragten der Anlage erfolgen. Gilt nicht fGr 2.6.             the system. Does not apply in the case of 2.6.
1.4.1 Wenn Arbeiten durchgefGhrt werden,beidenen 1.4.1 When work is being performed, where radiation I
1
Blockierungen. die den Strahlenschutz betref fen (Strahlen-protection devices (pick-up units) are temporarily out of l
!                    1.4.2 Die Freigabe des Strahlungsbetriebes muS durch           1.4.2 Permission for radiation can only be given by the           ,
fingergerite), vorGbergehend ausgesetzt werden mGssen, function, this can only be performed with the agreement so darf dies nur nach Zustimmung des Strahlenschutzbe-of the official concerned with the radiation protection of j
i                    den Strahlenschutzbeauftragten der Anlage erfolgen.-           radiation protection official responsible for the unit (Eventuelles Absichern von strahlengefihrdeten Neben-           (attention must be payed to secure any neighbouring tiumen!). -
auftragten der Anlage erfolgen. Gilt nicht fGr 2.6.
                                      '                            ^
the system. Does not apply in the case of 2.6.
1 1.4.2 Die Freigabe des Strahlungsbetriebes muS durch 1.4.2 Permission for radiation can only be given by the i
den Strahlenschutzbeauftragten der Anlage erfolgen.-
radiation protection official responsible for the unit (Eventuelles Absichern von strahlengefihrdeten Neben-(attention must be payed to secure any neighbouring tiumen!). -
^
rooms endangered by radiation!).
rooms endangered by radiation!).
;                  2.     MaBnahmen vor Beginn der Atbeiten an '                 2.     Measures prior to starting work on Tele-Telegamma-Anbgen                     ' ' . .                    gamma systems .
2.
: s.  .        s                      .
MaBnahmen vor Beginn der Atbeiten an '
h;                  2.1. Der Betrieb der Bestrahlu6gseinrichtung birgt Ge.         2.1. The operation of radiation devices involves radia-
2.
)                   fahren durch Strahlung, durch 'mechanische und elektri.         tion hazard through inherent mechanical and electrical
Measures prior to starting work on Tele-Telegamma-Anbgen s
                    ' sche Funktionen in sich.                                       functions. The following instructions must be observed im'interesse der Sicherheit sind nachfolgende Anweisun-         carefully in the interest of safety.
gamma systems.
                  'geri genauestens zu beachten.
h; s.
              ,      2.2. Riume gegen Betreten durch Unbefugte sichern               2.2. Make sure that the room is not entered by persons (Hinweisschild, Seilabsperrung).                               without permission (warning notice, rope barrier).
2.1. Der Betrieb der Bestrahlu6gseinrichtung birgt Ge.
I
2.1. The operation of radiation devices involves radia-
'                  2.3, Arbeiten an stromiosen Anlagen sind nur beige-             2.3. Work on systems not under current can only be Bffneten Sicherungstrenner oder entfernter Hauptsiche-           performed with opened safety switch or Mmoved mains
)
!                  rung durchzufGhren.                                             fuse.
fahren durch Strahlung, durch 'mechanische und elektri.
tion hazard through inherent mechanical and electrical
' sche Funktionen in sich.
functions. The following instructions must be observed im'interesse der Sicherheit sind nachfolgende Anweisun-carefully in the interest of safety.
'geri genauestens zu beachten.
2.2. Riume gegen Betreten durch Unbefugte sichern 2.2. Make sure that the room is not entered by persons (Hinweisschild, Seilabsperrung).
without permission (warning notice, rope barrier).
I 2.3, Arbeiten an stromiosen Anlagen sind nur beige-2.3. Work on systems not under current can only be Bffneten Sicherungstrenner oder entfernter Hauptsiche-performed with opened safety switch or Mmoved mains rung durchzufGhren.
fuse.
)
l
l
                                                                                                                                                      )
'Achtung:
                  'Achtung:                                                         Caution:
Caution:
}                   Raumlichtschaltung und Raumlichtanschlasse sind da-i                                                                                  Switch and connections forroom.ligh ting are not switched durch nicht abgeschaltet.                                       ofin this case.                                         '
}
i
Raumlichtschaltung und Raumlichtanschlasse sind da-Switch and connections forroom.ligh ting are not switched i
;                  Achtung:                   ' '
durch nicht abgeschaltet.
ofin this case.
i Achtung:
Caution:
Caution:
Nach VDE 0750, s 8 b, massen die unter Spannung                 According to VDE 0750, s 8 b, allparts under voltage
Nach VDE 0750, s 8 b, massen die unter Spannung According to VDE 0750, s 8 b, allparts under voltage
\                 stehenden Teile durch Abdeckungen gegen zufElliges               must be securedagainst unintentional touching by covers
\\
)                 Berdhren geschGtzt und deutlich als unter Spannung               and clearly marked as being active (room-light switches, i
stehenden Teile durch Abdeckungen gegen zufElliges must be securedagainst unintentional touching by covers
stehend gekennzeichnet werden (Raumlichtschaltung,               roomdight connections).
)
* RaumlichtanschlUssel, t                                                                                                                                                     '
Berdhren geschGtzt und deutlich als unter Spannung and clearly marked as being active (room-light switches, i
i                   2.4. Arbeiten an einer unter Spannung stehenden An-             2.4. Work on a system connected to voltage is not i                   lage ist verboten. Falls jedoch zwingend erforderlich, ist     allowed. However, should this be absolutely necessary,
stehend gekennzeichnet werden (Raumlichtschaltung, roomdight connections).
!                die Anwesenheit einer zweiten Person unbedingt erforder-         the presence of a second person is required under all cir.
RaumlichtanschlUssel, t
lich.                                                           cumstances.
i 2.4. Arbeiten an einer unter Spannung stehenden An-2.4. Work on a system connected to voltage is not i
1, j,
lage ist verboten. Falls jedoch zwingend erforderlich, ist allowed. However, should this be absolutely necessary, die Anwesenheit einer zweiten Person unbedingt erforder-the presence of a second person is required under all cir.
2.5. Der SchlGssel des SchlGsselschalters zur Betitigung         2.5. The key to the key switch for actuating the lock           ,
lich.
        ,        des Verschlusses ist abzuziehen und sicher aufzubewah-           system is to be removed and kept in a safe place.
1, cumstances.
j, 2.5. Der SchlGssel des SchlGsselschalters zur Betitigung 2.5. The key to the key switch for actuating the lock des Verschlusses ist abzuziehen und sicher aufzubewah-system is to be removed and kept in a safe place.
ren.
ren.
<                  T 2.910.012.01                                               2-5 i
T 2.910.012.01 2-5 i
h
h


i 4
i p,
p, 2.6. SchlGsselschalter und ~0rkontakte dGrfen nicht             2.6. Key switch and door contacts must not be bridged GberbrGekt werden.                                             over.
2.6. SchlGsselschalter und ~0rkontakte dGrfen nicht 2.6. Key switch and door contacts must not be bridged 4
2.7. Bei Unterbrechung der Arbeiten sind Raume, von             2.7. When interrupting work, rooms from which it is denen ausdas Einschalten oder die Bedienung der Anlage         possible to switch on or operate the unit must be secured m6glich ist, abzuschlie6en.                                   against entry.
GberbrGekt werden.
i
over.
,              3. MaSnahmen vor dem Einschalten der Strah-                 3. Measures prior to switching on radiation
2.7. Bei Unterbrechung der Arbeiten sind Raume, von 2.7. When interrupting work, rooms from which it is denen ausdas Einschalten oder die Bedienung der Anlage possible to switch on or operate the unit must be secured m6glich ist, abzuschlie6en.
;                      lung                                                                                                                 -
against entry.
i 3.1. Es mua sichergestellt werden, dag sich vor Ein-           3.1. Care must be taken that no persons are present in schalten der Strahlung keine Personen im Sperrbereich           the prohibited zone during radiation.
i 3.
MaSnahmen vor dem Einschalten der Strah-3.
Measures prior to switching on radiation lung i
3.1. Es mua sichergestellt werden, dag sich vor Ein-3.1. Care must be taken that no persons are present in schalten der Strahlung keine Personen im Sperrbereich the prohibited zone during radiation.
aufhalten.
aufhalten.
I
I 3.2. TGre zum Bestrahlungsraum schlie8en.
;              3.2. TGre zum Bestrahlungsraum schlie8en.                       3.2. Close doors to radiation room.
3.2. Close doors to radiation room.
: 4. Ma8nahmen wihrend des Betriebes                         4. Measures to be taken during operation 4.1. Sofort nach dem Einschalten der Anlage (ohne             4.1. The " Emergency OFF" switch and (in the case of
4.
Ma8nahmen wihrend des Betriebes 4.
Measures to be taken during operation 4.1. Sofort nach dem Einschalten der Anlage (ohne 4.1. The " Emergency OFF" switch and (in the case of
(
(
          \
Strahlung) ist der "Not Aus".Schalter und (mit Strah-radiation) the door contact are to be tested immediately
Strahlung) ist der "Not Aus".Schalter und (mit Strah-lung) der TGrkontakt zu testen.
\\
radiation) the door contact are to be tested immediately after switching off the unit (without radiation).
lung) der TGrkontakt zu testen.
4.2. Im eingeschalteten Zustand mu3 die Anlage von             4.2. When switched on, the unit must be continuously mindestens einer Person dauernd Gberwacht werden,             supervised by at least one person.
after switching off the uni (without radiation).
4.3. Bei unerwartet auftretenden Schwierigkeiten in           4.3. In the case of unexpectedly occurring difficulties Bezug auf die Einhaltung der Sicherheit fQr Patient, Be.       with regard to maintenance of safety forpatient. operator dienenden sowie Oritte, ist umgehend der Technische j                                                                              and third persons, the technical manager of the represen-Leiter der Geschiftsstelle, der Landesgesellschaft oder tatives office, foreign subsidiary or branch office is to be
t 4.2. Im eingeschalteten Zustand mu3 die Anlage von 4.2. When switched on, the unit must be continuously mindestens einer Person dauernd Gberwacht werden, supervised by at least one person.
,              Landesvertretung zu verstandigen.                               informed.
4.3. Bei unerwartet auftretenden Schwierigkeiten in 4.3. In the case of unexpectedly occurring difficulties Bezug auf die Einhaltung der Sicherheit fQr Patient, Be.
i
with regard to maintenance of safety forpatient. operator dienenden sowie Oritte, ist umgehend der Technische and third persons, the technical manager of the represen-Leiter der Geschiftsstelle, der Landesgesellschaft oder tatives office, foreign subsidiary or branch office is to be j
* j              4.4 Sicherheitstechnische Anderungen dGrfen nur nach 4.4. Technical changes to safety conditions may only Angaben der dafGr erstellten Werksanleitung durchgefGhrt be performed in accordance with details given in the fac-(             werden.
Landesvertretung zu verstandigen.
informed.
i j
4.4 Sicherheitstechnische Anderungen dGrfen nur nach 4.4. Technical changes to safety conditions may only Angaben der dafGr erstellten Werksanleitung durchgefGhrt be performed in accordance with details given in the fac-(
werden.
tory instructions provided for this purpose.
tory instructions provided for this purpose.
,I
,I
~
~
;              4.5. BeiMir;eln, die den sicheren Betrieb beeintrichti-4.5. In the case of defects which reduce safe operation,
4.5.
{             gen, ist die Anlage - jedoch nur mit Einwilligung des Be-
BeiMir;eln, die den sicheren Betrieb beeintrichti-4.5.
;                                                                            tne unit -although only with permission of the operator treibers - stillzulegent                                       -is to be put out of commission!
In the case of defects which reduce safe operation,
l             Die Anlagedarf e st danndem Betreiber wiederGbergeben         The system may only be returned to the operator for use
{
!            werden,wenn die Mangel beseitigt sind.
gen, ist die Anlage - jedoch nur mit Einwilligung des Be-tne unit -although only with permission of the operator treibers - stillzulegent
-is to be put out of commission!
l Die Anlagedarf e st danndem Betreiber wiederGbergeben The system may only be returned to the operator for use werden,wenn die Mangel beseitigt sind.
when the defect has been corrected.
when the defect has been corrected.
i
i 5.
;              5. Besondere Hinweise fur Telegammagerste                 5.
Besondere Hinweise fur Telegammagerste 5.
i Special notes for Telegamma units i
Special notes for Telegamma units i
5.1. Im Strahlerkopf und teilweise in der Blende               5.1     In the radiation head and partially in the dia.
5.1. Im Strahlerkopf und teilweise in der Blende 5.1 In the radiation head and partially in the dia.
f             (Gammatron S)ist Uran als Abschirmmaterial vorhanden. phragm (Gammatron S) uranium is used as protective i
i f
(Gammatron S)ist Uran als Abschirmmaterial vorhanden. phragm (Gammatron S) uranium is used as protective i
Uran darf in k einer Weise bearbeitet werden. Wurde Uranmaterial. Uranium rrust not be worked upon in any way.
Uran darf in k einer Weise bearbeitet werden. Wurde Uranmaterial. Uranium rrust not be worked upon in any way.
{             beryhrt, so sind nach der Arbeit grGndlich Hinde zu                                                                             I waschen, if uranium has been touched, hands must be washed thoroughly after work.
I
{
beryhrt, so sind nach der Arbeit grGndlich Hinde zu if uranium has been touched, hands must be washed
: waschen, thoroughly after work.
1 j
1 j
5.2. Sind die Abdeckungen vom Quellenschacht ent.
5.2. Sind die Abdeckungen vom Quellenschacht ent.
5.2. It is absolutely forbidden to perform any kind of l             fernt, so darfen auf keinen Fall Geritebewegungen, elek.
5.2. It is absolutely forbidden to perform any kind of l
j                                                                            unit movements under any circumstances, whether elec-trisch oder von Hand, durchgefGhrt werden.
fernt, so darfen auf keinen Fall Geritebewegungen, elek.
{                                                                            trical or manual when the covers on the source shaft are not in position.
unit movements under any circumstances, whether elec-j trisch oder von Hand, durchgefGhrt werden.
trical or manual when the covers on the source shaft are
{
not in position.
I i
I i
5.3. Sind unvorhergesehene St6rungen vorhanden, die 5.3. Should an unprecedented defect occur whereby a eine einmalige Personendosisbelastung von mehr als 3 j                                                                            person may expect a unique exposure dose of more than Rem erwarten lassen (quadratisches Abstandsgesetz der                                                                             l t                                                                            3 Rem (pay attention to the quadratic law of radiation           1
5.3. Sind unvorhergesehene St6rungen vorhanden, die 5.3. Should an unprecedented defect occur whereby a eine einmalige Personendosisbelastung von mehr als 3 person may expect a unique exposure dose of more than j
              $trahlung beachtenl), so ist der Bestrahlungsraum unver-
Rem erwarten lassen (quadratisches Abstandsgesetz der 3 Rem (pay attention to the quadratic law of radiation t
$trahlung beachtenl), so ist der Bestrahlungsraum unver-1 at distance!), the radiation room is to be evacuated im.
}
}
j
(
(  zGglich zu verlassen, abzuschlieGen und sofort Abteilung TVS,Tel. 2568 oder VT 45,Tel. 3108, UB Med Erlangen, at distance!), the radiation room is to be evacuated im.
zGglich zu verlassen, abzuschlieGen und sofort Abteilung mediately, closed and the department TVS, Tel. 2568, j
mediately, closed and the department TVS, Tel. 2568, zu verstindigen.                                              or VT 45, Tel. 3108, Medical E ngineering Group Erlangen         ;
TVS,Tel. 2568 oder VT 45,Tel. 3108, UB Med Erlangen, or VT 45, Tel. 3108, Medical E ngineering Group Erlangen zu verstindigen.
(UB Med), to be informed at once.
(UB Med), to be informed at once.
[;
[;
VT 45/Hain                                                                                         T 2.910.012.01 i
VT 45/Hain T 2.910.012.01 i
i     #
i 4
4


Ejj g((                         3>     "I~}
Ejj g((
W 412                           .
3>
  -- w m w .,                                                        .._' *-          n  ,                    ,
"I~}
fg
W 412 fg n
/N
-- w m w.,
(           )gh                                                                                                                        T 2.910.071.01.01.02 Ujs                                                               General remarks and preparatory work
/N h
(
)g T 2.910.071.01.01.02 Ujs General remarks and preparatory work
:1)
:1)
SiEMENS                                 for the loading and unloading of                                     9 mie wm
SiEMENS for the loading and unloading of 9 mie wm a Co-60 or Cs-137 source aI!
                                , , , , ,                              a Co-60 or Cs-137 source IaI!                     o. 4.=
I]Il I
I]Il                              S" 1:
o.
st
4.=
              }g Adjusting Instructions jp{
S" 1: }
al l J.                 Contents
st g
{h yg                 ~ 1.       Prerequisites Page 2
Adjusting Instructions jp{
1.1. Statutory requirements on the handling of radioactive materials                                                     2 ig.3 5                                                                                                                                           3 r,;{         1.2. Personnel dosimeter and radiation. measuring appliances h .I ms 1.3. Weights 1.4. Selection of the transport route                                                                                  4 3                         [*j.lf;, , g;,
al l J.
  ,. eg
Contents
(.)                     2.         Loading frame for exchanging sources                                                                         6 6
{h Page yg
2.1. Remark Itl            2.2. List of contents of the transport crate                                                                           6 I                   2.3. Assembling the crane frame                                                                                         6 2.4. Dismantling the crane frame                                                                                         9 Ih l2                                                                                                                                                                             -
~ 1.
      ',y
Prerequisites 2
: 3.         List of tools, aids and monitoring devices                                                                 12 1
ig.3 1.1. Statutory requirements on the handling of radioactive materials 2
      .i g,J;.           ,
5 r,;{
sy   s i e i !                                                                                                                                                                     .
1.2. Personnel dosimeter and radiation. measuring appliances 3
h.I 1.3. Weights 3
[*j.lf;,, g;,
ms 1.4. Selection of the transport route 4
,. eg
(.)
2.
Loading frame for exchanging sources 6
l 2.1. Remark 6
It 2.2. List of contents of the transport crate 6
I 2.3. Assembling the crane frame 6
Ih 2.4. Dismantling the crane frame 9
l2
',y 3.
List of tools, aids and monitoring devices 12 1
g,J;.
-. i :
sy s
i e i !
I ql.
I ql.
i e f.       ,
ie f.
    ,ip                                                                                                                                                                                         l r
,ip t
t      s, i             !                                                                                                                                                              '        ''-
s, r
l 1
i l r.l 1
  ,l r.l                                                                                                                                                                                       l t         I- ,
t I-I {
I {
l *-
l *-
s I
s I N
:        N
, is l I, 1'
  , is l I, 1'
i
i
[. , ik eng'f tch SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT                                     Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen e.===.========.                                                     _
[., ik eng'f tch SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen e.===.========.
::*.*lL*.*.. '.*:=" *OC%*****.'f*;O**.'.*.;*ff0'"** * **'***
::*.*lL*.*. '.*:=" *OC%*****.'f*;O**.'.*.;*ff0'"** * **'***


r
r
                                                                                                                                  .: . . . n. .
.:... n..
: 1.     Prerequisites For the loading and unloading of a Co40 or Cs.137 source, coupling devices are needed which are specific for the unit involved (Gammatron 1,2,3, R S and Caesa).                                                                             -
1.
Prerequisites For the loading and unloading of a Co40 or Cs.137 source, coupling devices are needed which are specific for the unit involved (Gammatron 1,2,3, R S and Caesa).
All these coupling devices can be screwed only to the Siemens dual-channel contaire, viodel B (S 1747).
All these coupling devices can be screwed only to the Siemens dual-channel contaire, viodel B (S 1747).
Therefore, sources for Gammatron units must be loaded with this container model.
Therefore, sources for Gammatron units must be loaded with this container model.
Coupling device, Gammetron S, complete, container and head ends                                                 Part No. 20 96 923 S 3513 Coupling device, Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Causa container end                                                           Part No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling (attachment) plate, Gammatron 3 (from unit no.1011/0211 onwards)
Coupling device, Gammetron S, complete, container and head ends Part No. 20 96 923 S 3513 Coupling device, Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Causa container end Part No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling (attachment) plate, Gammatron 3 (from unit no.1011/0211 onwards)
* head end                                                               Part No. 4189 411 S 3513 Coupling (attachment) plate, Gammatron 1,2, and R head and                                                               Part No. 4190 864 S 3513                             ,
* head end Part No. 4189 411 S 3513 Coupling (attachment) plate, Gammatron 1,2, and R head and Part No. 4190 864 S 3513
                                                                                                                                  *w%,
*w%,
                                                                                                                                  ,.i, Coupling (attachment) plate, Caesa Gammatron                                                                                   .
,.i, Coupling (attachment) plate, Caesa Gammatron head end Part No. 42 79 717 S 3513 j
head end                                                               Part No. 42 79 717 S 3513                   j Additional intermediate piece, Gammatron 2 and R head end                                                               Part No. 4190 989 S 3513 Additional intermediate piece, Gammatron 1                                                                                             -
Additional intermediate piece, Gammatron 2 and R head end Part No. 4190 989 S 3513 Additional intermediate piece, Gammatron 1 head end Pan No. 4191276 S 3513 in addition, for all loading and unloading work, a loading frame, Part No. 44 39 451 SH 085, is required.
head end                                                               Pan No. 4191276 S 3513 in addition, for all loading and unloading work, a loading frame, Part No. 44 39 451 SH 085, is required.                                                                                                             '
For transporting the container into the treatment room, a lif ting trolley is also needed (possibly, depending upon the nature of the floor covering, provided with plastic wheels).
For transporting the container into the treatment room, a lif ting trolley is also needed (possibly, depending upon the nature of the floor covering, provided with plastic wheels).
* In the case of units with earlier f actory numbers, thecoupling plate is dif ferent and inquires should be made of VT 43.
* In the case of units with earlier f actory numbers, thecoupling plate is dif ferent and inquires should be made of VT 43.
1.1. When handing radioactive materials, the following points MUST be complied with:
1.1.
When handing radioactive materials, the following points MUST be complied with:
1.1.1. For all loading / unloading, servicing and repair work, the regulations (requirements) of the authorization docu-ments granted to the f actory, the customer and the local sales office, subsidiaries or agencies abroad, must be complied with accordingly. Particular attention should be paid to the regulations concerning the informing of the appropriate authority, f or example, when carrying out loading / unloading, repair work, etc. that needs more than one day to complete and also in the case of any unusual occt rrence.
1.1.1. For all loading / unloading, servicing and repair work, the regulations (requirements) of the authorization docu-ments granted to the f actory, the customer and the local sales office, subsidiaries or agencies abroad, must be complied with accordingly. Particular attention should be paid to the regulations concerning the informing of the appropriate authority, f or example, when carrying out loading / unloading, repair work, etc. that needs more than one day to complete and also in the case of any unusual occt rrence.
1.1.2. The measurement of the personnel dose and the medical examination of the employees must be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the country concemed. In the case of the Federal Republic of Germany, these requirements are contained in paragraphs 36 and 46 of the 1. Strahlenschutzverordnung (1st Radiation Protection Ordinance) (from April 1,1977, the appropriate paragraphs of the new Radiation Protection Ordi-nance).
1.1.2. The measurement of the personnel dose and the medical examination of the employees must be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the country concemed. In the case of the Federal Republic of Germany, these requirements are contained in paragraphs 36 and 46 of the 1. Strahlenschutzverordnung (1st Radiation Protection Ordinance) (from April 1,1977, the appropriate paragraphs of the new Radiation Protection Ordi-nance).
1.1.3. The changing of radiation sources, and also repairs to the shutter of a Gammatron unit, rest be carried out by at least 2 persons; one of these persons must be thoroughly familiar with the design and construction of the unit and be fully conversant with all the requirements of radiation protection applicable. Thste experts must be in possession of a written authorization provided by Siemens Erlangen to the effect that he may carry out such work.
1.1.3. The changing of radiation sources, and also repairs to the shutter of a Gammatron unit, rest be carried out by at least 2 persons; one of these persons must be thoroughly familiar with the design and construction of the unit and be fully conversant with all the requirements of radiation protection applicable. Thste experts must be in possession of a written authorization provided by Siemens Erlangen to the effect that he may carry out such work.
T 2.910.071.01 1.1.4. For all work carried out on the Gammatron units, the treatment heads and transport containers, the instructions
T 2.910.071.01 1.1.4. For all work carried out on the Gammatron units, the treatment heads and transport containers, the instructions
                .O         cor. rained herein must be strictly complied with.
.O cor. rained herein must be strictly complied with.
1.1.5. For all such work as loading, unloading and exchanging the source, copes of the applicable valid handling aut-horizations and the appropriate instructions for carrying out work issued by the f actory, must be in possession of the persons carrying out the work. When abroad, the approp ate laws of the country involved must be obser-ved.
1.1.5. For all such work as loading, unloading and exchanging the source, copes of the applicable valid handling aut-horizations and the appropriate instructions for carrying out work issued by the f actory, must be in possession of the persons carrying out the work. When abroad, the approp ate laws of the country involved must be obser-ved.
1.2. Personnel dosimeter and radiation-measuring appliances During the transport of radioactive materials (also the accompanying of transports) and also during loading, un-loading or sourve exchange, a counter device must be available f or a measuring range of at least 1 mr/h to 1 R/h.
1.2.
Personnel dosimeter and radiation-measuring appliances During the transport of radioactive materials (also the accompanying of transports) and also during loading, un-loading or sourve exchange, a counter device must be available f or a measuring range of at least 1 mr/h to 1 R/h.
Every person concerned with the work must wear a radiationprotection badge (for example, film dosimeter) and carry an integratir g pocked dosimeter with direct display and also an acoustic alarm device (for example TDL 3).
Every person concerned with the work must wear a radiationprotection badge (for example, film dosimeter) and carry an integratir g pocked dosimeter with direct display and also an acoustic alarm device (for example TDL 3).
The latter must be adjustable at least to the ranges 2,5,10 and 20 mR.
The latter must be adjustable at least to the ranges 2,5,10 and 20 mR.
1.3. Weights 4                  1.3.1. Transport container type BS 1747 (17 99188 S 1747) (old designation S.hi 47 a) i'. . k'm ; ..
1.3.
Total weight                                                     approx. 2000 kp
Weights 1.3.1. Transport container type BS 1747 (17 99188 S 1747) (old designation S.hi 47 a) 4 i'.. k'm ;..
                ,          Fire protection hood                                             approx. 350 kp Base                                                             approx. 150 kp Source. holder                                                   approx.1500 kp Dimensions:
Total weight approx. 2000 kp Fire protection hood approx. 350 kp Base approx. 150 kp Source. holder approx.1500 kp Dimensions:
;                                                                            Transport container, complete
Transport container, complete
!                                                  =                 800             >                              =               730#       =
=
t                                                                                                                                                                                               ,
800
l                                                 .
=
                                                                        .                                                                  1 l
730#
Ad            Q           I       ll i Il
=
                                                                                  ](                                 {gNJ J                 l L
t l
8 o
1 l
              .9.s               o o
A d Q I ll i Il
I 1f                     f                     !                                                            !
](
1 t                   +--
{gNJ J
R                                    IR                       MP 4
l L
o                                                                             o    y                       ?   o o
8o
i IN                   P-                                                         %                                #
.9.s oo I
I                                                                                                                 <
1f f
                                                                  *- 500 - ->                                                         1000             -
t R
1 Total weight: approx. 2000 kp hg.1                                                                                                                                       Fig. 2 i                                                                                                                                                                                                         !
IR MP 1
j                                                                                                                                                  T 2.910.071.01 l
o y
?
o
+
4 oo i
IN P-I
*- 500 - ->
1000 1
Total weight: approx. 2000 kp hg.1 Fig. 2 i T 2.910.071.01 j
l l
l l
2
2
  -,-~-,-r-----,           -.n,         , , , - _ - - - . - - , . .            . . - - - , . , ~ . - _ _ _ -           .,,--,--,..-,n,.-,--.n.
-,-~-,-r-----,
-.n,
.. - - -,., ~. - _ _ _ -
.,,--,--,..-,n,.-,--.n.


Inner transport container o
Inner transport container O
                                                                                                              -                                              O
o
                                          /on       o q           g.g                                             - . .,_                            }
/on o
o'o                                                                           j,
q g.g
(                                                        ,k N                 l   '
}
k                       l h _-_.-       .:d                                             t: =: :-     .= =/
(
t                                                   e                 v i
o'o
* t
,k j,
                                'F.                       F                                     y o                            y         o                     -
N l
E                          .3                             *                                        '
k l
Fig. 3
h _-_.-
                                                                                                                                                        -+ #
.:d t: =: :-.= =/
Fire protection hood approx. 350 kp                                                                                                     ^
t e
                                                                                                                                                  )
v i
              =           800                 :-
t
t Source container N                Il I Il           I                     with 2 source channels                         Base 3
'F.
                              ,                                  approx.1500 kp                                 approx.150 kp a                   n                           -
F o
y y
o E
.3 Fig. 3
-+ #
Fire protection hood approx. 350 kp
^
)
=
800 t
Source container Il I Il I
N with 2 source channels Base 3
approx.1500 kp approx.150 kp a
n l
\\
l 3
j t = =:- = =/
] l\\
bR 85 4
(\\
l ln
@D i
t y'
3 7.
oc cc
\\
l
l
                                                                                                              \        l        3 j
/
t = =:-  = =/                         '    -
M, v
                                                          ] l\  -
v e
l t
n v
(\y' bR 3
i Dimensions of smaller base m brackets Fig. 4 I
7.
.)
4 ln oc 85
1.3.2. Transport crate with loading frame and hoist approx. 300 kp 1.3.3. Transport crate with coupling devices approx. 250 kp 1.4.
                                                                                                                                          @D-cc v       .
Selection of the transport route The transport route into the treatment room must be selected in such a way that the floor can support a load of at least 1800 kp. To improve the distribution of the weight, thick wooden planks or steel plates should be used On (Fe floor, Remark:
i
                                                                    \      l      /        v           e                           n   M, v i
_                                    Dimensions of smaller base m brackets Fig. 4 I
1.3.2. Transport crate with loading frame and hoist
                                                                                                                                              .),
approx. 300 kp 1.3.3. Transport crate with coupling devices                                             approx. 250 kp 1.4. Selection of the transport route The transport route into the treatment room must be selected in such a way that the floor can support a load of at least 1800 kp. To improve the distribution of the weight, thick wooden planks or steel plates should be used On (Fe floor, Remark:
Prior to the transport into the treatment room, the fore protection hood must be lifted off. To do this, lift the hood vertically upwards to ensure that it does not " jam"against the container i
Prior to the transport into the treatment room, the fore protection hood must be lifted off. To do this, lift the hood vertically upwards to ensure that it does not " jam"against the container i
j   ,1.4.1, Preparation for the continued transport Open the padlock on the set pin (1/ Fig. 5) and remove. Release the 12 bolts (2/ Fig. 5) with the 24 mm open-ended spanner.
j
,1.4.1, Preparation for the continued transport Open the padlock on the set pin (1/ Fig. 5) and remove. Release the 12 bolts (2/ Fig. 5) with the 24 mm open-ended spanner.
Lif t of f the fire-p'otection hood (3rFig. 51.
Lif t of f the fire-p'otection hood (3rFig. 51.
Transport the container into the treatment room.
Transport the container into the treatment room.
T 2.910.071.01 Remark:
T 2.910.071.01 Remark:
    ,- m              Normally,in the treatment room, the container can be lifted out of the base with the aid of the loading frame.
Normally,in the treatment room, the container can be lifted out of the base with the aid of the loading frame.
(?n
,- m
        )
(?
If, however, a container should be supplied in a high base, it is more expedient to lift the transport container (1/ Fig 6) out of the base beforehand and then transport is alone into the treatment room (care must be taken to ensure that the transportcontainer is properly supported so that transport can be reliably and safely effected).
If, however, a container should be supplied in a high base, it is more expedient to lift the transport container n
)
(1/ Fig 6) out of the base beforehand and then transport is alone into the treatment room (care must be taken to ensure that the transportcontainer is properly supported so that transport can be reliably and safely effected).
1.4.2. When re-inserting the container into the base, the red mark (3/ Fig. 6) must be made to coincide with the red mark (4/ Fig. 6).
1.4.2. When re-inserting the container into the base, the red mark (3/ Fig. 6) must be made to coincide with the red mark (4/ Fig. 6).
The fire-protection cover (3/ Fig. 5) is then lowered into the base in such a way that the set pin (1/ Fig. 5) engages in the hole (5/ Fig. 6).
The fire-protection cover (3/ Fig. 5) is then lowered into the base in such a way that the set pin (1/ Fig. 5) engages in the hole (5/ Fig. 6).
The fire-protection cover is then secured by screwing into place.
The fire-protection cover is then secured by screwing into place.
The padlock on the set p;n (1/ Fig. 5) is again fitted.
The padlock on the set p;n (1/ Fig. 5) is again fitted.
                                            /                                                                                                         ,
/
    , ~ ,
, ~,
          )
)
k
k
                            +- j                                       .
+- j
                                                                                                                  =
.-r
                                ; =
=
                                                            .-r                                                              "
; =
v}- .
v}-.
(                             y..j   -
i
                                                              -: ,@                                                i L/                            ,
(
y..j L/
i:: g.;
c.
c.
i::g-l g ,.;                            '
g-l,
                              .,                        ll \ <                                 ',
ll \\ <
                                                                                                              ~E 1.aua
1.aua f.. ~
* i:. 7:.i.                           [ll       r-    -    -"'        -
i:. 7:.i.
                                                          -Q'if "
[ll
f .. ~  l
~E-r-
                                                                                                          ' / *:.:
-Q'if "
l
' /
:R.....
:R.....
                                                          . . o yh::                                      ,
'j:
                                                                                                                          'j:
.. o yh::
3.i+
3.i+
f ;_,
f ;_,
o       u, ._,up -                        - - -
o u,._,up 4.
4.
,b. M-1 o
1 o                  ,b._          M-N  -
o
o
                              ??
??
O Fig. 5                                                                                                                       Fig. 6 b                                                                                                                             T 2.910.071.01
N O
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
'b T 2.910.071.01


8
8 2.
: 2.     Loading frame for exchanging sources (Part No. 44 39 431 SH 085)                                                                       ,
Loading frame for exchanging sources (Part No. 44 39 431 SH 085)


===2.1. Remark===
===2.1. Remark===
The loading frame with hoist is packed in a transport crate.
The loading frame with hoist is packed in a transport crate.
The loading frame can be assembled by two persons, but three are better.
The loading frame can be assembled by two persons, but three are better.
2.2. List of contents of the transpo,t crate 1 crane frame comprising the supporting member (1/ Fig. 7) and 4 multi-section supporting members (2/ Fig. 7).
2.2.
1 hoist,2500 kg litting capacity                                     3/ Fig. 7) 1 lif ting :ing,2000 kg lifting capacity                               (4/ Fig. 7)
List of contents of the transpo,t crate 1 crane frame comprising the supporting member (1/ Fig. 7) and 4 multi-section supporting members (2/ Fig. 7).
I crab. 2000 kg lifting capacity                                       (5/ Fig. 7)                                                                         .
1 hoist,2500 kg litting capacity 3/ Fig. 7) 1 lif ting :ing,2000 kg lifting capacity (4/ Fig. 7)
4 struts                                                               (6/ Fig. 7)
I crab. 2000 kg lifting capacity (5/ Fig. 7) 4 struts (6/ Fig. 7) r*
                                                                                                                                                        .. r*
e : o.. =
e : o. . =
h 3
h                                 3                                         2
2 O
                                                                                                          ''"                              O
gom
                                                                                                                    ,, /
,, /
2 gom                          -
/
                                                                                                                          /           .,'-
                                            ,,,~,
                                                      ,.,4 4    --
: 7. , -
                    ,,.s,~""
I              '
                      ,,.-.                                                                                          ,,s s s-                                                            h                  ~
De      ,
2
2
                    /                                               ' ,, .,,e': s
,.,4 4
                                                  -'        ,,,,,s~               8 6                                 ~""''                   s*'""',,
: 7., -
                              , s.,a,s                         ...
,,, ~,
gase 'd                 ,.,,F*
I
                                      ,,s,s
,,.s,~""
                                .,s' Fig. 7 2.3. Assembling the crane frame 2.3.1. Arrange the individual elements around the supporting element (1/ Fig. 7). Ensure that the marking rings (7/ Fig.
,,s "
s h
~
D s-2 e
/
',,.,,e': s
,,,,,s~
8 6
~""''
s*'""',,
, s.,a,s gas 'd
,.,,F*
e
,,s,s
.,s' Fig. 7 2.3.
Assembling the crane frame 2.3.1. Arrange the individual elements around the supporting element (1/ Fig. 7). Ensure that the marking rings (7/ Fig.
: 7) coincide! In addition, the numbers 1 to 4 have been stamped into the metal near the fixing holes (in some cases also dots).
: 7) coincide! In addition, the numbers 1 to 4 have been stamped into the metal near the fixing holes (in some cases also dots).
2.3.2. Screw the upper support element to the ins;de of the supporting member as shown in Fig. 8.
2.3.2. Screw the upper support element to the ins;de of the supporting member as shown in Fig. 8.
T 2.910.071.01                                                                   -
T 2.910.071.01 -


l 7
7
J                                                                                                           i   ,
. J i
j                                             %'
j i
i                                          ip 3
ip 3
                                                                                                              ]
]
                                                                >                                  I       !
I
                                                                            - .m.:     e                     e
-.m.:
                                                                                              =
e e
l                                         >$
=
    .s t
l
w .1                                   f.
/[
                                                /[
"-.s t
E e                                                     .
.1 w
                                        $                                                    /
f.
* e f
E e
/
f e
g f
g f
f Fig. 8       ,
f Fig. 8 2.3.3. Insert the lower supporting element into the upper element and secure with the struts.
    ,      2.3.3. Insert the lower supporting element into the upper element and secure with the struts.
2.3.4. Place the loading frame on its side as shown in Fig. 9 and then set it up.
2.3.4. Place the loading frame on its side as shown in Fig. 9 and then set it up.
Remark:
Remark:
Depending upon the nature of the floor in the treatment room, wooden planks might be placed under the feet
Depending upon the nature of the floor in the treatment room, wooden planks might be placed under the feet of the frame to protect the floor and provide better weight distribution!
                                                                                                                                                *~
*~
of the frame to protect the floor and provide better weight distribution!
4 I
4 I
U                                                                                                                 T 2.910.071.01
U T 2.910.071.01


I e
e 4..
4 ..
~
                                                                ~
r
r
                                                                          ^~
^~
m
m
                                                              ,,s..
,,s..
xe 4     a..
xe 4
                                                                                                  ~
a..
                                                                      ~----..     . - ~ .         %,
~
                .                                z-   el --.
~ - - - -..
                    .___.s.
. - ~.
                                  , .sw %,.
z-el --.
I         o
,.sw %,.
_40 r,b,;e. -
I
                                                                                                                    ~ ' '
_ 4 0 o
em         h           xg0 40
.___.s.
[pmy.               exs. l ume. -
r,b,;e. -
                                                                                                              )
4
Fig. 9                                                                                                                 '
~ ' '
(.. .'
exs. l ume. -
em h
xg0 0
[pmy.
)
Fig. 9
(...'
2.3.5. Fit the erab.
2.3.5. Fit the erab.
Hang the hoist from the bearing bolt of the crab.
Hang the hoist from the bearing bolt of the crab.
                                                                                                                          /@-
/@-
T 2.910.07g,oy                                                                                                                                                                               .
T 2.910.07g,oy.


s'#   .48.***     9 7
s'#
3 OO@@s i
.48.***
j  39 '
9 OO@@s 3
992 X
7 i'"
                                                                                                          ~
39 992 $,%
                                                                                                                                    $   %,D g 't 3                                             -                    i 1 <\
g 't 3 X
a        ,    \
%,D
t                         .
~
j i
1 <\\
\\
a t
l t
l t
                                                                          %                                          I l sin
I l
                                                                                                                          't an as f
sin 3
3 i                                                         F (
an as
l                           ,
't f
n        i                                                           I f           l                                                     s     {
i F
F             !                      '                            !!    !
(
1              i                     ,                              L   {
l n
                                                                                                                                                    }
i I
p                                                         }.
f l
                                                                        =               1                                                                                                            ..u t
s
(                       ;            i.                               I'.lMAe st:4,
{
                                                                                            >                  6 jf                         f' I
F 1
    .-)
i L
i-t i                  1' O
{
                                                                      !                                                                    i           {
}
N                         '
p
                                                                    .                                                                man                 t.
}.
f                           \                                   m             a
1
                                                                                                .l   i a
=
t                            i f.,j                                                 k                                      '-
..u
[                                               .  - -
(
ll                                                                     l8 f                                                                                         i
i.
                                                                                                  =                               ~
I'.lMAe st:
l==,                                           1:-
t 4,
O'                                                           #l                                                                   I             (d)
6
{                                                                     g                                               r.            . . .
.-)
                                                            .t t
jf f'
t                                                                     y
i 1
(                                                       -
I i-t O
4 Fig.10   .
i
                                                                                                                                                                                      .        .-c.          .
{
N man t.
f
\\
m a
.l i t
i a
k f.,j
[
ll l8 f
i
=
~
l==,
1:-
O'
#l I
(d)
{
g r.
.t t
t y
(
4 Fig.10
.-c.
2.3.6. Screw the Tommy screw (2/ Fig 10) into the holes of the c!amping elements (3/ Fig.10). Lock the crab (4/ Fig.
2.3.6. Screw the Tommy screw (2/ Fig 10) into the holes of the c!amping elements (3/ Fig.10). Lock the crab (4/ Fig.
: 10) into position with tne a.d of the ciamping elements.
: 10) into position with tne a.d of the ciamping elements.
Note:
Note:
For the s:rew (5/ Fig 10) to the bearing member, $1nce this is an absolute necessity to ensure securement of the crab (4/ fig.10). The loading frame most always be set up in such a way that the end with the screw (S/ Fig 10) is pointing away from the treatment head.
For the s:rew (5/ Fig 10) to the bearing member, $1nce this is an absolute necessity to ensure securement of the crab (4/ fig.10). The loading frame most always be set up in such a way that the end with the screw (S/ Fig 10) is pointing away from the treatment head.
2.4. Dismantling the crane f rame                                                                                                                                                         !
2.4.
I 2.4.1. The Crane frame is dismantled by reversing the procedure descr >ed under Point 2.3.                                                                                                   i T 2.919 071.01
Dismantling the crane f rame I
2.4.1. The Crane frame is dismantled by reversing the procedure descr >ed under Point 2.3.
i
. T 2.919 071.01


g                                                                                                                                         . .                .
g I
I i
i e t-7 2.4.2. Stowing the individual parts in the transport crate is carried out in three groups:
e t-7 2.4.2. Stowing the individual parts in the transport crate is carried out in three groups:
Group I:
Group I:     1 bearing member                     (1/ Fig.11)
1 bearing member (1/ Fig.11)
!                            I hoist                             (2/ Fig.11) j                             1 sl:ng                             (3/ Fig.11) i                             1 crab                               (4/ Fig.11)
I hoist (2/ Fig.11) j 1 sl:ng (3/ Fig.11) i 1 crab (4/ Fig.11) 2 struts, short (6/ Fig.11)
;                            2 struts, short                       (6/ Fig.11)
Remark:
Remark:
The hoist (2/Fm.11) must be placed in the crate as shown in Fig.1111 The separating board for group 11 will l             otherwise not rest on the supports (5/ Fig.1111 i
The hoist (2/Fm.11) must be placed in the crate as shown in Fig.1111 The separating board for group 11 will l
j               Group 11:     1 board                             (1/ Fig.12) j                           4 upper supporting elements           (2/ Fig.12)                                                                 .            ,
otherwise not rest on the supports (5/ Fig.1111 i
i l
j Group 11:
Grwp 111: 4 k,wer supporting elements             (1/ Fig.13)                                                                         ,7           .
1 board (1/ Fig.12) j 4 upper supporting elements (2/ Fig.12) i l
2 struts,long                         (2/ Fig.13)                                                               i~h?fyi,,[c.
Grwp 111: 4 k,wer supporting elements (1/ Fig.13)
}
, 7 2 struts,long (2/ Fig.13) i~h?fyi,,[c.
'l see,                            ~.
}
~.
* 4'
* 4'
                                                                                                                                .                      . ~
'l
j j                                                                                                                                               .        .          .
: see,
. ~
j j
t 1
t 1
i
i
                                                                                                                                              ...9..
...9..
f .       j i
f.
j i
I I
I I
1 i
1 i
1 l                                                                                                                             %
1 l
i 1
i 1
5 a l'$           {
5 a l'$
{
e i
e i
T 2.910.071.01                                           - 1 i
T 2.910.071.01
- 1 i
I
I
[
[
l L___________...__._                                                                              .- _ _ . - . -
l L


Gr::up I v=mxpy                                                                    . . -
Gr::up I
                                                                                                            ~             ~ww--
~
e,.. . . e . _. . .
~ww--
v c y 3 / ~ =./
v c y 3 / ~ =./
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                , . i _ m .,a !
v=mxpy I i.
I i.
e,.... e. _...
,. i _ m.,a
()
()
                                      'bh h 3 ' >''EC'% T fq-c14''~ {d n     on. ;9:.v. wx.?'.%..
'b h 3 ' >''EC'% T fq-c ~ {d @
i r a.                                          h      w~                                                                                                                                                .. m,                -
h n on. ;9:.v. wx.?'.%..
m,          :..
14''
:w.... g.~;.
i
                                                                                          .:. .p. m:t %;,.... r. w n.s...                                                                         e .....g:,a c.. . ,
: p m:t %;,.... r. w n.s &..........g:,a c...,
s                        o                                    i                                                  .                                                                       .                     .                         .
h w~
2,:.                     s           .
... e
                                            \                e. . . I                                                             =w                                              --                        E                      '                        i         -'                      ..
.. m, m, :..
r a.
:w.... g.~
s
: e... I 2,:.
i s
o i
5
5
                                                            .9                                                                                                                                                                                               L J'
\\
                                          .l                 yv . !,;; sh.                                                         6 ;, n                                     .s             1 fti"                                                                M.i.. .                 /,              ,-
=w E
                                        .\,       u\                                                       )                 I +;p Y
.9 fti" L
                                                                                                                                    &.f.?:.:1. T:<,.<p. ' .- c . . ic.:.                                            -
M....
e'. ->m          .* .                   m                    ;\
J'. l yv
g                                                                                                        ..r,.e.
. !,;; sh.
4                                                       -I              l. .(,'' :
6 ;, n
                                                                  ;i
.s 1
                                          .g                                                                                            -c.' ,: w : 0 .2.                                                                 9 *6 , f,. .                               v' '
i
                                                                  -s                                                                                                      .
/,
I &.f.?:.:
Y m
-I
',...\\, u\\
)
+;p
: 1. T:<,.<p. '.- c.. e'.
ic.:. ->.*.
..r,.e.
4 m
;\\
.g
;i g
-c.
', w : 0.2. '> w 9 *6 v' ' l..(,'' :
-s
, f,..
s O.','
!?1* :, *. -,0-
.... ~.... *; $
*,;', ? 7 ;.,-2,'-
\\t\\
g a
s
s
                                                                                                                                                            !?1* :, *,'. - ,0-'>..w .
.,' 3D'd$$/.k,D d,, i.*.'
a      s                O.','                                                                    g                                                                    . ~ . . .. *; $                  * ,;', ? 7 ;
'3/, ' ~. '. 'N kj 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      .,-2,'-                \t\                    ,
. r;f,C.4
2                                            . r;f,C .4                                                                  . ,'/ 3D'd$$/.k,D d,, i.*.'.'                                                                            '3/ , ' ~. '. 'N                               kj                   '
/
I              i,'      ,
]t.
                                                          ]t.                                                                                                                                                                                                   *> *3 C                                 j [
*> *3 C j [
: l.            ._ ,                               .                          s                , ,                      - . . .
I i,'
                                                                                                                                                                                                  .             .        ..                .                              .,                                ,          (
(
Fig.11 Group 11
l.
'.]
s Fig.11 Group 11
wg. yy ~ - -                       .
'.]
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    ~ = xiyi                                                                     c /
wg. yy ~ - -
                                  . :2.                             7i                                  .....-1                                              . . . .                              .2 .. .. . o                                      . rf ..               ..             .c.
~ = xiyi c /
J \f,_.c-                                       .
.2.... o
W_ _
. rf..
cs m.               ~
. :2.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                . m._ ___./) * ,                     '
7i
a?,,.::..';y;g._.;.9_ 3:;.                                                                                   i;         -
.....-1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      .~1, ' ,
.c.
                                                        'm3 l                                    .; * . -:
. m._ ___./) *,
{,         M ye mwsMas" ':vexamre:0nz.t l 3 l gids~5 : seemssyg:st) O " 4-Oj . ;                                                                                                                                                 .
J \\ _.c-W_ _
. cs m.
~
f, 'm3 l a?,,.::..';y;g._.;.9_ 3:;.
i;
.~1,
{, M ye mwsMas" ':vexamre:0nz.t l 3 l gids~5 : seemssyg:st) O " 4-Oj. ;
.. y.. 9 -.. : y l l ~
g' f, [
j
j
_ } ll:. ,-                                             -                  .:,                                  .. y . . 9:
_ } ll:.,-
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    - .. : y l l ~                                  ,,            g' f, [              .
w l,
w
Di$75:>/ $ffM *fi:Vf
                                                          ..' '.                  Di$75:>/ $ffM *fi:Vf                     :: 4           $''Otsffffd$$$ 5:wMW SMS'*%f$Wd WMS                                                                                                             1
:: 4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      ''              I , (s     '
$''Otsffffd$$$ 5:wMW SMS'*%f$Wd WMS 1
l,                                         , l 1. . <                         :   s. . .     .r                                        -:.7. f_ ,3                                  qll ,                                                                        --
I, (s
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    ~
.r
* o J                           w L ,.
-:.7. f_,3 qll,
M,,nnawa.-~~~meme;fmmmnenenwslm                                                                                                                                amneem}
, l 1.. <
4.,. ; ] l a-                                          .
: s...
_ l l y.c .                     , re.                         t 4.~                               ...            , , .
~
2 O' ' .O (scuews-esmer sm:~gl pwww veus:                                                                                                                                     ::mm-estsE                        '
J L M,,nnawa.-~~~meme;fmmmnenenwslmamneem} a-o 4.,. ; ] l w
Ql .: .?:'
_ l l y.c.
                                                                                                                                  ...                    . .. .;:-:.; ri.- :' :~ '. -l Q ' j i , \ \                                   _
, re.
t.;         : .,
t 4.~
p,         -
::mm-estsE 2
l._
O' '.O (scuews-esmer sm:~gl pwww veus:
Fig.12
Ql.:.?:'
'.        Group lit v-                  -x .,                    q-                                                                                                                                -
....;:-:.; ri.- :' :~ '. -l Q ' j i, \\ \\
_r_; ppg ;s xx
t.;
                                        .. . ..                                    :.                        _1                  <                                                .    ; 2 ;                           ..: . ,: . t __I'.                                                           \-d
p, l._
: p. m                                       - _                    ,                        - :- .                                              ,            .                  _2,               .
Fig.12 Group lit q-
: q.                                                                                                                                                                ] .;
_r_; ppg ;s xx v-
-x
; 2 ;
..:.,:. t __I'.
\\-d
_ 1
: p. m
_2,
.g}
f
' ].
I
I
                                                        , ts. -                     ll:<.i.
, ts. -
                                                                                                                                      .                                                                . , .,.                        .g}
ll:<.i.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          .                      f
- q.
[                                                                            \                                                                                                                                                                     '
[
                                                            /' ^                           's .:        $,: fry y                       .
\\
g-                       /q       g. e             y /.f     .~ n.y f       .,x                   ,
/' ^
v          ,/ ,./ r'\ill4: ,6-                                               . ( . . .: ~ . . -                                               , , ,. _ ,    ..r.,.,,          .                    ; [g, rW V                                        gj fA      :3 , z.:. ,.
's
ef):[                   > sm:u                                               -
$,: fry y g-
                                                                                                                                                                                                  %.ff ~;h"t                         ~
/q
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          . .._ ' ..' . .p' s.f             ,
: g. e y /.f
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        ^
.~ n.y f
                                      )                                                .                                                                                                                                                      ,,                                              c.
.,x
..r.,.,,
[g, rW V gj
,/,./ r'\\ill4:,6-
. (...: ~.. -
v f
:3,
ef):[
> sm:u
- %.ff ~;h"t
..._... s.f
~
z.:.,.
A
' '. p'
)
^
c.
~
[ l-l:
[ l-l:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              ~
. (.s. ~
                                    .,          . (.s . ~                               s-
s-
                                                                                                          -..-                                                                                                                                                  - ~ r. ,
- ~ r.,
[
[
T s l l :,               Q-                             ,                                        .,.                  < - ,                    ;
l l :,
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            ...]l
Q-
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  - +                           ;
...]l
                                                        /
- +
l s .. g                                                                                                                                                                                                                               7-i
T s
[ Qi                    ll          b,. :
/
                                                                                                                            , - , - .                                                  w..                :.              ~ . .s.: . l l                                                                     *1 j _. -
l s.. g 7-i b,. :
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  . ,.             ,}
~..s.:. l l j _. -
[ Qi l l w..
*1
,}
Fig 13 T 2 910 071.01
Fig 13 T 2 910 071.01
: 3. List of tools, aids and monitoring devices 3.1. Tools 1 set of open-ended spanners,13 - 22 mm 1 ' set of Allen keys 6 - 14 mm 1 set of screwdrivers, sizes 4 - 8 1 Allen key 17 mm 1 Open-ended spanners 24 mm,27 mm,30 mm and 32 mm 1 Precision spirit level, accuracy 0.5 mm/m 1 Rubber hammer 1 fong forceps 3.2. Aids                                                                                              _
1 pendulum phantom, Part No.1713 023 S 1705                                                      . . . . .
1    approx. 5 - 10 mm thick plexiglass disk 4 approx. 3 - 5 cm thick wooden planks Protective gloves Plastic bags Large sheet of wrapping paper Films 18 x 24 (for example, Strukturix D 4)                                                      ,
Dust coat Coupling device,lif ting trolley and loading frame (see also point 1 of these ins euctionW          _
t 3.3. Monitoring devices 1 dose rate alarm device TDL 3 (or something similar) 1 counter tube 1 mR/h - 1 R/h 1 film badge or similar 1 Pen-Oosimeter with charging cevice l
l T 2.910.071.01                                              -.- 12 --


Mr      A. Horndsceh Isolin                                                                                                    413
3.
                                                  ~
List of tools, aids and monitoring devices 3.1.
O  --
Tools 1 set of open-ended spanners,13 - 22 mm 1 ' set of Allen keys 6 - 14 mm 1 set of screwdrivers, sizes 4 - 8 1 Allen key 17 mm 1 Open-ended spanners 24 mm,27 mm,30 mm and 32 mm 1 Precision spirit level, accuracy 0.5 mm/m 1 Rubber hammer 1 fong forceps 3.2.
* GAMMATRON 1,2,3, R and CAESA T 2.910.033.01.01.02 SIEMENS                                                                                                        )
Aids 1 pendulum phantom, Part No.1713 023 S 1705 1
8gl I l':'0ll1*2r.         l i           cowo. .                                   Loading and unloading Il     5,         oei.4.*
approx. 5 - 10 mm thick plexiglass disk 4 approx. 3 - 5 cm thick wooden planks Protective gloves Plastic bags Large sheet of wrapping paper Films 18 x 24 (for example, Strukturix D 4)
i 21 i                                                                                                                           ;
Dust coat Coupling device,lif ting trolley and loading frame (see also point 1 of these ins euctionW t
            ]     g             11.77                                                                                                     )
3.3.
            =
Monitoring devices 1 dose rate alarm device TDL 3 (or something similar) 1 counter tube 1 mR/h - 1 R/h 1 film badge or similar 1 Pen-Oosimeter with charging cevice l
            $     }.
l T 2.910.071.01
s ,2           Mounting instructions I 'k' Contents Page
-.- 12 --
            ]I             1. Introduction                                                                                       2 43)2 1l             2. Prescribed requirements for the transporting container                                             3 i Ii i      I
 
: 3. Preparation of the transporting container and loading frame                                        4
Mr A. Horndsceh Isolin 413
{2
~
: 4. Preparation at the unit and subsequent source exchange                                            10 4.1. Gammatron 1                                                                                        11 4.2. Gammatron 2/R                                                                                      18 4.3. Gammatron 3                                                                                        26 aplg I              4.4 Caesa4ammatron                                                                                      36
O T 2.910.033.01.01.02 GAMMATRON 1,2,3, R and CAESA
            !              5. Procedure in unusual situations                                                                  44
)
            }1.
l I SIEMENS l':'0ll1*2r.
j1;            6. Equipping and dispatch regulations for the transporting container                                44 O          5 ,e 4 ll            7. Forms for the changeover                                                                        44 o!!Ir it i !
l 8g i
i            'li er I Mr li1 44 4 i il i:        4 e
cowo..
I         !                                                                                                                      '
Loading and unloading Il 5,
          ,          i 4                                                                                                                      i i*
oei.4.*
i 21 i
] g 11.77
)
=
$ }.
s,2 Mounting instructions I 'k' Contents Page
]I 1.
Introduction 2
43)2 1l i 2.
Prescribed requirements for the transporting container 3
i I i
I
I
        !$ ih t
{2 3.
l       I! -11 ri i         s
Preparation of the transporting container and loading frame 4
          !        I o i:
4.
i l
Preparation at the unit and subsequent source exchange 10 4.1.
          .   . s O     -j II                                                                                                                    enghsch SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT                                 Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen
Gammatron 1 11 4.2. Gammatron 2/R 18 aplg 4.3.
                      ':.',*:"" ','" %::. ll, t*::::::':*^ :;' L' :?;':'.*::::T":2.''.
Gammatron 3 26 I
4.4 Caesa4ammatron 36 5.
Procedure in unusual situations 44
}1.
j1; 6.
Equipping and dispatch regulations for the transporting container 44 O
5,e 4 ll 7.
Forms for the changeover 44 o!!Ir it i !
i
'li !I erMr li1 44 4 i il i
4 e
I i
4 i
i I
!$ ih
'I ri t
l
! -11 i
s I
o i:
l i
.. s O
II-j enghsch SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen
':.',*:"" ','" %::. ll, t*::::::':*^ :;' L' :?;':'.*::::T":2.''.
ll;*.'::::.* ;**.2*; *.*::::*.l':;' !:;... l.'11.*::;T: "** '''
ll;*.'::::.* ;**.2*; *.*::::*.l':;' !:;... l.'11.*::;T: "** '''


a
a 1.
: 1.     Introduction The Gammatron units may only be loaded or unloaded under the directions of a trained expert from the works. This expert must have adequate knowledge and experience in dealing with radioactive materials,in questions of radiation protection and in the techniques of radiation measurement. He must possess written authorization from the Medical Engineering Group in Erlangen to carry out this work. If such an expert is not available,it is possible to request one from the Medical Engineering Group Erlangen, Dept. VT 43. This request must be made at least 2 weeks before the planned loading. Otner persons who assist in loading or unloading must be instructed on the work to be carried out and the dangers which can possibly arise, by an expert in the matter.
Introduction The Gammatron units may only be loaded or unloaded under the directions of a trained expert from the works. This expert must have adequate knowledge and experience in dealing with radioactive materials,in questions of radiation protection and in the techniques of radiation measurement. He must possess written authorization from the Medical Engineering Group in Erlangen to carry out this work. If such an expert is not available,it is possible to request one from the Medical Engineering Group Erlangen, Dept. VT 43. This request must be made at least 2 weeks before the planned loading. Otner persons who assist in loading or unloading must be instructed on the work to be carried out and the dangers which can possibly arise, by an expert in the matter.
By loading and unloading of a Gammatron,is understood, the sliding of the source drawer fitted with the high curie source, out of the transporting container and into the Gammatron head and vice versa.
By loading and unloading of a Gammatron,is understood, the sliding of the source drawer fitted with the high curie source, out of the transporting container and into the Gammatron head and vice versa.
On exchanging the source, the source drawer with the old source 's pushed out of the Gammatron head into the trans-porting container and subsequently the source drawer with the new source is pushed out of the transporting container into the Gammatron head.
On exchanging the source, the source drawer with the old source 's pushed out of the Gammatron head into the trans-porting container and subsequently the source drawer with the new source is pushed out of the transporting container into the Gammatron head.
The loading and unloading must be carried out by at least 2 persons.
The loading and unloading must be carried out by at least 2 persons.
1.1. Personal dosimeter and radiation measuring instruments During loading, unloading or source changing, a counter tube instrument (e. g. Graetz X 50) must be available, with a m easuring range of at least 1 mR/h to 1 R/h. Each person involved in the work must carry an integrated pocket dosime-ter (Pen-Dosimeter) with direct indication, a radiation protection badge (e. g. Film dosimeter) and an acoustic warning device (e. g. TDL 3) set to 5 mR 'h or 10 mH/h.
1.1.
1.2. Reference documents General information and preparations for laoding and unloading with a Co 60 or Cs 137 source. T 2.910.071.01.01.
Personal dosimeter and radiation measuring instruments During loading, unloading or source changing, a counter tube instrument (e. g. Graetz X 50) must be available, with a m easuring range of at least 1 mR/h to 1 R/h. Each person involved in the work must carry an integrated pocket dosime-ter (Pen-Dosimeter) with direct indication, a radiation protection badge (e. g. Film dosimeter) and an acoustic warning device (e. g. TDL 3) set to 5 mR 'h or 10 mH/h.
1.2.
Reference documents General information and preparations for laoding and unloading with a Co 60 or Cs 137 source. T 2.910.071.01.01.
Specifically for the unit:
Specifically for the unit:
Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 1 R 85.0672.03.03.01.01 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 2 R 85.0678.03.03.0101 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 3 S 85.1009.03.03.0101 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron R S 85.1011.03.03.01.t,1 Adjusting and setting to work, Caesa-Gammatron S 85.1008 03.03.01.01 l
Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 1 R 85.0672.03.03.01.01 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 2 R 85.0678.03.03.0101 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 3 S 85.1009.03.03.0101 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron R S 85.1011.03.03.01.t,1 Adjusting and setting to work, Caesa-Gammatron S 85.1008 03.03.01.01 1
1 l
O T 2.910.033.01 e
O l
p 2.
l l
Prescribed requirements for the transporting container V
T 2.910.033.01 l
 
e p   2. Prescribed requirements for the transporting container V
2.1 When initially loading a redietion head 2.1.1 Normal case The transporting container is supplied with a radiation source. In the second channel there must be a dummy drawer.
2.1 When initially loading a redietion head 2.1.1 Normal case The transporting container is supplied with a radiation source. In the second channel there must be a dummy drawer.
2.1.2 Special case (only possible with two initial loadings, or 1 initial loading and I changeover loading). The transpor-ting container is supplied with two radiation sources, it must be determined f rom the delivery documents, in which channel the source intended for the customer is housed. A dummy drawer must be available, which is pushed into the empty chan,1el following the initial loading of the first unit.
2.1.2 Special case (only possible with two initial loadings, or 1 initial loading and I changeover loading). The transpor-ting container is supplied with two radiation sources, it must be determined f rom the delivery documents, in which channel the source intended for the customer is housed. A dummy drawer must be available, which is pushed into the empty chan,1el following the initial loading of the first unit.
Line 691: Line 964:
In the case of initialloadings and exchanges of radiation sources, note all the details on the delivery note (insert No.,
In the case of initialloadings and exchanges of radiation sources, note all the details on the delivery note (insert No.,
BZ number, loading date of the unit. copy of the source certificate etc.) and send them to Dept. VT 43 in Erlangen.
BZ number, loading date of the unit. copy of the source certificate etc.) and send them to Dept. VT 43 in Erlangen.
;    Warning:
Warning:
The radiation direction of the source in the transporting container must always point downwards.
The radiation direction of the source in the transporting container must always point downwards.
O m
O m T 2.910.033.01
T 2.910.033.01
~.-
_ _ . _.                      -        -,                                                -    ~.-


i 9
i 9
top Source insert number       N
top Source insert number N
                                                                            /
/
o S1601/II. . ol
o S1601/II.. ol ION s
                                            @                        ION s
Source Fig.1 The end face of the source drawer Only source drawers without uranium inserts may, as yet, be delivered and used. These source drawers are identified by additionally rivetted-on labels (1/ fig.1).
Source Fig.1 The end face of the source drawer Only source drawers without uranium inserts may, as yet, be delivered and used. These source drawers are identified by additionally rivetted-on labels (1/ fig.1).
If a drawer without this rivetted-on label be supplied, then immediately, before the loading, Dept. VT 43, Tel 84 3108 is to be informed and the loading postponed until the matter has been expla* red.
If a drawer without this rivetted-on label be supplied, then immediately, before the loading, Dept. VT 43, Tel 84 3108 is to be informed and the loading postponed until the matter has been expla* red.
Line 708: Line 979:
Remark:
Remark:
Before proceeding with the insertion, the coupling device must be checked to see that it is complete. In connection with this, see the following instructions, specific for Gammatron 1,2,3. R and Caesa.
Before proceeding with the insertion, the coupling device must be checked to see that it is complete. In connection with this, see the following instructions, specific for Gammatron 1,2,3. R and Caesa.
: 3. Preparation of the transporting container and loading frame 3.1. Push the assembled crane frame in front of the unit (see in addition the instruction, " General information and preparations for loading and unloading a Co 60 or Cs 137 source T 2.910.071.01.01"). The hoist must in its long!!udi-nal direction, stand central to e drawer channel of the source head. The side on which the crane carriage can be pushed, must be away from the head.
3.
Preparation of the transporting container and loading frame 3.1.
Push the assembled crane frame in front of the unit (see in addition the instruction, " General information and preparations for loading and unloading a Co 60 or Cs 137 source T 2.910.071.01.01"). The hoist must in its long!!udi-nal direction, stand central to e drawer channel of the source head. The side on which the crane carriage can be pushed, must be away from the head.
O T 2.910.033.01 e
O T 2.910.033.01 e
3.1.1 Travel the transporting container under the crane frame. Attach the rope sling to the container.
3.1.1 Travel the transporting container under the crane frame. Attach the rope sling to the container.
Line 717: Line 990:
3.1.3 Unscrew the channel cover (1/ fig. 2) with a 17 mm socket head cap screw key and lay it on the packing paper.
3.1.3 Unscrew the channel cover (1/ fig. 2) with a 17 mm socket head cap screw key and lay it on the packing paper.
The lead screenings (1/ fig. 3) are then visible.
The lead screenings (1/ fig. 3) are then visible.
IO                                               '''l4 If)!
IO
a    ;
'''l4 If)!
                                                                                      %I }
%I }
O'                                       -          o'         ==       o 'N ff%                                         ';    [Io
a O'
* a o O
. o'
                        &:61     al e                    -
 
                                                                              \
==
B    -
o 'N
d De
[Io ff%
                                                                                                                                      -l 1/
*a o e
w                      a                                  %go=<e                                                 /
B O
g:                                 g                             .N                          /
D
n
-l
                                        =
&:61
y                                                    --
\\
Fig. 2                                                                                                                               Fig. 3 O                                                                                                                                                 1 1
d e
T 2.910.033.01
1/
l
%go=<e /
a w
a
.N g:
g
/
n y
=
Fig. 2 Fig. 3 O T 2.910.033.01


et
et
                            +
+
i           r M           Radiation head F9 f q-q _.__.
i r
L_h'i l b.
M Radiation head F9 f q-q
Transporting container
' L_h'i l b.
                                  ;. ;    g 3
Transporting container g 3
                          .L             .I I
.L
                                    .l
.I I.l
                              ,    -l Radiation source d
; -l Radiation source d
E N           ..
E N
                                ~ l:
~ l:
y     gm CAUTION!!
y gm CAUTION!!
Area of slot-leakage radiation Channel axis Area with increased radiation level I
Area of slot-leakage radiation Channel axis Area with increased radiation level I
Fig. 4 I
Fig. 4 I
Line 757: Line 1,040:
Working area, see (2/ fig. 4).
Working area, see (2/ fig. 4).
3.1.6 The main direction of radiation from the source in the source drawer goes directly downwards. The drawer carries at both ends the identification " top"
3.1.6 The main direction of radiation from the source in the source drawer goes directly downwards. The drawer carries at both ends the identification " top"
                                            " source" and it must always lie in the channel of the transportation container in this position (instructions from the Medical Engineering Group to the source suppliers).
" source" and it must always lie in the channel of the transportation container in this position (instructions from the Medical Engineering Group to the source suppliers).
The number engraved on the end f ace of the source drawer must agree with the information on the delivery note. (See fig.1).
The number engraved on the end f ace of the source drawer must agree with the information on the delivery note. (See fig.1).
If this is not the case, it is necessary to inform Dept. VT 43, Tel. 84 3108 immediately and suspend the loading proce-dure until the matter has been explained.
If this is not the case, it is necessary to inform Dept. VT 43, Tel. 84 3108 immediately and suspend the loading proce-dure until the matter has been explained.
Line 765: Line 1,048:
Replace the lead screening b:ock again.
Replace the lead screening b:ock again.
Screw in the locking screw 4efig. 6.
Screw in the locking screw 4efig. 6.
f e
f e T 2.910.033.01
T 2.910.033.01


at r            ""
at 4
4
r O
                              ,        O O                                             \
O
O y_ .              .
\\
r;., O L.     -
O y_.
2     0 3
r;., O L.
F;g. 5
2 0
                        \$
3 F;g. 5
\\$
n n
n n
                  /c,
/,-
                                  / ,-
' /c, (N
(N                               ,
1
t    (         i, 1 g       e          d -)   - - - -
(
Wh-
i, g
                                    \ ,s
d -)
      ,1                       ,
t Wh-e
e i   Fig. 6 O
\\,s
T 2.910.033.01 e
,1 e
3.2.2 Secure the loading disc (1/ fig. 7) to the reverse side with the 4 screws M 6 x 30 (2/ fig. 7).
i Fig. 6 O
T 2.910.033.01 - - -
 
e 3.2.2 Secure the loading disc (1/ fig. 7) to the reverse side with the 4 screws M 6 x 30 (2/ fig. 7).
fs 3.2.3 Fasten the support piece (3/ fig. 7) in the position of the dummy drawer.
fs 3.2.3 Fasten the support piece (3/ fig. 7) in the position of the dummy drawer.
3.2.4 Exchange the normal dummy drawer for the bored-through dummy drawer (fig. 8).
3.2.4 Exchange the normal dummy drawer for the bored-through dummy drawer (fig. 8).
To do this position the bored-through dummy drawer with its head end to the container and with this push the normal dummy drawer out to the rear.
To do this position the bored-through dummy drawer with its head end to the container and with this push the normal dummy drawer out to the rear.
Il
Il
      ' I. ,f                 .
' I.,f
        +
+
g-)                                                           hp              , M-
h
:y;               g                                                   i-g                                                   G                                       d 2
, M-g-)
1 O   Fig. 7                                                                                                               Fig. 8 Warning:
p
:y; g
i-g G
d 2
1 O
Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Warning:
If there is a source in the transporting container, then the second channel must be filled (also when interchanging the dummy drawers), or otherwise the radiation protection of the container is not fully guaranteed.
If there is a source in the transporting container, then the second channel must be filled (also when interchanging the dummy drawers), or otherwise the radiation protection of the container is not fully guaranteed.
Thus the transporting container is prepared for the source exchange proper.
Thus the transporting container is prepared for the source exchange proper.
Line 802: Line 1,093:
O T 2.910.033.01
O T 2.910.033.01


o 4.'     Properation     at the unit and subsequent source exchange Waiting area:
o 4.'
Properation at the unit and subsequent source exchange Waiting area:
During the loading or unloading, those persoris who are not directly involved in the procedure must leave the room.
During the loading or unloading, those persoris who are not directly involved in the procedure must leave the room.
The two persons remaining in the room must remain in the prescribed waiting ares (see fig. 9) during the exchanging         l procedure (pushing the source drawer from the radiation head into the transport container and vice versa).                 l l
The two persons remaining in the room must remain in the prescribed waiting ares (see fig. 9) during the exchanging procedure (pushing the source drawer from the radiation head into the transport container and vice versa).
l i5$$ '
i5$$ '
iiiA5                                             Radiation head f       I
iiiA5 Radiation head
                                                                    /      3
/
                                                                                                        !:i:5:!:!
f I
                                    ...                  565
3
                                                                        ~~
!:i:5:!:!
565
: Area of increasedj;i;!
: Area of increasedj;i;!
                ;                                                                                  i;! Area of increased.:::
~~
                !! radiation level (jjj                                                             ![ radiation level-I:I Iil ljl 1                                                       O Transporting container
i;! Area of increased.:::
                                                                  ,g           Loading rod Area of increased radiation level
!! radiation level (jjj
                                            \
![ radiation level-I:IIil ljl 1
                                                \                                         /
O Transporting container Loading rod
Waiting area during the changeover procedure Fig. 9 T 2.910.033.01                                               ,
,g Area of increased radiation level
\\
\\
/
Waiting area during the changeover procedure Fig. 9 T 2.910.033.01,
i l
i l
* l 4.1.' Gemmetron 1                                                                                                       f Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.
 
Loading frame for source exchange             ,
l f
item No.44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Cs at the container                                   item No.4191169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 1,2 and R head end           item No. 4190 864 S 3513 Intermediate piece for Gammatron 1 head end               item No.4191276 S 3513 Contents:
4.1.' Gemmetron 1 Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.
                                                                                                                          /
Loading frame for source exchange item No.44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Cs at the container item No.4191169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 1,2 and R head end item No. 4190 864 S 3513 Intermediate piece for Gammatron 1 head end item No.4191276 S 3513 Contents:
!            A. General remarks B. Preparatory work C. Unloading D. Loading E. Final work O
/
A.
General remarks B.
Preparatory work C.
Unloading D.
Loading E.
Final work O
O T 2.910.033.01 l
O T 2.910.033.01 l
l
l


o A. General remarks in both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel Coupling device                                                                                       3 Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.
o A.
                                                                                                  ^^*
General remarks in both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel Coupling device 3
Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.
^^*
emy
emy
                                                                  'S           f             ~,
'S f
~,
s-<
s-<
                                ??                                               f             *'
??
g              'j g               O g*
f
                                                                                        .    "j t
'j g
                                            @              b i          ..
g*
g O
"j t
i b
ff ; *
ff ; *
                                                                                                        ;h o -            ~s 9                                         *      -      k
;h o
                                                                                          *J.
~s k
                                                                                                  --}
9
O Fig.10 l       1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Container side coupling plate
* J --}
,      3 = Centering piece for 2 4 = Loading disc
O Fig.10 l
,      5 = Support slide 6 = Head side coupling plate
1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Container side coupling plate 3 = Centering piece for 2 4 = Loading disc 5 = Support slide 6 = Head side coupling plate 7 = Centering piece for 6 l
!      7 = Centering piece for 6 l
8 = Intermediate piece for 6 9 = Rope sling l
8 = Intermediate piece for 6 9 = Rope sling 10 = Loading rod l
10 = Loading rod 1
1 1                                                                                                          O T 2.910.033.01 e
1 O
l On safety:
T 2.910.033.01 e
On safety:
If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more.
If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more.
During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switcheden condition, so that all the brakes are acting.
During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switcheden condition, so that all the brakes are acting.
B. Preparatory work The carriage of the Gammatron 1 is travelled downwards and the radiation head so turned that the radiation port is in the downward direction and the source channel is horizontall After unscrewing the cladding on the right-hand side of the stand, the locking pin (1/ fig.11) for the spring counterbalance must be pushed through the holes in the lower rope wheels.
B.
                                                                                ^p         Q-   - -
Preparatory work The carriage of the Gammatron 1 is travelled downwards and the radiation head so turned that the radiation port is in the downward direction and the source channel is horizontall After unscrewing the cladding on the right-hand side of the stand, the locking pin (1/ fig.11) for the spring counterbalance must be pushed through the holes in the lower rope wheels.
A o
^p Q-A o
(
(
l' m
l' m
a M
a M
: l!     . I             j i .' l     e
l!
                                                                                            /a -4                     . g I..J         -
. I j
                                                                                  @ ,2::;                     *          '
i
n" Q                                                                                                                          /
.'l e
E3!$                       4 g
/a 4 g
I..
J
@,2::;
n"
/
Q E3!$
4 g
3
3
                                                                                                                    /
/
Fig.11 Remove all the cladding f rom the radiation head. Remove the safety bar for the source drawer (1/ fig.12) by unscre-wing the two screws 12/ fig.12). Remove the lead protecting cap (3/ fig.12) by unscrewing the securing screw (4/ fig.12).   -'
Fig.11 Remove all the cladding f rom the radiation head. Remove the safety bar for the source drawer (1/ fig.12) by unscre-wing the two screws 12/ fig.12). Remove the lead protecting cap (3/ fig.12) by unscrewing the securing screw (4/ fig.12).
Draw out the slot-plate, ensuring that the source drawer remains in position (e.g. loading rod). Note the position of the slot-plate for assembly later.
Draw out the slot-plate, ensuring that the source drawer remains in position (e.g. loading rod). Note the position of the slot-plate for assembly later.
O T 2.910.033.01 l
O
, T 2.910.033.01 l


G w
G
                                      - g\$ I
- g\\$ I
                                                  /]
/]
                                          ~-
w
                            .+,
~-
9           1               ..
.+,
4                                                 -
9 1
                                                                      /
4
s         s                                               j
- /
                                                ~         ~
s s
        ,            36c                      Fo]$
j
s                   >
~
                  @@ @@GKD@/
~
36 Fo]$
c s
@@ @@GKD@/
Fig.12 Warning:
Fig.12 Warning:
After removing the safety bar (1/ fig.12) increased care the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.
After removing the safety bar (1/ fig.12) increased care the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.
Secure the source drawer by the safety bar again and then remove the slot plate at the other side of the head as pre-viously described. Remove screws (5/ fig.12). Before attaching the coupling device, the type nameplate at the side of the radiation head has to be removed. ,asten the intermediate piece to the rad'ation head with the two screws (3/
Secure the source drawer by the safety bar again and then remove the slot plate at the other side of the head as pre-viously described. Remove screws (5/ fig.12). Before attaching the coupling device, the type nameplate at the side of the radiation head has to be removed.,asten the intermediate piece to the rad'ation head with the two screws (3/
fig.13).
fig.13).
Do not tighten the screws yet!
Do not tighten the screws yet!
Line 887: Line 1,208:
Push in the centering piece (lifig.14) fully and tighten the two screws (3/ fig.13).
Push in the centering piece (lifig.14) fully and tighten the two screws (3/ fig.13).
Take out the centering piece again.
Take out the centering piece again.
msmas .            <                                  e:-
e:-
                                                              ,f
msmas.
* uo                                           as                                       -
,f uo as o..,e MW%
o
L m
                                                                                                    ..,e' MW%                       L         m
ChKRV
                                                                                                              .0 ,
.l(
4                                              ,
.0,
N              ChKRV x
.s;.;i.
                                                                                                                              .s;.;i.
4 N
3+
x 3
                                                                                              .l(
..e
                                                                                                              ..e ,7
, 7 7_.
                                                                                                                  .  ; ;;p 7_.
; ;;p
+
4 './
4 './
    ;      q                                                                                       g         ,
q g
::i:i sig. ,3                                                                                                                     ,4.,4 g>
::i:i g>
l    T 2.910.033 01                                                                                                                                                                                                 r i
sig.,3
,4.,4 l
T 2.910.033 01 r i


c
c
  /^ g    Special case
/^
()       There are radiation heads of smaller dimension,in which the source drawer projects at both sides of the channel. In this case, it is necessary when centering, to remove the safety bar (1/ fig.12) at the side of the head remote from the contai-ner, since during centering with the centering piece, the source drawer is pushed about 4 cm out of the channel. Since at this time, the source drawer is not secured against sliding out of the channel, during the centering procedure,it is ne-cessary for one person to secure the source drawer with the loading rod until the centering procedure is completed,i. e.
Special case g
the centering piece has been taken out again, the source drawer pushed back to its original position and the safety bar screwed on again. None the slot leakage radiation zone. T C.       Unloading Bring the transporting container prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame. Raise the transporting container, until the two couphng plate! can be secured together with the screws (1/
()
There are radiation heads of smaller dimension,in which the source drawer projects at both sides of the channel. In this case, it is necessary when centering, to remove the safety bar (1/ fig.12) at the side of the head remote from the contai-ner, since during centering with the centering piece, the source drawer is pushed about 4 cm out of the channel. Since at this time, the source drawer is not secured against sliding out of the channel, during the centering procedure,it is ne-cessary for one person to secure the source drawer with the loading rod until the centering procedure is completed,i. e.
the centering piece has been taken out again, the source drawer pushed back to its original position and the safety bar screwed on again. None the slot leakage radiation zone. T C.
Unloading Bring the transporting container prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame. Raise the transporting container, until the two couphng plate! can be secured together with the screws (1/
fig.15).
fig.15).
                    '              (D                                     1I     ,                        _
(D 1I T
T
.'"/
                                .'"/-,
l m
* m l
t l
t Q@
Q@
l                              t e.
t
                                                                                              /         s:;-
/
Transporting                    Gammatron                      j        '
s:;-
1       EL r n o iM container                       head                                                                             .
e.
4mA      ,
1 EL r n o iM Transporting Gammatron j
                                                                                              ?A     g        2 q                                                                                  s.         -
container head 4
                                    -\
mA
_t,                                             ,
?A 2
s.
g q
_t,
-\\
l Fig.16 Fig.15 Remark:
l Fig.16 Fig.15 Remark:
Since the couoHng plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling 15 made to the required channel.
Since the couoHng plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling 15 made to the required channel.
Line 929: Line 1,260:
Draw the source d'awer into the transporting container with the loading rod. In doing so the bored-through dummy drawer will be drawn out of the container channel on to the $!ide The gripping hand!e of the loading rod must be held horizontally.
Draw the source d'awer into the transporting container with the loading rod. In doing so the bored-through dummy drawer will be drawn out of the container channel on to the $!ide The gripping hand!e of the loading rod must be held horizontally.
When slid ng the sourt Pawer the area of increased dose (see fig. 9) must be kept clear.
When slid ng the sourt Pawer the area of increased dose (see fig. 9) must be kept clear.
l l
l O l T 2.910.033.01 1
O T 2.910.033.01 1
1
1


at D. Loading The loading of the Gammatron 1 in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading. Release the connection of the container to the Garnmatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower channel).
at D.
Loading The loading of the Gammatron 1 in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading. Release the connection of the container to the Garnmatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower channel).
Take out the screening blocks (see 3.1.7).
Take out the screening blocks (see 3.1.7).
Warning:
Warning:
The bored through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig.17, the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried out. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, untilit lies centrally in the transporting contsiner.
The bored through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig.17, the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried out. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, untilit lies centrally in the transporting contsiner.
5 1
5 1
                                              \
\\
                                                \
\\ s (k
s (k
Q
                        ,    ./                                                                                                 Q Fig.17 E. Final work Separate the transporting container frnm the Gammatron head set it oown on the htt:ng carriage and tra et it to the side.
./
Fig.17 E.
Final work Separate the transporting container frnm the Gammatron head set it oown on the htt:ng carriage and tra et it to the side.
Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head.
Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head.
Replace the slot plate.
Replace the slot plate.
Line 947: Line 1,280:
Attach the type nameplate once again to the radiation head. Screw in screws (5:f;g.12) once again. In the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point 3.2.4).
Attach the type nameplate once again to the radiation head. Screw in screws (5:f;g.12) once again. In the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point 3.2.4).
Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting conta;ner.
Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting conta;ner.
Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this-O T 2.910 033.01                                            
Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this-O T 2.910 033.01  
    .-          -        - .    . . . .  - . _ . - -.      .          .          . . . . . . . .  .      ..    ._ . .. ~ ~ ..        . _ . . .. - .
._... ~ ~..
e l                                                                                                                                                       -
e l
!.                                                                                                                                                      I J
I J
j
j
,                                                                                                                                'd i
'd i
i                             Check the light-beam indicator and the radiation in accordance with Parayaph 5 of the instruction," Adjusting and
i Check the light-beam indicator and the radiation in accordance with Parayaph 5 of the instruction," Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron 1", Printing number R 85.0672.03.03.01.01.
!                              setting to work Gammatron 1", Printing number R 85.0672.03.03.01.01.
t I
t I
i r          t                                                                                                                                           ,
i t
i                                                                                                                                                       ,
r i
4                                                                                                                                                       ,
4 1
1 l                                                                                                                                                       i e
l i
1 I
e 1
I
]
]
I i
I i
Line 967: Line 1,300:
l
l
^
^
                                                                                                                      \
\\
4 1
4 1
i                                                                                                                                                         4 3                                                                                                                                                         I i                                                                                                                                                          1 1
i 4
I 3
i 1
i 1
1i 1
1 t
1 t
I i                                                                                                                             T 2.910.033 01 1
I i T 2.910.033 01 1
I l
I i__.,___.. _ _. _.. -. _ _ _ _. _. _ _ _ _ _ _ _
i__.,___. . _ _ . _ . . - . _ _ _ _ . _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _     - - _ .


a l
a 4.2. Gammatron 2tR Loading and unloading.
4.2. Gammatron 2tR Loading and unloading.
Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.
Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.
Loadir.g frame for source exchange                     item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Cs, at the container                             item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 1,2 and R head end                                              item No. 4190 864 S 3513 Intermediate piece for Gammatron 2 and R head end                                              item No. 4190 989 S 3513 Contents:
Loadir.g frame for source exchange item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Cs, at the container item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 1,2 and R item No. 4190 864 S 3513 head end Intermediate piece for Gammatron 2 and R item No. 4190 989 S 3513 head end Contents:
A. General remarks B. Preparatory work C. Unloading D. Loading E. Final work 9
A.
General remarks B.
Preparatory work C.
Unloading D.
Loading E.
Final work 9
1 O
1 O
T 2.910.033 01                                             _  _ . _ _ _ _
T 2.910.033 01.


c
c
                                                                                                                              'i) r 's,     A. General remarks
'i) r
()         In both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coup ing device is complete.
's, A.
R.                       ..1
General remarks
                                                          =
()
                                                                                +
In both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coup ing device is complete.
                                                                                                          ~
R.
                                                          ,se       s
..1
                                                                      ^ '^       '}
=
                                                                                      -    ' ^<
~
                                                          ^'                           A.
,se s
+
' ^<
^'
^ '^
'}
A.
{ss
{ss
                                                      *^
$h.
                                                          $h.         h!
h!
                                                                                                ~
['
['
*^
~
n
n
                                                                      .        .                      .x
.x
                                                                                                ~ , :' -
~, :' -
B                                       -
B 3
3
'4j
                                                                                                  ; '4j ..    .3
.3
                                                                                                  .~
.~
                                                        ^''       -
^''
g                                       ,
g
                                                                                                                                      ~"
~"
sji       ;f ,
sji
O\                                                                                                                           Fig.18 V
;f,
1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Conta:ner s de coupling plate 3 = Centering p'ece for 2 4 = Load,ng disc 5 = Support st;de 6 = Head side coupl.ng p! ate 7 = Centering p ece for 6 8 = Rope shng 9 = Load ng rod fr\
O\\
  %)
Fig.18 V
                                                                            - l9 -                                   T 2.910 033.01
1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Conta:ner s de coupling plate 3 = Centering p'ece for 2 4 = Load,ng disc 5 = Support st;de 6 = Head side coupl.ng p! ate 7 = Centering p ece for 6 8 = Rope shng 9 = Load ng rod r\\
f%)
- l9 -
T 2.910 033.01


a On safety:
a On safety:
If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then.the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switcii-on condition, so that all the brakes are acting.
If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then.the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switcii-on condition, so that all the brakes are acting.
B.       Preparatory work Swing the suppon arm out laterally to about 1700. Prop up the counterbalance arm with a beam (about 1,20 m long).
B.
Preparatory work Swing the suppon arm out laterally to about 1700. Prop up the counterbalance arm with a beam (about 1,20 m long).
Turn the radiation head so that the radiation port is directed downwards and the source channelis horizontal. Remove the side cladding from the radiation head.
Turn the radiation head so that the radiation port is directed downwards and the source channelis horizontal. Remove the side cladding from the radiation head.
                                                    *1
*1 1:::i 2
                        .                            1:::i           , 2
- ~ s:gr. s
                                                              - ~ s:gr . s
__/;fi s
__/;fi s   +
+
l 7,; g
l 7, g
                      ;;; .3. .
;;;.3..
                  , , i~; l fire          ~''     '
,, i~; l
                    ~
~''
' fire
~
Fig.19 O
Fig.19 O
T 2.910.033.01                                               l l
T 2.910.033.01 l l


e
e
                                                                                                                                                    'I.
'I
                                                                                                                                                    '1 Remove the covering cap (1/ fig.19) by releasing the two screws (2/ fig.19).
'1 Remove the covering cap (1/ fig.19) by releasing the two screws (2/ fig.19).
[,   Take out the lead block (1/ fig. 20).
[,
* Draw out the slot-plate. ensuring that the source drawer remains in position (e. g. by means of the loading rod). Note the position of the slot-plate for assembly later.
Take out the lead block (1/ fig. 20).
Draw out the slot-plate. ensuring that the source drawer remains in position (e. g. by means of the loading rod). Note the position of the slot-plate for assembly later.
Warning: Increased care A frer removing the safety cap (1/ fig.19), the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.
Warning: Increased care A frer removing the safety cap (1/ fig.19), the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.
                                                                                  'm                       . ;
'm 7
7 u                 -
u fmy, +
fmy, +
sw
sw
                                                                                                                'I
'I
                                                                          /
' !!!${s ' I
                                                                          ' !!!${s '! I _4;"
/
O                                                                                                                                 Fig. 20 Replace the lead block (lif tg 20i again and secure the source drawer by screw:ng on the covering cap (1/ fig.19). Then remove the slot plate at the second s.ce of the head. as described previously.
_4;"
O Fig. 20 Replace the lead block (lif tg 20i again and secure the source drawer by screw:ng on the covering cap (1/ fig.19). Then remove the slot plate at the second s.ce of the head. as described previously.
Fasten the intermed: ate piece 12/f g 21) to the radiation head with the two screws (4/ fig. 21).
Fasten the intermed: ate piece 12/f g 21) to the radiation head with the two screws (4/ fig. 21).
Do not t:ghten the screws' O
Do not t:ghten the screws' O T 2.910.033.01
T 2.910.033.01


a
a
                                                                                                                      .T ll ' ', :
.T s
                            .,      s z,      ,''
? c '," :, f b ll ' ', :
                                                                      ? c ' ," :, f b
z,
                                                                    '' t y   < ,, F E-           '                '
'' t y
                      .            g,
<,, F E-g
        . @: a         .-                                                        -
. @: a O
O                        Y                                             l
Y
        ~
~
y -, .
f
f        .k                     :.2D,                                         1
.k
      ,                    ''l 5 C lD 18               .jy 8'       ,        9               e
:.2D, y -,.
                        ,t 3 4
''l 5 C 18
::;L         MM p 3;;.
.jy lD 8'
54.; . .;.' . .
9 e
giii N '                                                                   g
,t 3 4
                                ?G:~                     2%4 Q. . . . . .
::;L MM p 3;;.
                                                                    , ,4,_ , ,
54.;. '.;...
giii N '
g Q......
?G:~
2%4
,,4,_,,
Fig. 21
Fig. 21
                                                                                                                              =%
=%
Screw on the coupling plate (1/ fig. 21) and intermediate piece {2/ fig. 21) firmly with the two screws (3/ fig. 21).
Screw on the coupling plate (1/ fig. 21) and intermediate piece {2/ fig. 21) firmly with the two screws (3/ fig. 21).
Push the intermediate piece (1/ fig. 22) fully in and t:ghten the two screws (2 f.g. 22) firmly. Spread the centering piece with screw (3/ fig. 22). Tighten screws (4/f;g. 21) firmly. Remove the center'ng p ece aga:n after releasing the spreading screws (3/ fig. 22) and the securing screws (2/ fig. 22)-
Push the intermediate piece (1/ fig. 22) fully in and t:ghten the two screws (2 f.g. 22) firmly. Spread the centering piece with screw (3/ fig. 22). Tighten screws (4/f;g. 21) firmly. Remove the center'ng p ece aga:n after releasing the spreading screws (3/ fig. 22) and the securing screws (2/ fig. 22)-
                                                                                'W
'W
:. e, 3   e g,s
:. e, 3
                ;;                                e                                   .-
e
                                                                                        ,1
. g,s e
: g.                                              .g r                     '\ ',                              11
,1
                                                                                      ==
'\\
: s. -
.g 11 r
g.
 
==
s.
p
p
                                                                                      =
=
M l                                                                           h     7, Frg. 22 l
M l
h 7,
Frg. 22 l
l T 2.910.033 01 e
l T 2.910.033 01 e
C.     Unloading
/7 C.
/7    Bring the transporting container prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame. Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with the screws (1/
Unloading Bring the transporting container prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame. Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with the screws (1/
fig. 23).
fig. 23).
            ,s                                                                                             .
,s f
f
.-j N
                          .-j.,
e e
N e       e umma Transporting                      Gammatron                                                ,  pj     ,
umma pj
                                                                                                                  )
)
                                                                                            +
Transporting Gammatron container head
container                         head                                                               .
_I 1
j
+
_I1 k?
j k?
Fig. 24 Fig. 23 Remark:
Fig. 24 Fig. 23 Remark:
Since the coupling plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling is made to the required channel.
Since the coupling plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling is made to the required channel.
Line 1,101: Line 1,463:
U T 2.910.033.01
U T 2.910.033.01


Q D. Loading The load.ng of the Gammatron 2/R in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading. Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower         7 channel). Take out the screening blocks (see 3.1.7).
Q D.
Loading The load.ng of the Gammatron 2/R in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading. Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower 7
channel). Take out the screening blocks (see 3.1.7).
Warning:
Warning:
The bored-through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 25 the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rodis screwed through this to the new source drewer. Then the loading can be carried out. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, untilit lies centrally in the transporting container.
The bored-through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 25 the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rodis screwed through this to the new source drewer. Then the loading can be carried out. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, untilit lies centrally in the transporting container.
                                                              'd e
'd e
                                          ,      19)           )
19)
                                                  ;ss
)
_m se -
_m se -
                        ~
;ss 5$ '.
                              ,~
is o.
e is o.
/
                                                                /
~
5$ ' .__
e
s '
,~
I g
s I
                                              $g.
$g.
i Fig. 25 E. Final work Separate the transporting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the hf ting carriage and travel it to the side.
g i
Fig. 25 E.
Final work Separate the transporting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the hf ting carriage and travel it to the side.
Remove the Coupling plate from the Gammatron head.
Remove the Coupling plate from the Gammatron head.
Reolace the slot plate.
Reolace the slot plate.
Put the lead protection caps (1/ fig. 20) on both s. des of the radiation head back in position and st ure the source dra-wer with the safety bars (1/f t.19).
Put the lead protection caps (1/ fig. 20) on both s. des of the radiation head back in position and st ure the source dra-wer with the safety bars (1/f t.19).
O T 2.910.033 01                                               1
O T 2.910.033 01 1


et.
et.
fry, in the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point 3.2.4.),
: fry, in the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point 3.2.4.),
Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting container, Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this.
Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting container, Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this.
Check the light beam indicator and the radiation in accordance with the following unit specific instructions:
Check the light beam indicator and the radiation in accordance with the following unit specific instructions:
Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron 2 - paragraph 5. Printing number R 85.0678.03.03.01.01 Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron R - paragraph 6, Printing number 85.1011.03.03.01.01.
Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron 2 - paragraph 5. Printing number R 85.0678.03.03.01.01 Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron R - paragraph 6, Printing number 85.1011.03.03.01.01.
                                                                                                                                                                              .s-   -
.s-eW' t
eW' t
7 i
7 i
l l
l l
T 2.910.033.01 I
' T 2.910.033.01 I
I
I


0 l
0 4.3. Gammatron 3 Loading and unloading Besides the usual erection tools, the following special tools must be used.
I l
Loading frame for source exchange item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3.
I 4.3. Gammatron 3 Loading and unloading Besides the usual erection tools, the following special tools must be used.
R and Cs at the container item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 3 Item No. 4189 411 S 3513 head end from unit No. 1011/0211 (see general remarks and preparations).
Loading frame for source exchange                   item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3.
R and Cs at the container                           item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 3                       Item No. 4189 411 S 3513 head end from unit No. 1011/0211 (see general remarks and preparations).
Contents:
Contents:
A. General remarks B. Preparatory work C. Unloading D? Loading E. Final work O
A.
General remarks B.
Preparatory work C.
Unloading D? Loading E.
Final work O
O T 2.910 033.01 e
O T 2.910 033.01 e
  "T   A. General remarks (V     in bo-Ji loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequence!
"T A.
General remarks (V
in bo-Ji loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequence!
Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.
Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.
e . . s',             'y. ; s 9"                   [5 * '
[5 * '
l%                                     ,s % sy
'y. ; s e..
                                                        ~
s',
e                                    .p~,.
9" l%
d r
% sy
it       -
,s
~
.p~,.
e d
it r
ng (3
ng (3
s   /
s
Fig. 26 1 = Bored-through dummy drawer 2 = Conta:ner side coughng plate 3 = Centering p<ece for 2 4= Load.ng disc 5 = Support slice 6 = Head side couphng p! ate 7 = Centering p'ece for 6 8 = Rope shng 9 = Loading rod O
/
T 2.910 033.01   ;
Fig. 26 1 = Bored-through dummy drawer 2 = Conta:ner side coughng plate 3 = Centering p<ece for 2 4= Load.ng disc 5 = Support slice 6 = Head side couphng p! ate 7 = Centering p'ece for 6 8 = Rope shng 9 = Loading rod O T 2.910 033.01
l


at On safety:                                                                                                                 f If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switch on condition, so that all the brakes are acting.
at f
B. Preparatory work Swing out the support arm to about 1700 laterally. Prop up the counterbalance arm with a beam (about 1,20 cm long).
On safety:
If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switch on condition, so that all the brakes are acting.
B.
Preparatory work Swing out the support arm to about 1700 laterally. Prop up the counterbalance arm with a beam (about 1,20 cm long).
To release the connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum. oull the bracket (1/ fig. 27) forcefully out-wards, turn it through 1800 and allow it to engage positively. Tighten the screw (2/ fig. 27). The link (3/ fig. 27) is seated firmly in the recess in the radiation head. The connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum is broken.
To release the connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum. oull the bracket (1/ fig. 27) forcefully out-wards, turn it through 1800 and allow it to engage positively. Tighten the screw (2/ fig. 27). The link (3/ fig. 27) is seated firmly in the recess in the radiation head. The connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum is broken.
3     2       1     5 A/
3 2
                                                                            ' o                           R
1 5
                                                                                      -            O?
A
O 4
/
O       4 6    ' O c
R
O Fig. 27 i
' o O?
O O
4 6
' O 4
O c
Fig. 27 i
i O
i O
T 2.910 033.01                                               - - _ - - . - - - _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ - . _
T 2.910 033.01 - -


e Take off the shutter drive (1/ fig. 28) after unscrewing the 3 screws (2/ fig. 28).
e Take off the shutter drive (1/ fig. 28) after unscrewing the 3 screws (2/ fig. 28).
O (3                                                                           0*   .
O (3
O                     'G       '
0*
g                 '
O
g
'G g
                                                  %                                                                                                                        qa
g qa
((O,g?))g) l g    .
((O,g?))g) r l
                                                                              \
\\
r                            e o                                                       ?   .
o
if               O                                                                                 O
?
              *                                                              (     3                   O                                                                o.
e g
i   . i\ 4 b-l   a                                                                                            N@d g l}; ,          ,
if O
                                                                                                    -(
O O
Fig. 28                                                                                                                                                                               Fig. 29 O
(
3 o.
i i\\ 4 b-l N@d g a
l};,
-(
Fig. 28 Fig. 29 O
Unscrew the disc (1/f.g. 29L Warning:
Unscrew the disc (1/f.g. 29L Warning:
Do not disturb the adjusting screws (2/ fig. 29).
Do not disturb the adjusting screws (2/ fig. 29).
Line 1,191: Line 1,576:
Note:
Note:
The shutter cap werghs 19,5 xg.
The shutter cap werghs 19,5 xg.
Warning: 1.icreased care A fter removing the shutter cap, the source drawer is r'o longer secured against sliding out.
Warning: 1.icreased care A fter removing the shutter cap, the source drawer is r'o longer secured against sliding out. T 2.910.033.01
l T 2.910.033.01


G Fasten the coupling plate (1/ fig. 30) to the radiation head, with the two screws (2/ fig. 30). Do not tighten the screws.
G Fasten the coupling plate (1/ fig. 30) to the radiation head, with the two screws (2/ fig. 30). Do not tighten the screws.
l' - ' eg b
)
                                              ,og ,
' l'
s,,
- ' eg b s,, g
g          '?
'?
                                                                            )
C 3,,og,
C
], x0 s
                                                                              , x0 eN s
eN 1s
3, 1s   *,
'l 1
1         :
Y ' ',
                                                                            ]
7 t
Y ' ', 7     ,  ss  t         J X     ' s ' l ',' I j;.s., 'l            /
J ss X
                                                    ;q 4                 ,
' s ' l ',' I j;.s.,
/
;q 4
a
a
                          @'S i
@'S i
Fig. 30 O
Fig. 30 O
l l
l l
Position the centering piece (1/ fig. 3'' n it. courling plate and fasten with the two screws (lif;g 32).
Position the centering piece (1/ fig. 3'' n it. courling plate and fasten with the two screws (lif;g 32).
By tightening the screw (2/ fig 'C' " C >. ng plate is centered to the source drawer channel. Subsequently tighten the two screwt (2/ fig. 30).
By tightening the screw (2/ fig
Remove the centering piece at . . saz.,                     y the screws (1/ fig. 32 and 2/ fig. 32).
'C' " C >. ng plate is centered to the source drawer channel. Subsequently tighten the two screwt (2/ fig. 30).
Remove the centering piece at.. saz.,
y the screws (1/ fig. 32 and 2/ fig. 32).
O T 2.910.033 01 C
O T 2.910.033 01 C
y
y 4
                                            ^ # '
^ # '
4
Als
                        ,  Als              ', k' +                     ''
', k' +
i
., 0 ',t ? ;
                                                      .,..0c-' ,t ? ;       y I
I i
W9f               <
y c-W9f o
o
'l $\\
                                      'l: $\
b, L
* b, L
*!*h
                            ' . 4 G lj*
'. 4 G lj
N
' ' ;f
                                        ,, . ' ~ '^ 3 '
,,. ' ~ '^ 3 k
                                                                            ' ' ;f
q$
                                                                                      ;              *!*h      -' ,
N s.
s.
+
                                                                                    +
k                                        q$'
l
l
                                                                      ^ ' M.
^ ' M.
                              % ,6;, '$                    ,,,, /               'a se Fig. 31 O
%,6;,
L)                                             LL r                             i*
,,,, /
'a se Fig. 31 O
L)
LL r
i*
T f
T f
:f:
'b-
c                            'b-                 's
's
: 4. .; g.:                                         ;
:f:c
6   '
: 4..; g.:
c*
6
                                                      +    '!
+
G c.               ...
T c*
T
G c.
: 3. :.               v-:
: 3. :.
3       fJA k..
v-:
i 1p c}
3 fJA k..
:    9..
1p c}
c.- .7
; 9...7 i
                                                          ,.s i.
.y c.-
                                                                                                                                            .y 4
,.s i.
g a 2!            !
4 a 2!
s 2             1 Fig. 32 O
gs 2
_ 31 -                                                                       T 2.910 033 01
1 Fig. 32 O
_ 31 -
T 2.910 033 01


e l
e l;,
C. Unloading Bring the transporting container (see Point 3 of these instructions) prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame.
C.
Unloading Bring the transporting container (see Point 3 of these instructions) prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame.
Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with tne screws (1/ fig. 33).
Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with tne screws (1/ fig. 33).
          -                          O                                   P_
O P
(
(
                                    ~~                                      bj     .a           9
..f bj
                                .      ..f                                          ;            a
.a
                                                                              < t                 . Ed I
~~
Transporting                          Gammatron i
9a
l b[ *@]l 1
< t Ed I
ilio i M container                             head                                   g                                    ~ '
b[ *@]l i
j
1 M
                                                                                ,d        m. O 1
Transporting Gammatron l
im-     e
ilio i container head
                                                                                              ",l I
,d O
i                  t s
~ '
                                  .    , .k, _
g j
                                        -N
m.
                                    ~
1 i
                                                \
e m-i
S Fig. 34 Fig. 33 Remark:
",l t
I s
.k,
-N
~
S
\\
Fig. 34 Fig. 33 Remark:
Since the coupling plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container. care must be taken to en-sure that in each case the coupling is made to the required channel.
Since the coupling plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container. care must be taken to en-sure that in each case the coupling is made to the required channel.
Push the loading rod through the bored-througn dummy drawer as shown in f.g. 34 and screw firmly to the source dra-wer in the Gammatron head. Then screw out the safety pins at the plate at the container s>de.
Push the loading rod through the bored-througn dummy drawer as shown in f.g. 34 and screw firmly to the source dra-wer in the Gammatron head. Then screw out the safety pins at the plate at the container s>de.
Draw the source drawer into the transpo'ttng container with the loading rod in doing so the bored through dummy drawer will be drawn out of the container channel on to the si.de. The gripp.ng hand e of the load.ng rod must be held horizortally.
Draw the source drawer into the transpo'ttng container with the loading rod in doing so the bored through dummy drawer will be drawn out of the container channel on to the si.de. The gripp.ng hand e of the load.ng rod must be held horizortally.
When sliding the source drawer the area of increased dose (see fig 9) must be kept clear.
When sliding the source drawer the area of increased dose (see fig 9) must be kept clear.
O T 2.910.033.01 C
O T 2.910.033.01 -
D. Loading
 
' ,h       The loading of the Gammatron 3 in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading.
C D.
    '      Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to e new level (for the lower channel).
Loading
,h The loading of the Gammatron 3 in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading.
Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to e new level (for the lower channel).
Warning:
Warning:
The bored-through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 35, the bored-through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried % t. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, until it lies centrally in the transporting container.
The bored-through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 35, the bored-through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried % t. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, until it lies centrally in the transporting container.
4 J
4 J
                                                                                                                          ~
~
                                                                                                    @                            S  \
\\
                                                                                                                . . . .                N t
S N
                                                                                                    .      .v             -
.v t
_ _ _ _ _ _ _S- -
S-
                                                                                                        '-                              }           c l            Yl
}
                                                                                        $ll,M"                                                         .
c
h O                                                                                                   Q, .
$ll,M" l
ll Fig. 35 O
Yl h
T 2.910 033.01
O Q,
ll Fig. 35 O T 2.910 033.01


et E. Final work Separate the trangorting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the lifting carriage and travel it to the s;de.
et E.
Final work Separate the trangorting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the lifting carriage and travel it to the s;de.
Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head.
Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head.
Replace the slot plate.
Replace the slot plate.
Line 1,306: Line 1,710:
The source drawer is fixed by tightening the screw (3/ fig. 36). Fit the short slot-plate agian on the shutter drive side and the lead screening (3/ fig. 29) and washer (1/ fig. 29).
The source drawer is fixed by tightening the screw (3/ fig. 36). Fit the short slot-plate agian on the shutter drive side and the lead screening (3/ fig. 29) and washer (1/ fig. 29).
Mount the shutter drive.
Mount the shutter drive.
Remake the connection between the shutter drum and the shutter drive. Draw the connection pins (2/ fig. 36) out-wards, turn through 180 0and allow them to engage in the hole in the shutter drive. Assist the engaging procedure by turning the toothed wheel (1/ fig. 37),
Remake the connection between the shutter drum and the shutter drive. Draw the connection pins (2/ fig. 36) out-wards, turn through 180 and allow them to engage in the hole in the shutter drive. Assist the engaging procedure by 0
turning the toothed wheel (1/ fig. 37),
r O
r O
S ; 8 0                                                     ,N   ' r _ *G ArPM%^
8 S ;
                                                                                                                  )~
0
6 O
,N
o hf,'                         i     l 1
' r _ *G ArPM%^
o Y                                           i.m
O 6
: f.          ..
)~
4 b
hf,'
o/                     o                                  .h                                             @)
i l
2 N,
o o
f             i                /
1 f.
                                                                                                      ^
Y i.m 4
                                                                                                                        /
@)
                                                                                                                                    )\        Q
o/
                                                                                                $                    4
.h b
                                                                                                                        /                   i Fig. 37 Fig. 36 i
o
)\\
Q
^
/
N, f
/
2 i
4
/
i Fig. 37 Fig. 36 i
O T 2.910.033.01 e
O T 2.910.033.01 e
1 g                                                  in the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point 3.2.4.).
1 in the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point g
3.2.4.).
Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting container.
Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting container.
Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this.
Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this.
Line 1,330: Line 1,746:
I O
I O
l l
l l
1 T 2.910.033.01 l
1
! T 2.910.033.01 l


O i
O i
l 4.4 Caesa4ammatron Loading and untoading Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.
4.4 Caesa4ammatron Loading and untoading Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.
Loading frame for source exchange                   item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3.
Loading frame for source exchange item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3.
R and Cs, at the container                         item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling place for Caesa-Gammatron head end                                           item No. 42 79 717 S 3513 (to be purchase via Dept. VT 45)
R and Cs, at the container item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling place for Caesa-Gammatron head end item No. 42 79 717 S 3513 (to be purchase via Dept. VT 45)
Contents:
Contents:
A. General remarks B. Preparatory work C. Unloading D. Loading E. Final work O
A.
General remarks B.
Preparatory work C.
Unloading D.
Loading E.
Final work O
O T 2.910.033.01 e
O T 2.910.033.01 e
A. General remarks in both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel w.)
A.
General remarks in both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel w.)
Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.
Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.
l!             ..
l!
(                                                     -
(
                              .:. .          T:!:                                                 , 2c' E,^- '$)
T:!:
lil'e1           i,i?ilI                                             ] ; 'O' ''""A" :.,
, 2c' E,^-
                              ?:*.
'$)
lil'e1 i,i?ilI
] ; 'O' ''""A"
{
{
                                                                                                  ._          *% ~ ''
?:*.
si                 a
*% ~ ''
* e                   M                    @
M si a
W 7: .%A* :
e W 7:.%A* :
g 6
6 i pw d$
i pw     d$ ,,        h       4
h 4
                                          .,,                                                              q -y 4
g q -y
  %)                                                                                                                           Fig. 38 1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Container s6ce couphng plate 3 = Centering p<ece for 2 4 = Load:ng disc 5 = Support si,ae 6 = Head s.de couphng plate 7 = Centering p ece for 8 8 = Centerrng p.ece for 6 9 = Rope sling 10 = Load <ng rod O
_4
T 2.910.033.01
%)
Fig. 38 1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Container s6ce couphng plate 3 = Centering p<ece for 2 4 = Load:ng disc 5 = Support si,ae 6 = Head s.de couphng plate 7 = Centering p ece for 8 8 = Centerrng p.ece for 6 9 = Rope sling 10 = Load <ng rod O T 2.910.033.01


  .O On safety:
.O On safety:
l If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the' source is j
If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the' source is l
to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care.
to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care.
fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switch-on condition, so that l
j fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switch-on condition, so that l
all the brakes are acting.
all the brakes are acting.
B.         Properatory work The carriage of the Caesa4ammatron is travelled downwards. Remove the covering cap at the radiation head.
B.
Properatory work The carriage of the Caesa4ammatron is travelled downwards. Remove the covering cap at the radiation head.
To release the connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum, pull the bracket (1/ fig. 39) forcefully out-wards, turn it through 1800and allow it to engage positively.
To release the connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum, pull the bracket (1/ fig. 39) forcefully out-wards, turn it through 1800and allow it to engage positively.
The blocking link (2/ fig. 39) fatches in automatically. The connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum is broken.
The blocking link (2/ fig. 39) fatches in automatically. The connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum is broken.
r                                             ,
r
~
: h. b
: h. b
                                  ~
:g/
g/
%t
              .f                   %
.f
                                                %t
''N},
                                                  ''N},
2 1
                      +-      2   1   4 O
4
+-
O 3h G
G 4
G 4
3h                G
$f en Fig. 39 O
                  ,                                $f                                                                         &
T 2.910.033.01.
          -                                        en Fig. 39 O
T 2.910.033.01                                                       .                                                       _ _ _ _ _


c Take off the shutter drive (1/ fig. 40) after unscreweing the 3 screws (2/ fig. 40).                                                                                                                 l
c Take off the shutter drive (1/ fig. 40) after unscreweing the 3 screws (2/ fig. 40).
                                                'O e                              ^
e C-
C-                  ,
'O
o                                                   g                 '
^
                              %iQ                                                                                         ,
o g
e,
%iQ ks
                      *L                   *
, e,
                                      + pp -                         ks9                                      o m                                          B 2
*L B
: h.   [                                               q                                             O
+
                              -                                           i
9 m
                            .(.
pp -
* A e
o 2
                                                                                                                  ,;;' m ~ s >
O
9      -
: h. [
                                            ,.                                                                          ?'.
q i
j                         -
-.(.
I Fig. 40                                                                                                                                                                             Fig. 41 O
A e 9
,;;' m ~ s >
?'.
j Fig. 40 Fig. 41 O
i Unscrew the disc (1/ fig. 41).
i Unscrew the disc (1/ fig. 41).
Warning:
Warning:
Do not disturb the adjusting screws (2/ fig. 41).                                                                                                                                                     \
Do not disturb the adjusting screws (2/ fig. 41).
l i
\\
Taire out tha lead screening (3/ fig. 41) af ter unscrewing the securing scres. Then remove the short slot plate at the rear l
i Taire out tha lead screening (3/ fig. 41) af ter unscrewing the securing scres. Then remove the short slot plate at the rear side of the channel.
side of the channel.                                                                                                                                                                                 i l
i l
Turn the radiation head so that tne radiation port is facing upwards and the source drawer channellies horizontal!
Turn the radiation head so that tne radiation port is facing upwards and the source drawer channellies horizontal!
Support the rad.atron head aga,nst conve gent rotation, since with the coup!ing plate attached and the intermedtate pie ce, it would turn convergently and the source channel no longer lie horizontally. Screw out the screw 13/ fig 39) and the two securing screws (4/f g 39) at the front side.
Support the rad.atron head aga,nst conve gent rotation, since with the coup!ing plate attached and the intermedtate pie ce, it would turn convergently and the source channel no longer lie horizontally. Screw out the screw 13/ fig 39) and the two securing screws (4/f g 39) at the front side.
Carefully take of f the shutter cap (5/f tg. 39L Draw out the slot plate ensuring that the source drawer is held in place (e. g press the source drawer to the rear in the channel with the loading rod). Note the position of the slot plate for reassembly later.
Carefully take of f the shutter cap (5/f tg. 39L Draw out the slot plate ensuring that the source drawer is held in place (e. g press the source drawer to the rear in the channel with the loading rod). Note the position of the slot plate for reassembly later.
Warning: Increased care A fter removing the shu tter cap, the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.
Warning: Increased care A fter removing the shu tter cap, the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.
O                                                                                                                                                                                                                   I T 2.910 033.01
O T 2.910 033.01


Q Fasten the intermediate piece (1/ fig. 42) to the radiation head with the two screws (2/ fig. 42). Do not tighten the screws yet.
Q Fasten the intermediate piece (1/ fig. 42) to the radiation head with the two screws (2/ fig. 42). Do not tighten the screws yet.
y L' Q       L'                 ;                                                        Mr .                        ,
L' y
Mr.
Q L'
i
i
                                                                                                                        \ j';s3 s,;< ,, ,,,sp,., , p f
\\ j';s3 s,;<,, p,, p
K                    -        ~
,,, s.,
g3             .; ;& r ,7n::-
f K
_                                                  M. ,                                                    ,
~
                                                                                                                              -J : >pl.e
g3
                                                                                                                                        ~ ' r>.+ ,,
.; ;& r,7n::-
              .w r                     CS-6A       ~
-J : >pl ~ ' r>.+
n                                                  ,e                      ,
.w r CS-6A n
                        ,                                        > .: q;.w.
M.,
                                              #                                                                  0,       if7'T           ." f e                           .a             w gD e                                                                                                   $ ;,
>.: q;.w.
i
,e
{, y                        a~ g?.
.e
( ..' a(
~
                                                                                    }+.
if7'T
w ,, / '    ''
." f 0,
G p'         I.J "32:j ,fd::ll.h.,   '
e
.a w
gD e
! (..' a(
}+. w,, / g?.
{, y a~
i G
p' I.J "32:j,fd::ll.h.,
Fig. 42 O
Fig. 42 O
Insert the centering piece (1/ fig 43) into the intermediate piece and secure wrth the two screws (2/ fig. 43).
Insert the centering piece (1/ fig 43) into the intermediate piece and secure wrth the two screws (2/ fig. 43).
Line 1,432: Line 1,872:
At the head side attach the couphng plate to the intermediate piece.
At the head side attach the couphng plate to the intermediate piece.
Remove the centering piece af ter unscrewing the $ crew (2/ fig. 43 and 3/ fig 43).
Remove the centering piece af ter unscrewing the $ crew (2/ fig. 43 and 3/ fig 43).
O T 2.910.033 01 c                                                                                                                                                                             l l
O T 2.910.033 01 c
l l
l C.
C.     Unloading Bring the transporting container (see Point 3 of these instructions) prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by                                                   l V     pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame.
Unloading Bring the transporting container (see Point 3 of these instructions) prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by V
pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame.
Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with the screws (1/ fig. 44),
Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with the screws (1/ fig. 44),
                '              (i)                                                 /I
(i)
                                                                                    %i A
/I
y&.lf ' :
%i y&.lf '
                            --j -,
A ql
ql                    a
--j
                                                                                    -g-f
-g-a f
                                                                                                  ;        e Transporting                     Gammatron 4i
e 4i g
                                                                                    - 3
=
                                                                                                  =
Transporting Gammatron
g      j 3     ElIo I head                                          (
- 3 j
container
container head
                                                                                                    =...l   3   2 i
(
C
3 ElIo I 2
                              -y g
=...l 3
i C
- -y g
Fig. 45 Fig 44 Remark:
Fig. 45 Fig 44 Remark:
Since the couoting plate on the contaoner is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling os made to the required channel.
Since the couoting plate on the contaoner is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling os made to the required channel.
Line 1,456: Line 1,899:
In doing so the bored thr7 ugh dvmmy drawer wol be drawn out of the Container channel on to the shde. The gripping hand'e of the load.ng rod "nust be r. aid horizontally.
In doing so the bored thr7 ugh dvmmy drawer wol be drawn out of the Container channel on to the shde. The gripping hand'e of the load.ng rod "nust be r. aid horizontally.
When shd ng the source drawer 'he are..e of increased dose isee fig. 9) must be kept clear, i
When shd ng the source drawer 'he are..e of increased dose isee fig. 9) must be kept clear, i
i l
i T 2.910 033 01 l
T 2.910 033 01                                          ,
1 l
l
l


I D. Laoding The loading of the Caesa4ammatron in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading.         4 Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower channel).
D.
Laoding The loading of the Caesa4ammatron in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading.
4 Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower channel).
Vrarning:
Vrarning:
The bored through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 46, the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried out.
The bored through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 46, the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried out.
In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, until it lies centrally in the transporting container, f Yft E               e     -
In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, until it lies centrally in the transporting container, f Yft E
                                                                      \
e
                                                *                      \
\\
\\
I El
I El
                          ~,
/
                                                                        /
?
                                        ,,i
                                                          ?       ,
jf
jf
                                ><                      s /
~,
,,i s /
5 Fig. 46 O
5 Fig. 46 O
T 2.910.033 01                                                             - -       - _ .            _            _ _ _
T 2.910.033 01 - -


e E.     Final work Separate the transporting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the lifting carriage and travel it to the V               side.
e E.
Final work Separate the transporting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the lifting carriage and travel it to the V
side.
Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head. Replace the slot plate.
Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head. Replace the slot plate.
Fit the shutter cap (1/ fig. 47).
Fit the shutter cap (1/ fig. 47).
Line 1,483: Line 1,928:
Mount the shutter drive.
Mount the shutter drive.
Remake the connection between the shutter drum and the shutter drive. Draw the connection pins (3/ fig. 47) out-wards, turn through 1800 and allow them to engage in the hole in the shutter drive. Assist the engsging procedure by turning the toothed wheel (1/ fig. 40).
Remake the connection between the shutter drum and the shutter drive. Draw the connection pins (3/ fig. 47) out-wards, turn through 1800 and allow them to engage in the hole in the shutter drive. Assist the engsging procedure by turning the toothed wheel (1/ fig. 40).
r-                                                                               ,
r-r.
                                                                                            .,'.                                                              r.   ,
p
                                                                                            .,                                                                    p
.3 go 3
                                                                                                                                                                    .3
2 o
                                                                                                                                @ 3                2     go o                                                                         o l
o l
Og L
Og L
                                                                                          'f '                                     e                                 .l_
'f '
                                                                                                                                                    . x, Fig. 47 in the traneporting conta;ner. excoange tre bored througn dummy crawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point
e
.l_
. x, Fig. 47 in the traneporting conta;ner. excoange tre bored througn dummy crawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point
: 3. 2.4 L Unscrew the couni:ng p;ates f rom the transport:ng container.
: 3. 2.4 L Unscrew the couni:ng p;ates f rom the transport:ng container.
Replace the lead screen ng biocks n the conta ner and close this Check the bght beam ind cator and the rad atron in accordance with Paragraph 7 of the instruction, " Adjusting and sett;ng to work Caesa Gammatron, Pr nt ng number S 85 1008 03 03 01.01" i
Replace the lead screen ng biocks n the conta ner and close this Check the bght beam ind cator and the rad atron in accordance with Paragraph 7 of the instruction, " Adjusting and sett;ng to work Caesa Gammatron, Pr nt ng number S 85 1008 03 03 01.01" i
O T 2.910.033.01 l
O T 2.910.033.01 l
* I l
 
i 1
l 1
1
1 5.
: 5.     Procedure in unusual situations
Procedure in unusual situations Sy proceeding as directed in these instructions, all precautions for a safe loading or unloading of the radiation head have been taken. Loadings in accordance with these instructions have been proven many tirnos by the Sierr ens AG, Medical Engineering Group, in Erlangen without the slightest incident.
* Sy proceeding as directed in these instructions, all precautions for a safe loading or unloading of the radiation head       '
have been taken. Loadings in accordance with these instructions have been proven many tirnos by the Sierr ens AG, Medical Engineering Group, in Erlangen without the slightest incident.
If contrary to expectations a situation of radiation danger arises, then the following regulations in respect of action apply:
If contrary to expectations a situation of radiation danger arises, then the following regulations in respect of action apply:
All those involved must leave the room endangered by radiation, immediately.
All those involved must leave the room endangered by radiation, immediately.
Line 1,505: Line 1,950:
Those involved should then formulate a picture of the situation which has arisen.
Those involved should then formulate a picture of the situation which has arisen.
The following serv:ce offices are to be informed immediately:
The following serv:ce offices are to be informed immediately:
Dept. TVS Tel.09131 App.84 25 68 Dept. VT       Tel.09131 App.84-3108 If this is not possible, Dept. VT is to be informed by telex.
Dept. TVS Tel.09131 App.84 25 68 Dept. VT Tel.09131 App.84-3108 If this is not possible, Dept. VT is to be informed by telex.
: 6.     Equipping and dispatch regulations for the transporting container a) Memorandum from TVS of the 27th Oct.1976 b) Instructions for loading the container S 1747, Sheets 1-6.
6.
: 7.     Forms for the changeover The forms must be fully completed. Copies of them are to be sent to TVS and VT 43. The forms are to be requested from VT 43. An example form is attached.
Equipping and dispatch regulations for the transporting container a) Memorandum from TVS of the 27th Oct.1976 b) Instructions for loading the container S 1747, Sheets 1-6.
1 O
7.
T 2.910.033.01
Forms for the changeover The forms must be fully completed. Copies of them are to be sent to TVS and VT 43. The forms are to be requested from VT 43. An example form is attached.
O 1
T 2.910.033.01 -. - -


C Erlangen,27th October 1976
C Erlangen,27th October 1976
                                                                                                                                                          - TVS 1 et-rh 23 59 Note for the instructions for the transporting container, Ioeding and unloading Remark:
- TVS 1 et-rh 23 59 Note for the instructions for the transporting container, Ioeding and unloading Remark:
The instruction for loading the container S 1747 Sh. I to 6 is produced in accordance with the " Regulations for the safe Transport of Radioactive Materials 1967 Edition" of the international Atomic Energy Agency, safety series N 6, Vienna 1967. These regulations were revised in 1973 and were issued with new paragraph and margin numbers.
The instruction for loading the container S 1747 Sh. I to 6 is produced in accordance with the " Regulations for the safe Transport of Radioactive Materials 1967 Edition" of the international Atomic Energy Agency, safety series N 6, Vienna 1967. These regulations were revised in 1973 and were issued with new paragraph and margin numbers.
A change in the instruction and the licence for the type B container in accordance with the new l AEA - regulations should, however, take place first in the middle of the year 1977 following the issue of the revised international railway
A change in the instruction and the licence for the type B container in accordance with the new l AEA - regulations should, however, take place first in the middle of the year 1977 following the issue of the revised international railway traffic rules RID, which is produced in accordance with the new regulations. We received th*s information by telephone on the 19th Oct.1976 from Dr. Kolb of the Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt in Brunswick.
"                                traffic rules RID, which is produced in accordance with the new regulations. We received th*s information by telephone on the 19th Oct.1976 from Dr. Kolb of the Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt in Brunswick.
The change in the instruction and application for the change to the currently valid licence No. 6.32-E 13 will be dis-cussed in good time with Dr. Kolb.
The change in the instruction and application for the change to the currently valid licence No. 6.32-E 13 will be dis-cussed in good time with Dr. Kolb.
O                           Elsner b
O Elsner b
I T
I T
O T 2.910 033.01
O T 2.910 033.01
Line 1,527: Line 1,973:
: 3. In accordance with l AEA-A-2.15 (228-241) there must be available from the manufacturer, a licence for the sour-ces from the responsible authorities in his country.
: 3. In accordance with l AEA-A-2.15 (228-241) there must be available from the manufacturer, a licence for the sour-ces from the responsible authorities in his country.
: 4. A total activity of at most 17000 Ci, Co40 or Cs 137 is permissible for the transporting container.
: 4. A total activity of at most 17000 Ci, Co40 or Cs 137 is permissible for the transporting container.
The Cs 137 may contain up to 10 % of Cs 134. Both types of source correspond to group lli,in accordance with A (401-411 activity limit). The transporting container is so screened that it corresponds to category til yellow in accor-dance with C-3.4 (c) (508 and 509). The " transport index" in accordance with A 2.16 (137139) is dependent on the source in question, it must not exceed the value 10. Index 10 corresponds to 10 mr/h/1 m from the centre of the transporting container. In accordance with A-2.5 and C-3.4 d (531 and 532) the nominated values can be to some extent exceeded under special circumstances.
The Cs 137 may contain up to 10 % of Cs 134. Both types of source correspond to group lli,in accordance with A activity limit). The transporting container is so screened that it corresponds to category til yellow in accor-(401-411 dance with C-3.4 (c) (508 and 509). The " transport index" in accordance with A 2.16 (137139) is dependent on the source in question, it must not exceed the value 10. Index 10 corresponds to 10 mr/h/1 m from the centre of the transporting container. In accordance with A-2.5 and C-3.4 d (531 and 532) the nominated values can be to some extent exceeded under special circumstances.
: 5. The transporting container must be in good order when used for conveyance.
: 5. The transporting container must be in good order when used for conveyance.
a) All surf aces, including those in the channels and Cn the attached parts must be checked for contamination. In accordance with B 1 a, up to 0.5 mr/h are permissible at the surf ace and in accordance with 81 b, up to 10-4 u Ci/cm2 (504 and 549 553) for loosely adhering contaminated particles.
a) All surf aces, including those in the channels and Cn the attached parts must be checked for contamination. In accordance with B 1 a, up to 0.5 mr/h are permissible at the surf ace and in accordance with 81 b, up to 10-4 u Ci/cm2 (504 and 549 553) for loosely adhering contaminated particles.
b) The transporting container may only be dispatched complete. It consists of a two part outer container, whose base part has an insulating pack and two runners and a wooden lining which is seated firmf y in the base, or upper 1 to 13 , in the inner container part of the outer container. According to the nature of the dispatch from source drawers, lead drawers and plugs are arranged.
b) The transporting container may only be dispatched complete. It consists of a two part outer container, whose base part has an insulating pack and two runners and a wooden lining which is seated firmf y in the base, or upper 1 to 13, in the inner container part of the outer container. According to the nature of the dispatch from source drawers, lead drawers and plugs are arranged.
c) In the inner container, both channels. source and lead drawers as wen as plugs must be clean and dry. The two sealing surf aces at the container and the covering flanges must be clean and free of burrs. All 24 screws (M 20 x 40) of this covering flange must be properly tightened and the safety catch with padlock must be se-Cured.
In the inner container, both channels. source and lead drawers as wen as plugs must be clean and dry. The two c) sealing surf aces at the container and the covering flanges must be clean and free of burrs. All 24 screws (M 20 x 40) of this covering flange must be properly tightened and the safety catch with padlock must be se-Cured.
d) The inner container must be inserted in the base of the outer container so that the red markings on the inner con-tainer and base coincide with each other.
d) The inner container must be inserted in the base of the outer container so that the red markings on the inner con-tainer and base coincide with each other.
e) The upper part of the outer container must be lowered onto the lower part so that the dowel pin is in hne with the dowel hole.
e) The upper part of the outer container must be lowered onto the lower part so that the dowel pin is in hne with the dowel hole.
5 O
5 O T 2.910 033.01
T 2.910 033.01


c i
c i
i 6
i 6
f) All the 12 screws (m 16 x 220) of the outer container must be grossed, fitted with locking washers and tightened g                     firmly, The safety catch must be secured with the padlock.
f) All the 12 screws (m 16 x 220) of the outer container must be grossed, fitted with locking washers and tightened g
firmly, The safety catch must be secured with the padlock.
g) A transporting container loaded with radiation sources may not have more than 200 mr/h at any point on the surface of the outer container and not more than 10 mr/h at 1 m from the centre of the transporting container, corresponding to the category Ill-yellow.
g) A transporting container loaded with radiation sources may not have more than 200 mr/h at any point on the surface of the outer container and not more than 10 mr/h at 1 m from the centre of the transporting container, corresponding to the category Ill-yellow.
(See sheet I section 4).
(See sheet I section 4).
h) For increased safety against unauthorized opening, the joint between the upper and lower parts of the outer con-tainer con be locked approximately at the place where the dowel pin sits.
h) For increased safety against unauthorized opening, the joint between the upper and lower parts of the outer con-tainer con be locked approximately at the place where the dowel pin sits.
: 6. Information on the outer container a) In accordance with C-3.5.5. and C-3.5.6. (516 and 517) a nameplate 17 99 469 S 1747 must in every case be durably attached to the outer container, b) When being dispatched without radiation sources, the self adhesive label 17 99 295 S 1747 with the wording
: 6. Information on the outer container a) In accordance with C-3.5.5. and C-3.5.6. (516 and 517) a nameplate 17 99 469 S 1747 must in every case be durably attached to the outer container, b) When being dispatched without radiation sources, the self adhesive label 17 99 295 S 1747 with the wording
                                " Empty packaging having contained radioactive materials" must be attached B 1.-4. (313).
" Empty packaging having contained radioactive materials" must be attached B 1.-4. (313).
The " Radioactive" warning label 17 99 303 S 1747 from earlier deliveries must be covered or removed B 1.-4 j                               (313). Part. E fig. 4 (section V, fig. 4).
The " Radioactive" warning label 17 99 303 S 1747 from earlier deliveries must be covered or removed B 1.-4 j
i c) When being dispatched with radiation sources, labels 17 99 303 S 1747, with information on the nature and acti-vity of the contents as well as information on the transport index must be attached to 2 opposite sides of the ou-ter container. Any already existing labels 17 99 295 S 1747 must be removed.
(313). Part. E fig. 4 (section V, fig. 4).
c) When being dispatched with radiation sources, labels 17 99 303 S 1747, with information on the nature and acti-i vity of the contents as well as information on the transport index must be attached to 2 opposite sides of the ou-ter container. Any already existing labels 17 99 295 S 1747 must be removed.
: 7. When dispatching the container to the source supplier 2 labels 17 99 303 S 1747 are to be included with the advice papers.
: 7. When dispatching the container to the source supplier 2 labels 17 99 303 S 1747 are to be included with the advice papers.
: 8. The keys for the 3 padlocks are to be issued along with tid advice note
: 8. The keys for the 3 padlocks are to be issued along with tid advice note
: 9. The source supplier is to be informed in which channel (No. I above and 11 below) the delivery should be made.
: 9. The source supplier is to be informed in which channel (No. I above and 11 below) the delivery should be made.
i k
k i T 2.910.033.01
T 2.910.033.01


O Nature of                                                                 Channel                     Loading d,spatch i
O Nature of Channel Loading d,spatch i
l                                                 i 3
l i
17 82 044 S 1747                 4 42 81 11 S 1601
3 17 82 044 S 1747 4
(
(
17 99 253 S 1747                     ll     1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci
42 81 11 S 1601 17 99 253 S 1747 ll 1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci 1
    ,                                        42 81119 S Igo1                    1      1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci I
1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci 42 81119 S Igo1 1
2                    1                    Y                                                                          .
                                                              \
g    j                1 x Cc60 up to 11000 Ci
                                  \k- 17 99 253 S 1747 i Y              /          gg where the sources are of equalstrength Ioad the stronger source in channel ll 42 82 489 S 1603 q 17 99 279 S 1747 1799 261S 1747 4                /          /  l      1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 3                    \
Y 42 81 119 S 1601 Y                /      11      1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci L 17 99 253 S 1747              /
42 82 489 S 1603                17 99 261 S 1747 j\                      [    ]      2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci 4                    \
Y 42 81 119 S 1601 V
Y
Y
                                                                        /       ll     1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci N._     17 99 253 S 1747 /
\\
I 2
\\
g j
1 x Cc60 up to 11000 Ci where the sources are of equalstrength Y
/
gg k-17 99 253 S 1747 i Ioad the stronger source in channel ll 42 82 489 S 1603 q 17 99 279 S 1747 1799 261S 1747 4
/
/
l 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 3
Y 42 81 119 S 1601
\\
Y
/
11 1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci
/
L 17 99 253 S 1747 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 261 S 1747 j\\
[
]
2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci 4
Y Y
42 81 119 S 1601
\\
V
/
ll 1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci N._
17 99 253 S 1747 /
17 99 253 S 1747 -
17 99 253 S 1747 -
                                /           17 82 044 S 1747         \
\\
IY                 l             I   il       1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603           17 99 279 S 1747 L1799261 S 1747 42 82 489 S 1603           17 99 279 S 1747 i       1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci
/
                                            \Y               /               r 6                 s
17 82 044 S 1747 IY l
                                \ L.17 99V 261 S 1747
I il 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 L1799261 S 1747 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 i
                                                                          /      11       1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci
1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci
\\Y
/
r 6
s
/
\\
V 11 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci L.17 99 261 S 1747
_/
_/
42 82 489 S 1603               17 99 279 '
42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 i
S 1747
1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci j
                                          ,                      j              i        1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci v                               ?
v
?
7
7
                                \           Y             Y             /    ll       2 x Cs1 37 up to 4250 Ci
\\
                                    \. - 17 99 261 S 1747 -/
/
42 82 489 S 1603 j                            I       2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci 8                 1   s Y
Y Y
Y ll      2 x Cs1 37 up to a total of 9000 Ci L 17 99 261 S 1747 ./
ll 2 x Cs 37 up to 4250 Ci 1
42 81 119 S 1601                     1       1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci 9                   i k
\\. - 17 99 261 S 1747 -/
Y 17 82 044 S 1747               /
42 82 489 S 1603 I
                                                                              /
2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci j
17 99 253 S 1747 1
8 1
y - nad,ation e,rection of tre sources                                                                             $
2 x Cs 37 up to a total of 9000 Ci 1
1 T 2.910 033.01 17 H 253 S 1747                           Channel                     Loading Nature of dispatch
s Y
[ j                                             15 15 296               17 82 044 C'                                               S 1747                   S 1747 1
Y ll L 17 99 261 S 1747./
10                     .          .
42 81 119 S 1601 1
20 96 402                 20 M 303                           1 x Co60 up to 9000 Ci gg S 3513                   S 3502                           in round source carriers 40 76 030 S 1747 15 15 295 S 1747 1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci g
1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci i
in round source carriers l9          g         o        ,.
Y
                                                                    )
/
t 6
9 k
20 96 402               20 96 303                           1 x Co60 up to 9000 Ci S 3513               S 3502                         ll 40 76 030 S 1747 42 81 119 S 1601                             17 99 253 S 1747 1 x Co60 up to l
17 82 044 S 1747
y o-                                                         in square source carriers s                   y                         9                   )        -
/
d N
17 99 253 S 1747 y - nad,ation e,rection of tre sources 1
gg 1 x Co60 up to in round source carriers 1 x Co60 up to in round source carriers e           i                                 E N
1 T 2.910 033.01 17 H 253 S 1747 Nature of Channel Loading
d-                   y                     I 1 x Co60 up to l
[
in square source carriers 42 81 119 S 1601                     17 99 253 S 1747 y = Radiation direction of the sources,1000 Ci Co60 corresponding to 1150 rhm,1000 Cl Cs137 = 200 rhm Caution!
j dispatch 15 15 296 17 82 044 C'
S 1747 S 1747 1
10 20 96 402 20 M 303 1 x Co60 up to 9000 Ci gg S 3513 S 3502 in round source carriers 40 76 030 S 1747 15 15 295 S 1747 1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci g
o in round source carriers l 9 g
t )
6 20 96 402 20 96 303 1 x Co60 up to 9000 Ci S 3513 S 3502 ll 40 76 030 S 1747 42 81 119 S 1601 17 99 253 S 1747 l
1 x Co60 up to y -
)
in square source carriers s
y 9
o d
N 1 x Co60 up to gg in round source carriers 1 x Co60 up to in round source carriers e
i E
d-y I
N 1 x Co60 up to l
in square source carriers 42 81 119 S 1601 17 99 253 S 1747 y = Radiation direction of the sources,1000 Ci Co60 corresponding to 1150 rhm,1000 Cl Cs137 = 200 rhm Caution!
For comprehensive fitting instructions for round carriers see
For comprehensive fitting instructions for round carriers see
                            " Source dispatch S 3502 Sh I" Da W 45Mengert                                                                                                       T 2.910.033.01
" Source dispatch S 3502 Sh I" D
a W 45Mengert T 2.910.033.01


o AN                                     VCN                                     ti. . . . - ...;.. .
o AN VCN ti.... -...;..
UB Med Erlangen
UB Med Erlangen
  ,Q                                                   s..rs.it.,
,Q s..rs.it.,
V             VT 43 T.i.ron Erlangen ihre Zeiden und ihre Naeriet vom       Unsere Zeicen                           Ort und Tag Load changeover form Confirmation of the change at a Gammatron 1,2,3, R, Cs, S installation with Co40 or Cs-137 source.
V VT 43 T.i.ron Erlangen ihre Zeiden und ihre Naeriet vom Unsere Zeicen Ort und Tag Load changeover form Confirmation of the change at a Gammatron 1,2,3, R, Cs, S installation with Co40 or Cs-137 source.
Installation Test number BZ-number Location Customer Source                                             old                         new j         Certificate number BZ-number Certificate date Manufacturer Source diameter in cm Certificate dose rate RHM i
Installation Test number BZ-number Location Customer Source old new j
l Drawer number Unload / load date Whereabouts of unloaded source Remarks and special occurrences Place, Date . . . .     ..                    . Technician . .      .....      ......... .    ..
Certificate number BZ-number Certificate date Manufacturer Source diameter in cm Certificate dose rate RHM i
i Tech. Manager . .................... .. ..
l Drawer number Unload / load date Whereabouts of unloaded source Remarks and special occurrences Place, Date....
Technician..
i Tech. Manager.
k !!
k !!


                                  -                                ~                                                                             _ _.
~
41G T 2.050.033.03.03.05 SIEMENS G AMMATRON S 65/S 80                                                           UCv.
41G T 2.050.033.03.03.05 SIEMENS G AMMATRON S 65/S 80 UCv.
g l                   oewuove
g l oewuove T 2.050.033.03.02.05 3
                          *          ****                                                                                                        T 2.050.033.03.02.05 3
05.78 h j Be-und Entladeanleitung Loading and unloading r i, I l
05.78 h     j       Be-und Entladeanleitung                                           Loading and unloading r i,     I                                                                                                                                                 l Die Be und Entladung des GAMMATRON S ist nur mit                   Loading and unloading of the GAMMATRON S may                               )
Die Be und Entladung des GAMMATRON S ist nur mit Loading and unloading of the GAMMATRON S may
dem Siemens Transport Behalter Typ B 17 99188 S 1747             only be performed with the Siemens transport container                     l y
)
* g       moglich.                                                         type B 17 99188 51747.
dem Siemens Transport Behalter Typ B 17 99188 S 1747 only be performed with the Siemens transport container y
sia 4 I           Au8er dem ublichen Montagewerkzeug wird folgendes                 Apart from the usual assembly tools, the following Spezialwerkzeug benotigt:                                         special tools are required:
g moglich.
f!!'I I      --
type B 17 99188 51747.
jd             Ladegestell zum               Sach Nr.44 39 451 SH 085           Loading frame for                             Art. No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Quellentausch                                                     changing sources Eeladewerkzeug und Vor.       Sach-Nr.20 96 923 S 3513           Loading tools and device                     Art. No. 20 96 923 S 3513 richtung fur G AMM ATR ON S                                       for the GAMMATRON S Diese Be-und Entradeanleitung ist Bestandteil behord.             This loading and unloading manual is a part of the licher Umgangsgenenmigungen.                                     authorized handling permission documents.
sia 4 I Au8er dem ublichen Montagewerkzeug wird folgendes Apart from the usual assembly tools, the following f!!'I Spezialwerkzeug benotigt:
{}l j             Anderunge nur mit Zustimmung von TVS (Technische                 Changes may only be made with the approval of TVS Ij             Verbindungsstelle - Strahlenschutz) bei der S;emens AG,             ( technical radiation protection department ) at
special tools are required:
                }}             Med. Eriangen.                                                     Siemens AG , Med Erlangen fI
I jd Ladegestell zum Sach Nr.44 39 451 SH 085 Loading frame for Art. No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Quellentausch changing sources Eeladewerkzeug und Vor.
'              t Unterlagen:                                                       Documents:
Sach-Nr.20 96 923 S 3513 Loading tools and device Art. No. 20 96 923 S 3513 richtung fur G AMM ATR ON S for the GAMMATRON S Diese Be-und Entradeanleitung ist Bestandteil behord.
Allgemerne Hinweise und Vorbe'eitungen zum Be und                 Gene al notes and preparat ons for loading and un-
This loading and unloading manual is a part of the licher Umgangsgenenmigungen.
{yz j           f Entladen einer Co 60 bzw. Cs 13 7 Quene. T 2.910.071.01 91       loading a Co 60 or Cs 137 source. T 2.910.071.01.01 j       3 inhalt                                                                           Contents li                                                                     Seite Page ahf        s
authorized handling permission documents.
: 1. Allgemeines                                               2                     1. General remarks
{}l j
: 2. Vorbereitende Arbeiten                                     4                   2. Preparation                                             j 83               3. Einleitende Arbeiten zur Entladung                       6                   3. Work prior to unloading i
Anderunge nur mit Zustimmung von TVS (Technische Changes may only be made with the approval of TVS Ij Verbindungsstelle - Strahlenschutz) bei der S;emens AG,
l- 8'I       i
( technical radiation protection department ) at
: 4. Entladung                                                 9                   4. Unloading
}}
            ?8'I I
Med. Eriangen.
s     5. Beladung                                                 12                   5. Loading l
Siemens AG, Med Erlangen fI t
k3 i
Unterlagen:
h l' g            4
Documents:
: 6. Abschlie8ende Arbeiten                                   16                   6. Re-assembly and checking I
{yz f Allgemerne Hinweise und Vorbe'eitungen zum Be und Gene al notes and preparat ons for loading and un-j Entladen einer Co 60 bzw. Cs 13 7 Quene. T 2.910.071.01 91 loading a Co 60 or Cs 137 source. T 2.910.071.01.01 3
'            l          t    7. Sicherheitshinweise                                       17                   7. Safety measures
j inhalt Contents li Seite Page h f
            ] 14       11     8. Verhalten bei auSergewohnlichen                           19                   8. Behaviour in exceptional situations e 18                 Situationen
: 1. Allgemeines 2
: 9. Bestuckung und Versandvorschriften                       19                   9. Fitting out and freighting instructions fur den Transportbehalter                                                          for transport container j
: 1. General remarks a
s
: 2. Vorbereitende Arbeiten 4
: 2. Preparation j
83
: 3. Einleitende Arbeiten zur Entladung 6
: 3. Work prior to unloading i
l
'I
- 8 i
?8'I
: 4. Entladung 9
: 4. Unloading I
s
: 5. Beladung 12
: 5. Loading k
l h l' 3
: 6. Abschlie8ende Arbeiten 16
: 6. Re-assembly and checking i
g 4
: 7. Sicherheitshinweise 17
: 7. Safety measures I
l t
] 14 11
: 8. Verhalten bei auSergewohnlichen 19
: 8. Behaviour in exceptional situations e 18 Situationen
: 9. Bestuckung und Versandvorschriften 19
: 9. Fitting out and freighting instructions j
If(
If(
              $    'sl deutsch/englisch O                                 s'eue"s ^xtie"oesensc"^r1                                 8ere><8 uee'z'm' sche te<8m>x e<'emeem                                       l
fur den Transportbehalter for transport container
                            ==============.                                                                                                                                 l
- 'sl deutsch/englisch O
                            .";*.Z'.*= *l*O*;;=.~JC"^r.' *,*, lJ'.CC " ~**"
s'eue"s ^xtie"oesensc"^r1 8ere><8 uee'z'm' sche te<8m>x e<'emeem
l
= = = = = = = = = = = = = =.
: 1.       Allgemeines                                                   1.       Generel remerks Unter Be-und Entladen des GAMMATRONS versteht                           The terms " loading" and " unloading" apply,3n the case man das Verschieben des die Kobaltquelle enthaltenden                   of the GAMMATRON, to the shif ting of the drawer with Quellentrsgers aus dem Transportbehilter in den                         its cobalt source from the transport container into the Strahlerkcpf und umgekehrt. Bei der Umladung wird der                   treatment head and vice sersa,in this process,the drawer Quellentrager mit der alten Quelle aus dem Strahlerkopf                 with the old source is moved from the head to the trans-in den Transportbehalter und dann der Quellentrager mit                 port container, and the new source is moved from the der neuen Quelle aus dem Transportbehalter in den Strah-                 transport container into the head.
.";*.Z'.*= *l*O*;;=.~JC"^r.' *,*, lJ'.CC " ~**"
* lerkopf gefuhrt.
 
Beim Lade- bzw. Entladevorgang ist in der beschriebenen                 When loading or unloading, the sequence described must Reihenfolge vorzugehent                                                 be adhered to exactly!
1.
Das GAMMATRON S darf nur unter der verantwort-                           The GAMMATRON S may only be loaded or unloaded lichen Leitung einer von der Siemens AG. Med. Erlangen                 under the supervision of an expert trained by the geschulten, fachkundigen Person be-oder entladen wer.                   Siemens Medical Engineering Group in Erlangen. He den. Dieser Fachkundige muS Uber ausreichende Kennt-                     must have adequate knowledge and experience in hand-nisse und Erfahrung im Umgang mit radioaktiven Stof-                   ling radioactive materials, and of radiation protection fen,in Strahlenschuttfragen und in der Strahlenme8-                     and radiation measuring techniques.
Allgemeines 1.
<                  technik verfugen.
Generel remerks Unter Be-und Entladen des GAMMATRONS versteht The terms " loading" and " unloading" apply,3n the case man das Verschieben des die Kobaltquelle enthaltenden of the GAMMATRON, to the shif ting of the drawer with Quellentrsgers aus dem Transportbehilter in den its cobalt source from the transport container into the Strahlerkcpf und umgekehrt. Bei der Umladung wird der treatment head and vice sersa,in this process,the drawer Quellentrager mit der alten Quelle aus dem Strahlerkopf with the old source is moved from the head to the trans-in den Transportbehalter und dann der Quellentrager mit port container, and the new source is moved from the der neuen Quelle aus dem Transportbehalter in den Strah-transport container into the head.
Gegebenenfalls muS dieser Fachkundige von der Siemens                   if necessary, the expert must be requested from the AG, Med. angefordert werden.                                           Siemens Medical Engineering Group.
lerkopf gefuhrt.
Die nachfolgend beschriebenen Arbeiten mussen von                       All work described in these instructions must be per-mindestens 2 Personen ausgefuhrt werden.                                 formed by at least 2 persons.
Beim Lade-bzw. Entladevorgang ist in der beschriebenen When loading or unloading, the sequence described must Reihenfolge vorzugehent be adhered to exactly!
Die zweite Person muS vom verantwortlichen Fachkun.                     The second person must have been instructed by the digen uber die durchzufuhrenden Arbeiten und die auf.                   responsible erpert on the work he has to perform and tretenden Gefahrdungsmoglichkeiten unterrichtet sein.                   the sources of any hazard which may be involved.
Das GAMMATRON S darf nur unter der verantwort-The GAMMATRON S may only be loaded or unloaded lichen Leitung einer von der Siemens AG. Med. Erlangen under the supervision of an expert trained by the geschulten, fachkundigen Person be-oder entladen wer.
1.1.       Strahlenindikatoren und Strahlenme8gerate                     1.1.       Radiation indicators and radiation measuring i                 Zur Messung mu8 ein Dosisleistungsme8gerat (Me8be.                                 equipment
Siemens Medical Engineering Group in Erlangen. He den. Dieser Fachkundige muS Uber ausreichende Kennt-must have adequate knowledge and experience in hand-nisse und Erfahrung im Umgang mit radioaktiven Stof-ling radioactive materials, and of radiation protection fen,in Strahlenschuttfragen und in der Strahlenme8-and radiation measuring techniques.
}                 reich mindestens 1 mR/h - 1 R/h) vorhanden sein,                         For this, a dose rate meter (measuring range at least au8erdem mu8 jede beteiligte Person ein integrierendes                   1 mR/h - 1 R/h) must be available. Furthermore, all Taschendoismeter (Pen. Dosimeter oder aquivalentes                       persons involved must wear an integrating pocket dosi-Dosimeter) und eine Strahlenschuttplakette (Filmdosi.                   meter (Pendosimeter or equivalent instrument) and a meter, Glasdosimeter etc.) tragen,                                       radration protection badge ifilm dosimeter, glass dosi-meter etc1 1.2.     Beladewerkzeug und Vorrichtung                               1.2.     Loading tools and equipment Vor dem Einsatt ist das Beladewerkzeug Sacn.Nr.                         Before starting work check the set of tools. Art. No.
technik verfugen.
20 96 923 S 3502 auf seine Vollstandigkeit zu uber-                     20 96 923 S 3502, to see that it is complete:
Gegebenenfalls muS dieser Fachkundige von der Siemens if necessary, the expert must be requested from the AG, Med. angefordert werden.
Siemens Medical Engineering Group.
Die nachfolgend beschriebenen Arbeiten mussen von All work described in these instructions must be per-mindestens 2 Personen ausgefuhrt werden.
formed by at least 2 persons.
Die zweite Person muS vom verantwortlichen Fachkun.
The second person must have been instructed by the digen uber die durchzufuhrenden Arbeiten und die auf.
responsible erpert on the work he has to perform and tretenden Gefahrdungsmoglichkeiten unterrichtet sein.
the sources of any hazard which may be involved.
1.1.
Strahlenindikatoren und Strahlenme8gerate 1.1.
Radiation indicators and radiation measuring i
Zur Messung mu8 ein Dosisleistungsme8gerat (Me8be.
equipment
}
reich mindestens 1 mR/h - 1 R/h) vorhanden sein, For this, a dose rate meter (measuring range at least au8erdem mu8 jede beteiligte Person ein integrierendes 1 mR/h - 1 R/h) must be available. Furthermore, all Taschendoismeter (Pen. Dosimeter oder aquivalentes persons involved must wear an integrating pocket dosi-Dosimeter) und eine Strahlenschuttplakette (Filmdosi.
meter (Pendosimeter or equivalent instrument) and a meter, Glasdosimeter etc.) tragen, radration protection badge ifilm dosimeter, glass dosi-meter etc1 1.2.
Beladewerkzeug und Vorrichtung 1.2.
Loading tools and equipment Vor dem Einsatt ist das Beladewerkzeug Sacn.Nr.
Before starting work check the set of tools. Art. No.
20 96 923 S 3502 auf seine Vollstandigkeit zu uber-20 96 923 S 3502, to see that it is complete:
prufen:
prufen:
4 i
4 i
i O
i O
T 2.050.033.03.01                                                     ,- ~ _ _ _ _ _                            _ _ _ _ _, _ - _ _ _ ,_-_,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
T 2.050.033.03.01,- ~ _ _ _ _ _


i I
i I
              @@                        @            @                  @                                          7 (n) v                                   -
7 (n) v e-
e-                            .-                                  t
. aQ t
                                    . aQ .CD-o                     y
.CD-o y
                                        %s            Q           g'                     w_                         -
Q g'
a same 98me]                                                               A, j                                                    ]                         J, l 4
a
                                        @@@                        @              @                      '2 Fig.1 1=       Hebezeug fur Blende                                       1=           Lifting a m for collimator 2=       Flaschenzug fur Blende                                   2=           Hoist for collimator 3=       Seilschlupf fur innenbehalter                             3=           Lif ting slings for the inside transport container 4=       Seilschlupf fur Blende                                   4=           Lif ting slings for the collimator 5=       Ringschrauben tur Blendenbefestigung                     5=           Ring-headed screws for collimator attachment 6=       Bleiring                                                 6=           Lead ring 7=       Kopfseitige Kopplungssche.be                               7=           Attachment plate (for fitting to head) 8=       Schraubbolten                                             8-           Threaded counterwe'ght supports 9=       Gegengewichte                                             9=           Counter-weights 10 =     Ladestange                                               10 =           Loading rod 11 =     Blindsch;eber                                           11 =           Dummy drawer 12 =     Hohlfullstucke                                         12 =           Feed blocks for source drawer 13 =     8ehalterse tige Kopplungsscheibe                       13 =           Attachment plate (for fitting to container) 14 =     Beladescheibe                                           14 =           Loading disk for container 15 =     Div. Schrauben                                         15 =           Various screws (packet)
%s w_
Achtung: Wichtiger Hinweis                                     Caution: Important notice Der Quellentrager muG sich einwandfrei vom Transport.             It must be possible to slide the source drawer without behalter tum Strahlerk opf und umgek ehrt schieben 135           doff?culty from the transport container into the therapy sen, ohne tu klemmen Oder antustoGen.                           head and vice versa, without jamming or collision.
98me]
Sollte beiemer Umladung ein Klemmen des Quellen-                 If. when changing sources, the loading tools should tragers auftreten, so ist d>eser sofort in seine Ausgangs.       become jammed, the source drawer must immediately be stellung ta bringen. Die Vorrichtungen sind tu demon.           returned to its original position, the equipment dismoun.
same A,
treren und die Arbeiten noch ernmal sorgfalltig von An           ted and all work performed once more from the begin fang an durchzufahren.                                           ning.
]
Sollte der Quellentrager erneut klemmen, so sind die             if the source drawer should stilljam. all work should be Arbeiten einzustellen und es ist sofort die fur                 stopped and the service department in the Medical GA MtfA TRONtustandige Service Abteilung bei UB Med             Engineering Group at Erlangen responsible for the Erlangen tu verstandigen                                         GA MMA TRON mus t be notified immediately.
J, l
I s
j
T 2.050 033 03 01
'2 4
Fig.1 1=
Hebezeug fur Blende 1=
Lifting a m for collimator 2=
Flaschenzug fur Blende 2=
Hoist for collimator 3=
Seilschlupf fur innenbehalter 3=
Lif ting slings for the inside transport container 4=
Seilschlupf fur Blende 4=
Lif ting slings for the collimator 5=
Ringschrauben tur Blendenbefestigung 5=
Ring-headed screws for collimator attachment 6=
Bleiring 6=
Lead ring 7=
Kopfseitige Kopplungssche.be 7=
Attachment plate (for fitting to head) 8=
Schraubbolten 8-Threaded counterwe'ght supports 9=
Gegengewichte 9=
Counter-weights 10 =
Ladestange 10 =
Loading rod 11 =
Blindsch;eber 11 =
Dummy drawer 12 =
Hohlfullstucke 12 =
Feed blocks for source drawer 13 =
8ehalterse tige Kopplungsscheibe 13 =
Attachment plate (for fitting to container) 14 =
Beladescheibe 14 =
Loading disk for container 15 =
Div. Schrauben 15 =
Various screws (packet)
Achtung: Wichtiger Hinweis Caution: Important notice Der Quellentrager muG sich einwandfrei vom Transport.
It must be possible to slide the source drawer without behalter tum Strahlerk opf und umgek ehrt schieben 135 doff?culty from the transport container into the therapy sen, ohne tu klemmen Oder antustoGen.
head and vice versa, without jamming or collision.
Sollte beiemer Umladung ein Klemmen des Quellen-If. when changing sources, the loading tools should tragers auftreten, so ist d>eser sofort in seine Ausgangs.
become jammed, the source drawer must immediately be stellung ta bringen. Die Vorrichtungen sind tu demon.
returned to its original position, the equipment dismoun.
treren und die Arbeiten noch ernmal sorgfalltig von An ted and all work performed once more from the begin fang an durchzufahren.
ning.
Sollte der Quellentrager erneut klemmen, so sind die if the source drawer should stilljam. all work should be Arbeiten einzustellen und es ist sofort die fur stopped and the service department in the Medical GA MtfA TRONtustandige Service Abteilung bei UB Med Engineering Group at Erlangen responsible for the Erlangen tu verstandigen GA MMA TRON mus t be notified immediately.
Is T 2.050 033 03 01


a e
a e
: 2.         Vorbereitende Arbeiten                             2.         Preparation Gerat einschalten und bis zur Beendigung aller nach-         Switch on the unit and leave it in this condition until all the work described below has been completed.
2.
folgend beschriebenen Arbeiten im eingeschalteten Zustand belassen.
Vorbereitende Arbeiten 2.
T
Preparation Gerat einschalten und bis zur Beendigung aller nach-Switch on the unit and leave it in this condition until all folgend beschriebenen Arbeiten im eingeschalteten the work described below has been completed.
                                                                                                              .      W
Zustand belassen.
                                                                                                                    ,    1 4
T W
                                                                                        .-                        i
1 i
                                                                                                                          ?
?
5
4 5
                                                                                                                  -3
-3
                                                                                                                    $i(1 2
$i(1 2
a                                                                      d l           (
l
i i er               i
(
                                                                        @                                jw                       -
d a
                @              @                                            w Fig. 2 0                 Rotate the arm to 2100or i70 , according to room con-Tragarm je nach Raumverhaltnis auf 210         oder 1700 ditions, and secure with locking rod (16).
i i er i
jw w
Fig. 2 0
Rotate the arm to 2100or i70, according to room con-Tragarm je nach Raumverhaltnis auf 210 oder 1700 ditions, and secure with locking rod (16).
schwenken und mit Arretierstange (16) sichern.
schwenken und mit Arretierstange (16) sichern.
Die Arretierstange ist auf der einen Seite in d;e am Trag. Fit the rod into the hole at the rear uf the arm and secur e it arm befindhche Bohrung zu stecken und auf der anderen          to the stand at the other end with an M 10 screw.
Fit the rod into the hole at the rear uf the arm and secur e it Die Arretierstange ist auf der einen Seite in d;e am Trag.
With the 65 modv unscrew the penumbra trimmer, or S*ite am Stativ mit e ner Schraube M 10 festzuschrauben.
to the stand at the other end with an M 10 screw.
arm befindhche Bohrung zu stecken und auf der anderen With the 65 modv unscrew the penumbra trimmer, or S*ite am Stativ mit e ner Schraube M 10 festzuschrauben.
with the 80 modA pull it out and close both sides of the Ha'bschattentrimmer eim 65er Gerat abschrauben bzw.
with the 80 modA pull it out and close both sides of the Ha'bschattentrimmer eim 65er Gerat abschrauben bzw.
colhmator. Rem.we colhmator cover (f 7).
colhmator. Rem.we colhmator cover (f 7).
beim 80er Gerat herausitehen und beide Blendenseiten Set up the loading tackle accord ng to room conditimis schhe8en. Blendenabdeckung (17) abnehmen. Ladege.
beim 80er Gerat herausitehen und beide Blendenseiten Set up the loading tackle accord ng to room conditimis schhe8en. Blendenabdeckung (17) abnehmen. Ladege.
(see fig. 3), assembly the l f ting arm and coilimator hoist.
stell je nach Raumlichkeit aufstellen (siehe Fig 31. mit (see fig. 3), assembly the l f ting arm and coilimator hoist.
stell je nach Raumlichkeit aufstellen (siehe Fig 31. mit Bring the transport container (18) under the tackle Ausleger und Hebezeuge komplett:eren t>oum as shown in fig 3 and tighten the hf ting tackle Transport Innenbehalter (18) gemaK Fig. 3 unter Lade, up between it and the boom so that it serves as a counter-gesteil bringen und tugeordneten Seilzug zum Hebezeug We rght urter straf fe Spannung bringen (dient als Gegengewicht).
Bring the transport container (18) under the tackle Ausleger und Hebezeuge komplett:eren t>oum as shown in fig 3 and tighten the hf ting tackle Transport Innenbehalter (18) gemaK Fig. 3 unter Lade, up between it and the boom so that it serves as a counter-gesteil bringen und tugeordneten Seilzug zum Hebezeug We rght urter straf fe Spannung bringen (dient als Gegengewicht).
I         %
I
r                      p                                                                            .. .
- k [9h.j r
                    -k   [9h.j                                           x                                   3 s
p x
u           s b
3 s
m,
u s
:                                              s 'sW                                       -                /
- b s 'sW
g eb               j                                         [                 ,_~YN 19               w         J                                                                                           f' T ^,
/
5                                           .N                        ,
: m, g eb j
1                   \                               g
[
      \.                                                                                       @ df h/ e Fig. 4 F-M                                                            q Fig. 5 T 2.050.033 03 01
,_~YN 19 w
J
.N f' T ^,
5 F-M q
@ df h/
1
\\
g
\\.
e Fig. 5 Fig. 4 T 2.050.033 03 01


o Beim B0er Gerat sind am Blendenpaar "A" die Halb.                   With the 80 model, remove the penumbra trimmers from schattentrimmer herauszuziehen und diese Blendenseite               the collimator pair "A"and open this side of the colli-2J 6ffnen, an der Blendenseite "B" sind die Halbschatten.           mator, sliding in the penumbra trimmers into the colli-f ~N tr mmer einzuschieben und diese Seite ist zu schlieBen.             mator side "B" and closing this side.
o Beim B0er Gerat sind am Blendenpaar "A" die Halb.
Stecker k 1 (19) abschrauben.                                       Unscrew plug k 1 (19).
With the 80 model, remove the penumbra trimmers from schattentrimmer herauszuziehen und diese Blendenseite the collimator pair "A"and open this side of the colli-f ~N 2J 6ffnen, an der Blendenseite "B" sind die Halbschatten.
Die vier Schrauben fur die Blendenbefestigung heraus.               Unscrew the four screws attaching the collimator, schrauben.                                                         Screw the two ring-headed screws (5) into the collimator Zwei Ringschrauben (5) an die Blende ansetzen (Fig. 4).             (fig. 4). Unscrew switch s 2, previously marking its posi-Schalter s 2 abschrauben, vorher Stellung markieren.               tion. Using the small lifting tackle loops to be found in Blende mit Hilfe des bei dem BelaJewerkzeug vorhan-                 the loading tool set, suspend the collimator from the denen kleinen Seiltchlupfes am Flaschenzug anhangen                 hoist and withdraw from the head (withdrawal must be und vom Kopi herausheben (Zugrichtung genau senk-                   exactly vertical, adjust the collimator hoist together with recht, dazu Ladegestell mit Ausleger ausrichten) und in             the lif ting arm and suspend at its highest position (fig. 3).
mator, sliding in the penumbra trimmers into the colli-tr mmer einzuschieben und diese Seite ist zu schlieBen.
mator side "B" and closing this side.
Stecker k 1 (19) abschrauben.
Unscrew plug k 1 (19).
Die vier Schrauben fur die Blendenbefestigung heraus.
Unscrew the four screws attaching the collimator, schrauben.
Screw the two ring-headed screws (5) into the collimator Zwei Ringschrauben (5) an die Blende ansetzen (Fig. 4).
(fig. 4). Unscrew switch s 2, previously marking its posi-Schalter s 2 abschrauben, vorher Stellung markieren.
tion. Using the small lifting tackle loops to be found in Blende mit Hilfe des bei dem BelaJewerkzeug vorhan-the loading tool set, suspend the collimator from the denen kleinen Seiltchlupfes am Flaschenzug anhangen hoist and withdraw from the head (withdrawal must be und vom Kopi herausheben (Zugrichtung genau senk-exactly vertical, adjust the collimator hoist together with recht, dazu Ladegestell mit Ausleger ausrichten) und in the lif ting arm and suspend at its highest position (fig. 3).
hochster Stellang hangen lassen (Fig. 3).
hochster Stellang hangen lassen (Fig. 3).
Achtung:                                                           Caution:
Achtung:
Mua das Ladegestell aus irgendesnem Grund verschoben               If the A frame holding up the hoists has to be moved *cr werden, insbesondere beimomentan entspanntem Seil-                 any reason whatever, especially if the tackle to the con.
Caution:
zug zum Innenbehalter, so ist dies besonders vorsichtig             tainer has to be slackened momentarily, this must be durchzufuhren, da durch das Gewicht der Blende das                 performed with special care as the weight of the cosh-Ladegestellleicht kappen kann.                                     mator can easily tip up the frame!
Mua das Ladegestell aus irgendesnem Grund verschoben If the A frame holding up the hoists has to be moved *cr werden, insbesondere beimomentan entspanntem Seil-any reason whatever, especially if the tackle to the con.
Beim Herausher;en der Blende am G AMM AIHON S 30                   When removing the collimator from the GAMM A.
zug zum Innenbehalter, so ist dies besonders vorsichtig tainer has to be slackened momentarily, this must be durchzufuhren, da durch das Gewicht der Blende das performed with special care as the weight of the cosh-Ladegestellleicht kappen kann.
ist darauf zu achten, da8 die H&bschattentrimmer n cht             TRON 5 80, take care that the penumbra trimmers are bescnadigt werden.                                                 not da ")ged.
mator can easily tip up the frame!
A Achtung:                                                           Caution:
Beim Herausher;en der Blende am G AMM AIHON S 30 When removing the collimator from the GAMM A.
Bezuglich der an der Blende behndhchen URAIV-Tede                 Consult safety instructions                       with re-sind die Sicherheitshrnweise                       beachten.     gard to the uranium parts of the colhmator.
ist darauf zu achten, da8 die H&bschattentrimmer n cht TRON 5 80, take care that the penumbra trimmers are bescnadigt werden.
Bleir+ng !6 Fig. 5) in den Strahlerkopf einle jen. Dabei           Place the 'ead ring (6 't g. 5) ento the head. The plug k i soll der Stecker k 1 in der Aussparung des B!e:ringes zu           should be located in the space provided for it in the iead liegen kommen.                                                     ring i
not da ")ged.
                                                                                                              }
A Achtung:
                /                                     CD                         1                         C
Caution:
              \                                                                                   g
Bezuglich der an der Blende behndhchen URAIV-Tede Consult safety instructions with re-sind die Sicherheitshrnweise beachten.
          /       w N        k-                         -
gard to the uranium parts of the colhmator.
e s
Bleir+ng !6 Fig. 5) in den Strahlerkopf einle jen. Dabei Place the 'ead ring (6 't g. 5) ento the head. The plug k i soll der Stecker k 1 in der Aussparung des B!e:ringes zu should be located in the space provided for it in the iead liegen kommen.
p y
ring
y                                     v    y
}
                    '                                                                                          ~
i
                              ',                  7-r* y                               l/fw as                A-/
/
N                 -
CD 1
                                  ,          l      e 4                                                   yfgh                         s i
C
                                                                                                                                          \
\\
l
/
                    \                7,                                                      _ Nw M                                     !
g w
                      \'          j$                  [                                            c            f                 f gd      Fig. 6 xlp                                                       4%{ z''                                     7 l
k-N e
T 2 040 033 0 '
v s
l 1
y y
y p
l/f as A-
\\
~
l 7-r* y N
e w
4 yfgh /
s i
\\'
j$
[
_ Nw M 7,
\\
f f
xlp 4%{
c z''
g d
Fig. 6 7 T 2 040 033 0 '


e Kopfseitige Kopplungsscheibe mit dem zugeordneten             Place the head attachment plate with its proper centering Zentrierrand in den Blendentagerungsring einsetten und       face onto the coilimator ring, and screw on (fig. 6.
e Kopfseitige Kopplungsscheibe mit dem zugeordneten Place the head attachment plate with its proper centering Zentrierrand in den Blendentagerungsring einsetten und face onto the coilimator ring, and screw on (fig. 6.
anschrauben (Fig. 6). Hierbei ist mit Sorgfalt vorzugehen,   Great care must be takten here, as inmrrect centering denn eine nicht einwandfreie Zentrierung kann zu einem       can lead to jamming of the source rod when loading or Verklemmen des Quellenriegels beim Be und Entladen           unloading. Check by viewing through the opening for fuhren.                                                       the collimator cable (arrow fig. 7); rotate the attachment Sichtkontrolle durch den Ausschnitt furs Blendenkabel         plate through 1800 and check to see that the attachment (Pfeil/ Fig. 7). Kopplungsscheibe um 1800 drehen und         plate is in an even horizontal position on the collimator kontrollieren;da8 die Kopplungsscheibe auf den Blenden-       ring.
anschrauben (Fig. 6). Hierbei ist mit Sorgfalt vorzugehen, Great care must be takten here, as inmrrect centering denn eine nicht einwandfreie Zentrierung kann zu einem can lead to jamming of the source rod when loading or Verklemmen des Quellenriegels beim Be und Entladen unloading. Check by viewing through the opening for fuhren.
lagerungsring gleichma8ig aufliegt.                           Attach the counterweights using the proper supports (8)
the collimator cable (arrow fig. 7); rotate the attachment Sichtkontrolle durch den Ausschnitt furs Blendenkabel plate through 1800 and check to see that the attachment (Pfeil/ Fig. 7). Kopplungsscheibe um 1800 drehen und plate is in an even horizontal position on the collimator kontrollieren;da8 die Kopplungsscheibe auf den Blenden-ring.
Gegengewicht mit Hilfe der Befestigungsbolzen (8) auf-       (fig. 7). Rotate the head so that the head attachrnent plate setzen (Fig. 7). Strahlerkopf so drehen, da8 die kopf-       (coupling surface) is in vertical position, if necessary, settige Kopplungsscheibe (Kopplungsflache) senkrecht         rotate the attachment plate so that it does not collide steht. Falls notwendig, Kopplungsscheibe drehen, damit       with the A frame.
lagerungsring gleichma8ig aufliegt.
Attach the counterweights using the proper supports (8)
Gegengewicht mit Hilfe der Befestigungsbolzen (8) auf-(fig. 7). Rotate the head so that the head attachrnent plate setzen (Fig. 7). Strahlerkopf so drehen, da8 die kopf-(coupling surface) is in vertical position, if necessary, settige Kopplungsscheibe (Kopplungsflache) senkrecht rotate the attachment plate so that it does not collide steht. Falls notwendig, Kopplungsscheibe drehen, damit with the A frame.
die Gegengewichte nicht am Ladegestell anstoGen.
die Gegengewichte nicht am Ladegestell anstoGen.
: 3.         Einleitende Arbeiten zur Entladung                 3.         Work prior to unloading Beschrieben wird eine Umladung.                               A source e= change is described.
3.
Zuerst die Entladung und anschlienend die Beladung.           Unloading takes place prior to loading.
Einleitende Arbeiten zur Entladung 3.
Hierzu darf sich im Transportinnenoenaltar nur eine           For this, the internal transport container may only con-Quelle befinden (vorwiegend im Schacht II).                   tain one source (pref erably in channel ll).
Work prior to unloading Beschrieben wird eine Umladung.
Fur die Entladung werden zusatthch eir.e Adapterhu'se         For unloading, an additional adapter sleeve (21) and a (21) und ein Schutiriege: (20) Art. Nr.1515 295 S 1707         pratective bar (20), Art. No.1515 295 S 1707, are re-benotigt. Diese sind kein Besandteil des Beladewerk.           quired. These do not constitute a part of the loading zeuges,da diese spater im Behalter whie ben                   tools as they are later to remain in the container.
A source e= change is described.
3.1.       Vorbereitung des Ladewerkzeuges                     3.1.       Preparmg the loading tools
Zuerst die Entladung und anschlienend die Beladung.
                                      @                      @                          @                                      e
Unloading takes place prior to loading.
                                                    ^
Hierzu darf sich im Transportinnenoenaltar nur eine For this, the internal transport container may only con-Quelle befinden (vorwiegend im Schacht II).
S\
tain one source (pref erably in channel ll).
                                      \
Fur die Entladung werden zusatthch eir.e Adapterhu'se For unloading, an additional adapter sleeve (21) and a (21) und ein Schutiriege: (20) Art. Nr.1515 295 S 1707 pratective bar (20), Art. No.1515 295 S 1707, are re-benotigt. Diese sind kein Besandteil des Beladewerk.
                                          '4
quired. These do not constitute a part of the loading zeuges,da diese spater im Behalter whie ben tools as they are later to remain in the container.
(@)::x:x:(@^
3.1.
v                         N/
Vorbereitung des Ladewerkzeuges 3.1.
                                                                                            -- }
Preparmg the loading tools e
                                                                ~
S\\
                                                                          ) li 3   ) <~
^
l4               /         'm       C     /
\\
l                             Fig. 8 l
'4 (@)::x:x:(@^
l Ladestange (10) nach Abnehmen des Schutirohres durch           Af ter removing the protective tube, slide the load.ng rod den runden Bhndschieber (11) schieben                         (10) through the round dummy drawer (11). Couple on Den Schuttriegel (20), durch Verdrehen der Ladestange         the prutective tungsten bar (20) by turning the loading (10) im Uhrteigersinn. ank oripeln. ( Auf laufen und           rod (10) in a clock wise direction. { Tak e care that the Bohrung an den Kopplungsflachen achten (F"l 8).               locating pins engage in their holes (fiq 8l). Firmly tighten Die Iwes innentechskantschrauben am Klemmstutk                 the 2 Allen screws on the clamping piece (10 a) so that (10 a) fest ansiehen, wodurch die erfordaAhe ,7 ir e           the necessary rigid union is estabbshed for later couphng Einheit zum spateren Anb oppeln an den Quellentager           onto the source dianer.
-- }
v N/
~
) li 3 ) <~
l4
/
'm C
/
l Fig. 8 l
l Ladestange (10) nach Abnehmen des Schutirohres durch Af ter removing the protective tube, slide the load.ng rod den runden Bhndschieber (11) schieben (10) through the round dummy drawer (11). Couple on Den Schuttriegel (20), durch Verdrehen der Ladestange the prutective tungsten bar (20) by turning the loading (10) im Uhrteigersinn. ank oripeln. ( Auf laufen und rod (10) in a clock wise direction. { Tak e care that the Bohrung an den Kopplungsflachen achten (F"l 8).
locating pins engage in their holes (fiq 8l). Firmly tighten Die Iwes innentechskantschrauben am Klemmstutk the 2 Allen screws on the clamping piece (10 a) so that (10 a) fest ansiehen, wodurch die erfordaAhe,7 ir e the necessary rigid union is estabbshed for later couphng Einheit zum spateren Anb oppeln an den Quellentager onto the source dianer.
hergestellt ist.
hergestellt ist.
T 2 050 093.03 01 e
T 2 050 093.03 01 e
[]
[]
V                         .
N V
N l                                                           I..
l I..
                                                                                                                        ~
~
                                          ~
~
Fig. 9 Ober diese starre Einheit ist in der in Fig. 9 gezeigten             in the sequence shown in fig. 9, slide on a hollow feed Reihenfolge ein Hohlfullstuck (12) und eine Adapter-               block (12) and an adapter sleeve (21) over this rigid hUlse (21) zu schieben,                                             union. Pay attention that the flat non<hamfered sur-Oabei ist darauf zu achten, daS die nicht angeschrigte               face (arrow, fig. 9) is facing downwards.
Fig. 9 Ober diese starre Einheit ist in der in Fig. 9 gezeigten in the sequence shown in fig. 9, slide on a hollow feed Reihenfolge ein Hohlfullstuck (12) und eine Adapter-block (12) and an adapter sleeve (21) over this rigid hUlse (21) zu schieben, union. Pay attention that the flat non<hamfered sur-Oabei ist darauf zu achten, daS die nicht angeschrigte face (arrow, fig. 9) is facing downwards.
Fliche (Pfeil/ Fig. 9) nach unten zeigt.
Fliche (Pfeil/ Fig. 9) nach unten zeigt.
: 32.         Vorbereitung am Transportinnenbehilter                 32       Preparatens on the inner transport container Achtung:                                                           Caution:
32.
Beiallen Arbeiten am Transportinnenbehalter, bei                   with all work on the inner transport container, where denen die Quellentrager gegen Herausrutschen nicht                 the source drawers are not secured against sliding out, gesichert sind, ist der Transportinnenbehalter sicher auf           the inner transport container must be placed safely on dem Boden abzustellen und waagrecht auszurichten.                   the floor and lined up vertically.
Vorbereitung am Transportinnenbehilter 32 Preparatens on the inner transport container Achtung:
o
Caution:
* g                                      a
Beiallen Arbeiten am Transportinnenbehalter, bei with all work on the inner transport container, where denen die Quellentrager gegen Herausrutschen nicht the source drawers are not secured against sliding out, gesichert sind, ist der Transportinnenbehalter sicher auf the inner transport container must be placed safely on dem Boden abzustellen und waagrecht auszurichten.
                                                            '                                                        ~
the floor and lined up vertically.
                  /~      --                        --        \                   Muz42 1               p                                   9 w   .
o g
l 25a         9                     25b
a
                        -.=                 ..x er                               =
/~
\                                       R                         y                b                                  b w~.:.               . _' a b     .                                        b            h_b                                       _j 10b i
\\
I I-     Fig.10                                                                                                                   Fig.11 Vom Transportinnenbehalter die beiden Deckel (22) ab-               Unscrew the two covers (22) from the inner container.
Muz42
schrauben.                                                         Remove the two lead blocks (23) from the upper Die beiden Blerklotte (231 vom oberen Schacht (1) her.             channel (1).
~
l 1
p 9
w 25a 9
25b
-.=
..x er
=
y b
b
\\
R b
w~.:.
b h_b
_j a
10b i
I I-Fig.10 Fig.11 Vom Transportinnenbehalter die beiden Deckel (22) ab-Unscrew the two covers (22) from the inner container.
schrauben.
Remove the two lead blocks (23) from the upper Die beiden Blerklotte (231 vom oberen Schacht (1) her.
channel (1).
ausnehmen.
ausnehmen.
Es ist iu prufen, ob in diesem Schacht der Blindschieber           Check to see that the dummy drawer fits into this sitzt. Im Regelfall befindet sich die neue Quelle in               channel As a general rule, the new source should be Schachtll.                                                         located in the channel ll.
Es ist iu prufen, ob in diesem Schacht der Blindschieber Check to see that the dummy drawer fits into this sitzt. Im Regelfall befindet sich die neue Quelle in channel As a general rule, the new source should be Schachtll.
  %/
located in the channel ll.
T 2.050.033.03.01
%/ T 2.050.033.03.01


O Nun den zusammenmontierten Blindschieber mit Hohl-                     Now slide the dummy drawer with the hollow feed block fullstuck und Adapterhulse in den oberen Schacht ein-                   and adapter sleeve as assembled, together into the upper schieben. Dabei schiebt sich auf der anderen Seite der                 channel. On the other side, the rectangular dummy insert Vierkant-Blindschieber (24) heraus. Dieser ist abzu-                   (24) is pushed out.
O Nun den zusammenmontierten Blindschieber mit Hohl-Now slide the dummy drawer with the hollow feed block fullstuck und Adapterhulse in den oberen Schacht ein-and adapter sleeve as assembled, together into the upper schieben. Dabei schiebt sich auf der anderen Seite der channel. On the other side, the rectangular dummy insert Vierkant-Blindschieber (24) heraus. Dieser ist abzu-(24) is pushed out.
nehmen.
nehmen.
Das zweite Hohlfullst6ck ist auf dieser Seite einzuschie-               This should be removed. Slide the second hollow feed ben, dabei liegt die nicht angeschragte Flache unten.                   block into this side, the nonchamfered surface must Durch diesen Vorgang wird gewahrleistet, da8 der                       here face downwards also, Schacht ohne Quelle in jeder Phase des Be-oder Ent.                     This process guarantees that the channel without a
Das zweite Hohlfullst6ck ist auf dieser Seite einzuschie-This should be removed. Slide the second hollow feed ben, dabei liegt die nicht angeschragte Flache unten.
  !Wevorganges ausgefullt ist und somit keine erhohte Oo-                 source is occupied in all phases of loading or unloading sisleistung auftreten kann.                                             to reduce the radiation risk.
block into this side, the nonchamfered surface must Durch diesen Vorgang wird gewahrleistet, da8 der here face downwards also, Schacht ohne Quelle in jeder Phase des Be-oder Ent.
An jeder Kopplungsscheibe rnussen sicn I.ve Spe.r                       Two locking screws (25 a + 25 b/ fig. Ill must be located schrauben (25 a/25 b/ Fig.11) oe'inden, de immer ein.                   in each attachment plate and must always be screwed m.
This process guarantees that the channel without a
gedrehtsind.                                                             This guarantees that the source drawer cannot Mide out Dadurch wird gewahrleistet, da3 der Quehentrager nicht                 accidentally.
!Wevorganges ausgefullt ist und somit keine erhohte Oo-source is occupied in all phases of loading or unloading sisleistung auftreten kann.
to reduce the radiation risk.
An jeder Kopplungsscheibe rnussen sicn I.ve Spe.r Two locking screws (25 a + 25 b/ fig. Ill must be located schrauben (25 a/25 b/ Fig.11) oe'inden, de immer ein.
in each attachment plate and must always be screwed m.
gedrehtsind.
This guarantees that the source drawer cannot Mide out Dadurch wird gewahrleistet, da3 der Quehentrager nicht accidentally.
Hrausrutschen kann.
Hrausrutschen kann.
M ai'eneit ge Kopplungsscheibe (13) auf der einen                       Screw on the container attachment plate (13) onto the Suite des BeMlters anschrauben (M 6 x 25). Hier ist                     side of the container (M 6 x 25). Attention must here ebenfalls auf eMwandf reie Zertriersoq ts.eha Pfe.1                     also be paid to accurate centering (otnerwise jamming Ilg.11) zu achten (sonst Vern!emmv tern Be und Ent-                     mil occur during load;ng or unloading). Slide the loading laden moglich). Auf der anderen Saite ce> B.a.isters d,e               disk (14) over the loading rod on the other side of the Beladescheibe (14) uber die Udesta l .e f ah' n und eben.               conta ner and also screw on (fig 11) to the container.
M ai'eneit ge Kopplungsscheibe (13) au der einen Screw on the container attachment plate (13) onto the f
Suite des BeMlters anschrauben (M 6 x 25). Hier ist side of the container (M 6 x 25). Attention must here ebenfalls auf eMwandf reie Zertriersoq ts.eha Pfe.1 also be paid to accurate centering (otnerwise jamming Ilg.11) zu achten (sonst Vern!emmv tern Be und Ent-mil occur during load;ng or unloading). Slide the loading laden moglich). Auf der anderen Saite ce> B.a.isters d,e disk (14) over the loading rod on the other side of the Beladescheibe (14) uber die Udesta l.e f ah' n und eben.
conta ner and also screw on (fig 11) to the container.
f a'Is anschrauben (Fig.11)
f a'Is anschrauben (Fig.11)
Sicherheitskette (10 b) zur Hubbegrenzung an der Be-                     Hook in the safety chain (10 b) to the loading disk (14) ladescheibe (14) einhangen                                               in order to 1;mit the travel of the loading rod.
Sicherheitskette (10 b) zur Hubbegrenzung an der Be-Hook in the safety chain (10 b) to the loading disk (14) ladescheibe (14) einhangen in order to 1;mit the travel of the loading rod.
I N               - ..    - ctachement plate I     Kopf seitige           t 'O' fittirg to head)
I N
                                                                                                /
- ctachement plate I
b                '
Kopf seitige t 'O' fittirg to head) b
Koppluncs /           _ _
/
scheibe                                                                                           '
Koppluncs /
N                                           ~1                                                               }  x
scheibe
                \                      W-n        1
}
                                                                                                              - wA(h     -
N
g                m - - _ - _ _
~1 1
cm_m                                                       .            _
- wA(h x
\\
W-n m - - _ - _ _
g 4
cm_m
(
(
4        -                                                .
\\S
                                                                                                      ~
~
~~
g
g
                                                                                                                                \S
'a
        ~~                                                                    %
' )
                                                                                                                              'a
/
                /         y             o   - - -
y o
t__                   )                                            >        j
t__
                                                                                    .y                     _ _ -      -
j
lead rmg Bleiring l,
.y Bleiring w
w                k  W.
k W.
_/                                         '(
lead rmg l,
j-e C
'(
* t                   Behalterseitige                      L- $
Behalterseitige
i Kopplungs-scheibe                                         \
_ /
attachement plate                                                 25a         13 (for fitting to conta,ner)
L-C t j-e Kopplungs-i scheibe
Fig.12                                                                                                                         Fig.13 nnenbehder hoch2iehen, so dad der Zugeordnete                         Raise the container so that the appropriate channel (1) is
\\
  % nacht (Schacht il mit dem G AMM ATRON Kopf-                           at the same level as the cannel in the G AMM ATRON schicht auf gleiche Holie kommt.                                         head.
attachement plate 25a 13 (for fitting to conta,ner)
Innenbehalter gegen 1en Kopf f ahren Uber me zuge-                       Move the container up against the head. Centering takes ordneten Zentrierringe erfolgt automat.sch me Zentrie-                   place automatically when the appropriate centering rings rung (siehe Fig.12),                                                     engage (see fig.12)
Fig.12 Fig.13 nnenbehder hoch2iehen, so dad der Zugeordnete Raise the container so that the appropriate channel (1) is
Kopfseitige und behaf terse:tege Konplungssche:be mit                   Screw the head and the container-attachment plates to-4 Schrauben (M 6 x 30) verschrauben (Fs 13).                             gether with the four screws (M 6 x 30) tfig 13L Sperrschraube 125 al von Schacht I herausdrehen                         Unscrew the lockina screw (25 al from the channel to be used.
% nacht (Schacht il mit dem G AMM ATRON Kopf-at the same level as the cannel in the G AMM ATRON schicht auf gleiche Holie kommt.
head.
Innenbehalter gegen 1en Kopf f ahren Uber me zuge-Move the container up against the head. Centering takes ordneten Zentrierringe erfolgt automat.sch me Zentrie-place automatically when the appropriate centering rings rung (siehe Fig.12),
engage (see fig.12)
Kopfseitige und behaf terse:tege Konplungssche:be mit Screw the head and the container-attachment plates to-4 Schrauben (M 6 x 30) verschrauben (Fs 13).
gether with the four screws (M 6 x 30) tfig 13L Sperrschraube 125 al von Schacht I herausdrehen Unscrew the lockina screw (25 al from the channel to be used.
T 2 050 033 03 01 G
T 2 050 033 03 01 G
: 4.       Entladung                                                                                                 4.                       Unloading Die mit der Be oder Entladung eines GAMMATRON be-                                                                   Persons charged with loading or unloading a GAMMA.
4.
auftragten Personen dUrfen sich wahrend des eigentlichen                                                             TRON must not stay within the shaded area during loa-
Entladung 4.
[V]    Ladevorganges, d.h. fur die Duaer der Gammatrom Ver-schluBof fnung und insbesondere beim Verschieben des ding,i.e. for as long as the G AMM ATRON shutter is opened and especially when shifting the source drawer, Quellentragers nicht innerhalb des schraf fier ten Bereiches                                                         as increased exposure to radiation would occur.
Unloading Die mit der Be oder Entladung eines GAMMATRON be-Persons charged with loading or unloading a GAMMA.
[V]
auftragten Personen dUrfen sich wahrend des eigentlichen TRON must not stay within the shaded area during loa-Ladevorganges, d.h. fur die Duaer der Gammatrom Ver-ding,i.e. for as long as the G AMM ATRON shutter is schluBof fnung und insbesondere beim Verschieben des opened and especially when shifting the source drawer, Quellentragers nicht innerhalb des schraf fier ten Bereiches as increased exposure to radiation would occur.
aufhalten, da hier erhohte Dosisleistung auftritt.
aufhalten, da hier erhohte Dosisleistung auftritt.
                                    ".^..^.^..^....v.<<.                           *!; $$* .N ! **!- !!!* */ ! ! *!*/ * ***** **$$**$$$$* **$
".^..^.^..^....v.<<.
:$$.$$$$$:.p*$$$::: *::erhohte Strahfung                                                                                     :$$gg:$$$p*
*!; $$*.N ! **!-
                                        * *:$.v:*$$$$$:4.v$$,::
!!!* */ ! ! *!*/ * ***** **$$**$$$$* **$
                                                  ...,.   ,.w..v         . ...                *$.lncreased
:$$.$$$$$:.p*$$$::: *::erhohte Strahfung
                                                                              ..w . .,w. .w. . .v.w.w.w.w . .w.,                       radiation                  dose      l$$.$:::.$.:9 v
:$$gg:$$$p*
: w. .... w.
* *:$.v:*$$$$$:4.v$$,:: *$.lncreased radiation dose l$$.$:::.$.:9
: e. ..w. v.                                                                                       .     ,.
..,.,.w..v...w..,w.
w.w.v.v.wAvoid
.w...v.w.w.w.w..w., v w.. w.
                                                        . . .we                .                          .. this area kein Personenaufenthalt w.-
w.w.v.v.w..
: e. w v.
w e.
w e.
kein Personenaufenthalt w.-
* :.0..*.**.*:..* :v. v.-....O.wG,* O,
...we y
Avoid this area
: w. e.v..
v..v,.....
.w......w...e
: v...v, w.w.w w..
w
.v. -
. U.;,;.;.;9;;, $$:: *:
9:.9:9:.:
r v..w w
.v.. 4,,... w.v. v
'..w.
v... -H+,9.-,c.,
...v
. Ay.-
:.:e.:
/m w.-?
Ladevorn htung c
g' v.v.
*l''.
* l*
Loading rod 4.,
d[(
l Behalter U
Container Kopf e.
.v.
Head
.v.
.v.
.w.
w.
.v.
: v. w.
.w
: w.,
.-..m....
w
..v..
v.
.,v.w.v.w..
: 1. Person
.v.,,;+ ' w w
.- *,w.w..v.v.v.v.:..
v L
ll.
.v.v.w 1st person
.w.v. -
: v...
.v.v.w.v.
=-_
..v.
+. ;.ww...w.<
Verschlua-Getriebe
.v
.w.v.v
.v.:.y.,
e n...
"*..T.w*...../.
Shutter gears
,, w.v.w.m.u.w.v..v...v.w. w.v.v.v.v,vv :.'
o..
w
.v w
.y -
....v.w..w.v.v v vv.v e v v.-
.v..w v
c.
y w...w.-
v.
-___vw-w.v.w v.w..v.
y
y
                                                          * :.0..*.**.*:.                                              .* :v. v.-. . . .O.wG,* O,
.v....
: w. e.v.
w.
v..v,.      .... .
: 9*$
                                                                        .w. .v..w..v,                . . w.w.w    .w ...e                  w. . .v. -
. v.v$$.:v:Y. $.:erhohte Strahiung 9*$$:.:$$:-
                                                                        . U.;,;.;.;9;;, $$:: *: .. 9:.9:9:.: '
..,...y.:.v.:.:.:.:.y. I n..c.re.a.s.e.d..r.ad t.i.o.n. d.o.s.e....v.w.v v
r v..w .w. . . .v.. 4, ,., . ,.....w.v. v v... -H+,9.-,c., .
ia 4,.v.:.. +; :.,
                                                                                                                          '..w. . .. .v
...v,w.....,.,.,......,
  /m                                                                                          -
,..v.....
:.:e.:      ,
........... v v..v. w v...v...
                                                                                                                      . Ay g'
....v.v..v.v,.,.....,...,w.w.,
w.-?
...v. v v. v..
v.v.          .      .    <
..f..
                                                                                                                                    .                                                                        Ladevornchtung l*                                                                                   Loading rod
: 2. Person 2nd person Fig.14 l
                                                                                                        *l'' . *    .
4.,                                                                                              -
l              Behalter                    '
U Kopf d[(
                                                                                                                            .                              Container                                        -
: e.                      .v.
                                                                                                                            .v.
Head                                              .v.    .      .
                                                                                                .w.        .
: w.                                                                    .
                                                                                                .v.
: v. w.        ...,
                                                                                                .w..      ,-.-.,. ....,  . . , .. . w. ,...
w                            .      ..v .. v.
                                                                                  .-..m....
                                                                                  .v.,,;+
                                                                                      .... ' w .-
w        .-
                                                                                                                  *,w  ,v.w.v.w.
v
                                                                                                                                                    ..                                                    1. Person
                                                                                                                    .w. .v.v.v.v.:. .
                                                                                      ., , ::: . .v.v.w                                                                                                    1st person L        ll .                                                              -
Verschlua-Getriebe                    -
                                                                          .v .v .v.w.v.
                                                                                    .w.v.v ;.ww . . .w .< .w.v. -
                                                                                      . .v. +. . . . .
v..v.:.y.,
                                                              =-_              "                                                              **
Shutter gears                  e n...                    o..    "*..T.w*...../.
w                .v w            .....
                                                                                                                                                          .y -
                                                                                  . . . .v.                                .w.v.w  .v.w.                            w.v.v.v.v,vv                                  :.'
                                                                                        .v . .w                                                                              c.
                                                        , w.v.w.m.u.w.v y.                            w. . .w.-
                                      .            , -___vw-
                                                      .: v.v$$.:v:Y.
9*$
                                                                                                      .v .w.            .
                                                                                                                                                  .w.v.v
                                                                                                                                                .v....
v    y v.w. .v.
v.
9*$$:.:$$:-
w.v vv.v e v v.-
v$.:erhohte Strahiung
                                                ,.:.:                                                                              ia
                                          ., .,     . . ..y.:.v.:.:.:.:.y.                      . I n..c.re.a.s.e.d. .r.ad t.i.o.n. d.o.s.e.
4,.v.:. . +; :.,
                                                                                                                                                                                                            . . .v.w.v
: 2. Person
                                      ...v. v v. v..
                                                              ..... .... ... . v v..v
                                                                                            ..f . .
                                                                                                            ...v,w.....,.,.,......,
                                                                                                                  . w.. ,v...v...   . ....v.v..v.v,.,.....,...,w.w.,
                                                                                                                                                                      ,..v.....
2nd person                                                                                                                                                                                             Fig.14 l
l
l
    ')
')
J T 2.050.033.03.01 1
J T 2.050.033.03.01 1
I
I


o t
o t
                  ~     --          -
~
lf*     &~~.~~.~,~~                   'Af            V -      -' ~
lf*
                                                      ,        =                                       .
&~~.~~.~,~~
                                                                                                                      /'"
'A V
_            _[                                               ,
~
cc.1cm     -
f
                                                      -                20 e                                                                                           @
=
Fig.15 l1st person l l Person 1 l Blindschieber (11) und Schutzriegel (20) mit Hilf e der             Using the loading rod (10), slowly slide the dummy Ladestange (10) langsam in den Kopf schieben, bis der             drawer (11) and the protective tungsten rod (20) into Schutzriegel an der VerschluStrommel (26) anstoSt, sa-             the head until the tungsten rod comes into centact with schlieBend den Schutzriegel etwa 1 cm zuruckziehen                 the shutter drum (26), then pull the tungsten rod back (Fig.15).                                                         approximately 1 cm (fig.15).
/'"
_[
cc.1cm 20 e
Fig.15 l Person 1 l l1st person l Blindschieber (11) und Schutzriegel (20) mit Hilf e der Using the loading rod (10), slowly slide the dummy Ladestange (10) langsam in den Kopf schieben, bis der drawer (11) and the protective tungsten rod (20) into Schutzriegel an der VerschluStrommel (26) anstoSt, sa-the head until the tungsten rod comes into centact with schlieBend den Schutzriegel etwa 1 cm zuruckziehen the shutter drum (26), then pull the tungsten rod back (Fig.15).
approximately 1 cm (fig.15).
a NI g
a NI g
f                                                                             '
f
c'3R d        .                              A
'3R A
                            .-          't.'   f r,
d c 't.'
                                                                                                        -+'M ll,   \.;
f r, ll,
                                ;                          l    ' "      yI 3g;                   n) ,)3 Q{                         j           4                   _ __            _
\\.;
i
3g; n),)3 Q{
          .                                                                              20 h
l yI
x            efe                                     e                                                               e Fig.16                                                                                                                   Fig.17 l Person 2 l                                                         l2nd peren l Grun rote Scheibe zur Anzeige der Verschlu8stellung ab-               Unscrew the green / red disk indicating shutter position.
-+'M j
schrauben.                                                           Uncouple the shutter drum from the shutter gears using Die VerschluBtrommel ist mittels des Kopplungshebels                 lever (27).
4 i
(27) vom VerschluSgetriebe zu entkoppeln.                           For this, pull out the lever approximately 1 cm and push Dazu ist der Kopplungshebel ca.1 cm nach au8en zu                   towards the treatment head, thus uncoupling the shutter ziehen und in Richtung Strahlerkopf zu schwenken, da-               drum from the gears.
h 20 efe e
durch ist die VerschluBtrommel vom Verschlu8getriebe                 Using the lever, the shutter drum is to be turned through abgekoppelt,                                                         appro x.180 to the " shutter open" position and held Die Verschlu8trommel ist mittels Kopplungshebel um                   there. (See fig.16).
e x
Fig.16 Fig.17 l Person 2 l l2nd peren l Grun rote Scheibe zur Anzeige der Verschlu8stellung ab-Unscrew the green / red disk indicating shutter position.
schrauben.
Uncouple the shutter drum from the shutter gears using Die VerschluBtrommel ist mittels des Kopplungshebels lever (27).
(27) vom VerschluSgetriebe zu entkoppeln.
For this, pull out the lever approximately 1 cm and push Dazu ist der Kopplungshebel ca.1 cm nach au8en zu towards the treatment head, thus uncoupling the shutter ziehen und in Richtung Strahlerkopf zu schwenken, da-drum from the gears.
durch ist die VerschluBtrommel vom Verschlu8getriebe Using the lever, the shutter drum is to be turned through abgekoppelt, appro x.180 to the " shutter open" position and held Die Verschlu8trommel ist mittels Kopplungshebel um there. (See fig.16).
1800 in Stellung "Verschlu8 auf" zu drehen und in dieser Stellung zu halten (siehe Fig.16).
1800 in Stellung "Verschlu8 auf" zu drehen und in dieser Stellung zu halten (siehe Fig.16).
O T 2.050 033 03 01                                           .
O T 2.050 033 03 01.


a l Person 1 l                                                       l1st person l
a l Person 1 l l1st person l
    \   Blindschieber (11) und Schutzriegel (20) einschieben, bis           Slide in the dummy insert (11) and the tungsten rod (20) j     der Schutzriegel am Quellentrager anst68t.                         until the tungsten rod comes into contact with the source Nun durch Rechtsdrehen der Ladestange (10) den Schutz.             container. Now, by turning the loading rod (10) to the riegel am Que!!entriger ankoppeln (BajonettverschluS).             right, couple the tungsten rod to the source drawer Die Verbindung (Schutzriegel/Quellentriger) ist herge.             (bayonet lock).
\\
stellt wenn:                                                       The connection between tungsten rod and source con.
Blindschieber (11) und Schutzriegel (20) einschieben, bis Slide in the dummy insert (11) and the tungsten rod (20) j der Schutzriegel am Quellentrager anst68t.
until the tungsten rod comes into contact with the source Nun durch Rechtsdrehen der Ladestange (10) den Schutz.
container. Now, by turning the loading rod (10) to the riegel am Que!!entriger ankoppeln (BajonettverschluS).
right, couple the tungsten rod to the source drawer Die Verbindung (Schutzriegel/Quellentriger) ist herge.
(bayonet lock).
stellt wenn:
The connection between tungsten rod and source con.
tainer has been established when:
tainer has been established when:
: 1. Die Ladestange sich nicht mehr nach rechts verdrehen             1. The loading rod cannot be turned any further to the liBt.                                                             right
: 1. Die Ladestange sich nicht mehr nach rechts verdrehen
: 2. Die Ladestange sich nicht mehr herausziehen li8t.               2. The loading rod cannot be pulled outwards.
: 1. The loading rod cannot be turned any further to the liBt.
l Person 2 l                                                       l2nd person l Schrauben der Arretierstange (29/ Fig.16) losen ur9 die             Loosen the screws of the locking rod (29/ fig.16) and Arretierstange etwa 5 cm herausziehen (Fig.16),                   pull the rod out approximately 5 cm (fig.16).
right
: 2. Die Ladestange sich nicht mehr herausziehen li8t.
: 2. The loading rod cannot be pulled outwards.
l Person 2 l l2nd person l Schrauben der Arretierstange (29/ Fig.16) losen ur9 die Loosen the screws of the locking rod (29/ fig.16) and Arretierstange etwa 5 cm herausziehen (Fig.16),
pull the rod out approximately 5 cm (fig.16).
I
I
                                                ~
~
                                                                                    ~           -
~
                            /
/
(-             ,
9
I       41                           -
- (-
9 I
I 41 I
O E                                           #
O E
                        @                                      @                @                      88                 @
88 Fig.18 l Person 1 l l1st person l Ladestange (10) mit Blindschieber, Schutzriegel und Quickly pull out the loading rod (10) with the dummy Quellentrager zugig so weit herausziehen, bis die Kette insert, tungsten rod and source holder until the chain (10 b) leicht gespannt ist. Die Quelle befindet sich nun (10 b) is tight. The source is now located in the con.
Fig.18 l Person 1 l                                                     l1st person l Ladestange (10) mit Blindschieber, Schutzriegel und             Quickly pull out the loading rod (10) with the dummy Quellentrager zugig so weit herausziehen, bis die Kette         insert, tungsten rod and source holder until the chain (10 b) leicht gespannt ist. Die Quelle befindet sich nun         (10 b) is tight. The source is now located in the con.
im innenbehalter. Sperrschraube (25 a) am Schacht I tainer. Replace the locking screw (25 a) into its channel.
im innenbehalter. Sperrschraube (25 a) am Schacht I             tainer. Replace the locking screw (25 a) into its channel.
Wieder eindrehen.
Wieder eindrehen.
l Person 2 l                                                   l2nd person l Die VerschluBtrommel (26) mit Hilfe des Kopplungs.               Turn the shutter drum (26) through 1800 using the hebels (27) um 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS zu" drehen           coupling lever (27) into " shutter closed" position and und an das VerschluBgetrieDe wieder ankoppeln.                   couple back onto the shutter gear system.
l Person 2 l l2nd person l Die VerschluBtrommel (26) mit Hilfe des Kopplungs.
Cosismessung: Sicherheitsprufung ob sich die Quelle             Dose-rate measurement: Make a safety check to see that       ,
Turn the shutter drum (26) through 1800 using the hebels (27) um 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS zu" drehen coupling lever (27) into " shutter closed" position and und an das VerschluBgetrieDe wieder ankoppeln.
auch im Innenbehalter befindet.                                 the source is actually located in the container.             ,
couple back onto the shutter gear system.
O l
Cosismessung: Sicherheitsprufung ob sich die Quelle Dose-rate measurement: Make a safety check to see that auch im Innenbehalter befindet.
T 2.050.033.03.01
the source is actually located in the container.
O l T 2.050.033.03.01


c l1st person and 2nd person l l Person 1 und Person 2 lonanbehalter durch Losen der vier Befestigungsschrau.                               Separate the container from the head by removing the ben vom Strahlerkopf trennen.                                                       four attaching screws, innenbehalter wegfahren und auf dem Boden absetzen.
c l Person 1 und Person 2 l1st person and 2nd person l lonanbehalter durch Losen der vier Befestigungsschrau.
Separate the container from the head by removing the ben vom Strahlerkopf trennen.
four attaching screws, innenbehalter wegfahren und auf dem Boden absetzen.
Move the container away and place on the floor.
Move the container away and place on the floor.
Achtung:                                                                            Caution:
Caution:
Der Innenbehalter muG waagrech t stehen, er darf jetzt The container must be horizontal;it must not be moved from this position as the source drawer has not been nicht bewegt werden, da der Quellentrager bis zum Wiederanschrauben der behalterseitigen Kopplungs.                                   secured against sliding out until the container attach-ment plate has been again screwed on!
Achtung:
scheibe gegen Herausrutschen nicht gesichert ist.
The container must be horizontal;it must not be moved Der Innenbehalter muG waagrech t stehen, er darf jetzt from this position as the source drawer has not been nicht bewegt werden, da der Quellentrager bis zum Wiederanschrauben der behalterseitigen Kopplungs.
l1st person l l Person 1 l Loosen the two Affen screws on the clamping piece (10 a)
secured against sliding out until the container attach-scheibe gegen Herausrutschen nicht gesichert ist.
Die zwei innensechskantschrauben am Klemmstuck (10 a) losen. Ladestange (10) gegen den Uhrzeigersinn ver.                                   Unscrew the loading rod (10) in anti <lockwise direction drehen, bis der Blindschieber vom Schutzriegel getrennt                             until the dummy drawer is separated from the tungsten ist.                                                                                rod.
ment plate has been again screwed on!
Kette (10 bl an der Beladescheibe aushangen.                                         Disconnect chain (10 b) from the loading disk.
l Person 1 l l1st person l Die zwei innensechskantschrauben am Klemmstuck (10 a)
Ladestange aus dem Blindschiebar herausziehen und                                   Pull out the loading rod f rom the dummy drawer and Blindschieber abnehmen.                                                               remove the latter.
Loosen the two Affen screws on the clamping piece (10 a) losen. Ladestange (10) gegen den Uhrzeigersinn ver.
Im Innenbehalter verbleibt der Schutzriegel mit dem                                 The tungsten rod remains in the container with the Quellentrager.                                                                       source.
Unscrew the loading rod (10) in anti <lockwise direction drehen, bis der Blindschieber vom Schutzriegel getrennt until the dummy drawer is separated from the tungsten rod.
Sperrschraube (25 b) wieder einschrauben.                                             Screw the locking screw (25 b) back in the loading disk.
ist.
Behalterseitige Kopplungs und Beladescheibe vom Innen.                               Unscrew the container attachment plate and loading disk behalter abschrauben.                                                                 from the conta;ner.
Kette (10 bl an der Beladescheibe aushangen.
: 5.       Beladung                                                                   5.         Loading
Disconnect chain (10 b) from the loading disk.
                                  ' /                   /
Ladestange aus dem Blindschiebar herausziehen und Pull out the loading rod f rom the dummy drawer and Blindschieber abnehmen.
i , ,/
remove the latter.
                                                  /
Im Innenbehalter verbleibt der Schutzriegel mit dem The tungsten rod remains in the container with the Quellentrager.
                      , , /
source.
                                                    / / /
Sperrschraube (25 b) wieder einschrauben.
                                                                    '/          3
Screw the locking screw (25 b) back in the loading disk.
                                        >n                    .:r_ %
Behalterseitige Kopplungs und Beladescheibe vom Innen.
              /  g)t12  \wl. .               (_            -
Unscrew the container attachment plate and loading disk behalter abschrauben.
(12 )
from the conta;ner.
                                                                    .w            I               O                               -  O 25a                           25b O
5.
                            .              j          ,          'ht
Beladung 5.
_              H
Loading
                '/ /,/ / -7' ,
' /
                    /
/
                                                        <//  -
i,,/
                                                                        ,-    /                                                       ,_
/
                                    '              ''                      /
'/
                        ,/ /     ,,,,    /                       /     '
3
                          /
,, /
                                        /,                                                       -
/ / /
                              / ,f/
.:r_ %
                                                  /                                                                                       14 9'                                                                                                                                   Fig. 20 1                                                                                                                                                       O T 2.050.033.03.01 e
g) \\wl
Hohlfallstacke (12) vom Schacht der alten Quelle                 Remove the hollow feed blocks (12) from the channel (Schacht 1) herausnehmen.
( _
.w t12..
>n (12 )
I O
O
/
25a 25b j
'ht H
O
'/ /,/ / -7',
<//
/
/
/
,/ /
/
/
/
/,
/,f/
14
/
9' Fig. 20 1
O T 2.050.033.03.01 e
Hohlfallstacke (12) vom Schacht der alten Quelle Remove the hollow feed blocks (12) from the channel (Schacht 1) herausnehmen.
containing the old source.
containing the old source.
O   FUllstacke (30) von der Adapterhulse der neuen Quelle             Unscrew the spacers (30) from the adapter sleeve of the V   (Schacht II) abschrauben und an die Adapterhalse der .           new source and screw onto the adapter sleeve of the old source.
O FUllstacke (30) von der Adapterhulse der neuen Quelle Unscrew the spacers (30) from the adapter sleeve of the V
alten Quelle (Schacht 1) anschrauben.
(Schacht II) abschrauben und an die Adapterhalse der.
Hohlfallstacke (12) in Schacht il einschieben (darauf             Check which end of the new source is marked with a achten,da6 die nicht angeschragte Seite nach unten zeigt)       numl;ar (e.g. R 18).
new source and screw onto the adapter sleeve of the old alten Quelle (Schacht 1) anschrauben.
Fig.19.                                                          Side the hollow feed blocks (12) into the channel with Behalterseitige Kopplungsscheibe (13) wieder an der             the new source (paying attention that the nonchamfered Seite des innenbeh&lters anschrauben, an der der neue           side is facing downwards (Fig.19).
source.
Screw the container-attachment plate (13) back onto the Quellenriegel mit einer Nummer (z.B. R 18) gekenn.
Hohlfallstacke (12) in Schacht il einschieben (darauf Check which end of the new source is marked with a achten,da6 die nicht angeschragte Seite nach unten zeigt) numl;ar (e.g. R 18).
zeichnet ist,                                                    side of the container where the new source rod is marked with a number (e.g. R 18).
Side the hollow feed blocks (12) into the channel with Fig.19.
Die Beladescheibe (14) auf der anderen Behalterseite an-         Screw on the loading disk (14) onto the opposite side of schrauben (Fig. 20).                                             the container (fig. 20).
Behalterseitige Kopplungsscheibe (13) wieder an der the new source (paying attention that the nonchamfered Seite des innenbeh&lters anschrauben, an der der neue side is facing downwards (Fig.19).
Ladestange (10) durch den Blindschieber (11) schieben.           Slide the loading rod (10) through the dammy drawer (11).
Quellenriegel mit einer Nummer (z.B. R 18) gekenn.
Den Blindschieber mit Ladestange am Schutzriegel der             Couple the dumr7y drawer with the loading rod to the neuen Quelle (Schacht II) wie folgt ankoppeln:                   tungsten rod of the new source as follows:
Screw the container-attachment plate (13) back onto the side of the container where the new source rod is marked zeichnet ist, with a number (e.g. R 18).
Sperrschraube (25 b) von Schacht il herausdrehen.               Screw out the locking screw (25 b) from the cannel to Blindschieber mit ladestange in den Schacht einfuhren,           be used.
Die Beladescheibe (14) auf der anderen Behalterseite an-Screw on the loading disk (14) onto the opposite side of schrauben (Fig. 20).
dabei muS der Zapfen an der Stirnseite des Blindschiebers       Slide the dummy drawer with the loading rod into the in die Bohrung an der Stirnseite des Schutzriegels ein-         channel, taking care that the pins on the front of the greifen,                                                         dummy drawer fit into the holes on the rear of the tungsten rode.
the container (fig. 20).
Ladestange (10) im Uhrzeigersinn verdrehen. Dabei               Turn the loading rod (10) in a clockwise direction, pay-mUssen die Zapfen des Klemmstockes (10 c) in die Boh*             ing attention that the pins of the clamping piece (10 c) rungen des Blindschiebers eingreifen.                             lock into the holes of the dummy drawer.
Ladestange (10) durch den Blindschieber (11) schieben.
Ist die Ladestange fest eingeschraubt, so sind die beiden       Once the loading rod is firmly screwed in, screw tight innensechskantschrauben am Klemmstuck (10 al festzu-           the two Allen screws on the clamping ece (10 al schrauben (Fig. 21).                                             (fig. 21),
Slide the loading rod (10) through the dammy drawer (11).
p   Kontrolle der richtigen Kopplung: Ladestange im Uhr-reigersinn drehen, dabei muS sich der Quellenriegel Check for correct coupling: Turn the loading rod in a clockwise direction and see that the source rod (visible (sichtbar auf der Gegenseite) mitdrehen.                       on the opposite side) also turns.
Den Blindschieber mit Ladestange am Schutzriegel der Couple the dumr7y drawer with the loading rod to the neuen Quelle (Schacht II) wie folgt ankoppeln:
Sicherheitskette (10 b) an der Beladescheibe einhangen.         Hook the safety chain (10 b) onto the loading disk, innenbehalter hochziehen, so dab der zugeordnete                 Raise the inner transport container so that the appropriate Schacht (Schacht ll) mit dem GAMMATRON-Kopf-                   channel is at the same level as the G AMM ATRON head schacht auf gfeiche Hohe kommt.                                 channel.
tungsten rod of the new source as follows:
Innenbehalter gegen den Kopf fahren. Uber die zuge-             Move the container to contact the head. Centering takes ordneten Zentrieringe erfolgt automatistli die Zentrie-         place automatically when the appropriate centering rings rung.                                                           engage.
Sperrschraube (25 b) von Schacht il herausdrehen.
Kopfseitige und behalterseitige Kopplungsscheibe mit             Screw the head and container-attachment plates together 4 Schrauben M 10 x 25 verschrauben.                             with 4 screws M 10 x 25.
Screw out the locking screw (25 b) from the cannel to Blindschieber mit ladestange in den Schacht einfuhren, be used.
O T 2.050.033.03.01
dabei muS der Zapfen an der Stirnseite des Blindschiebers Slide the dummy drawer with the loading rod into the in die Bohrung an der Stirnseite des Schutzriegels ein-channel, taking care that the pins on the front of the
: greifen, dummy drawer fit into the holes on the rear of the tungsten rode.
Ladestange (10) im Uhrzeigersinn verdrehen. Dabei Turn the loading rod (10) in a clockwise direction, pay-mUssen die Zapfen des Klemmstockes (10 c) in die Boh*
ing attention that the pins of the clamping piece (10 c) rungen des Blindschiebers eingreifen.
lock into the holes of the dummy drawer.
Ist die Ladestange fest eingeschraubt, so sind die beiden Once the loading rod is firmly screwed in, screw tight innensechskantschrauben am Klemmstuck (10 al festzu-the two Allen screws on the clamping ece (10 al schrauben (Fig. 21).
(fig. 21),
p Kontrolle der richtigen Kopplung: Ladestange im Uhr-Check for correct coupling: Turn the loading rod in a reigersinn drehen, dabei muS sich der Quellenriegel clockwise direction and see that the source rod (visible (sichtbar auf der Gegenseite) mitdrehen.
on the opposite side) also turns.
Sicherheitskette (10 b) an der Beladescheibe einhangen.
Hook the safety chain (10 b) onto the loading disk, innenbehalter hochziehen, so dab der zugeordnete Raise the inner transport container so that the appropriate Schacht (Schacht ll) mit dem GAMMATRON-Kopf-channel is at the same level as the G AMM ATRON head schacht auf gfeiche Hohe kommt.
channel.
Innenbehalter gegen den Kopf fahren. Uber die zuge-Move the container to contact the head. Centering takes ordneten Zentrieringe erfolgt automatistli die Zentrie-place automatically when the appropriate centering rings rung.
engage.
Kopfseitige und behalterseitige Kopplungsscheibe mit Screw the head and container-attachment plates together 4 Schrauben M 10 x 25 verschrauben.
with 4 screws M 10 x 25.
O
. T 2.050.033.03.01


1                                                   -
1 e
e 25a 0                                 ,
I 0
0
0 25a lf/~/A///TD/_)
                                                                          %@@                                          I lf/~/A///TD/_)
[
O            e    -E                          [       [--                           H
[--
                                    '' D j 1/-(m
H O
                                                                  ~
e
N
-E N
                    )~                          e
~
                                                            /
'' D j 1/-(m
                                                            @~                                     8@
)~
Fig. 21 Sperrschraube (25 a) vom Schacht !i herausdrehen.                       Remove the locking screw (25 a) from tne connei ;n use.
/
Wahrend des Beladevorganges nehmen die Personen die                     During loading, the personnel take up the positions shown in Fig.14 gezeigte Stellung ein.                                       in fig.14 I               %
e
      ''ffyS&{p % ++ )               -
@~
            "    ~
8@
                                            \;                                                                   .
Fig. 21 Sperrschraube (25 a) vom Schacht !i herausdrehen.
djip;         '%
Remove the locking screw (25 a) from tne connei ;n use.
g,          ,
Wahrend des Beladevorganges nehmen die Personen die During loading, the personnel take up the positions shown in Fig.14 gezeigte Stellung ein.
v              n
in fig.14 I
                                                                                  -l         (               c a       s/           '
' fyS& % ++ )
                                .b * !g 39!                 '.19                     - -i            ,- - 1                   ,        -12 :               -
'f
(x     ' "''
{p
Ad7                    ;            [                                                   $
\\;
~
djip; n
- -l (
c v
g, a
s/
.b * !g
- -i
. 39!
'.19
,- - 1
-12 :
(x Ad7
[
1.,
1.,
                                                                      ~
~
        ~
@@/
Fig. 22
ee e
                    @@/                                   ee                                   e                           e Fig. 23 l Person 2 l                                                           l 2nd person l Schrat. ben der Arretierstange (29) losen und Arretier.               Loosen the screws of the locking rod (29) and pull the stange etwa 5 cm herausziehen,                                       rod out approximate;y 5 cm Die VerschluBtrommel ist mittels des Kopplungshebels                 Uncouple the shutter drum from the shutter gear system (27) vom VerschluBgetriebe zu entkoppeln.                             using lever (27).
e
~
Fig. 22 Fig. 23 l Person 2 l l 2nd person l Schrat. ben der Arretierstange (29) losen und Arretier.
Loosen the screws of the locking rod (29) and pull the stange etwa 5 cm herausziehen, rod out approximate;y 5 cm Die VerschluBtrommel ist mittels des Kopplungshebels Uncouple the shutter drum from the shutter gear system (27) vom VerschluBgetriebe zu entkoppeln.
using lever (27).
For this, pull lever approximately 1 cm outwards and to-Dazu ist der Kopplungshebel ca. I cm nach auBen zu wards the head, thus uncoupling the shutter drum from ziehen und in Richtung St:ahlerkopf zu schwenken, da.
For this, pull lever approximately 1 cm outwards and to-Dazu ist der Kopplungshebel ca. I cm nach auBen zu wards the head, thus uncoupling the shutter drum from ziehen und in Richtung St:ahlerkopf zu schwenken, da.
durch ist die Verschlu8trommel vom VerschluGgetriebe                   the shutter gear system.
the shutter gear system.
abgekoppelt.
durch ist die Verschlu8trommel vom VerschluGgetriebe abgekoppelt.
l T 2.050.033.03.01 e
l T 2.050.033.03.01 e
Die Verschlu8trommel ist mittels Kopplungshebel um               Using the coupling lever, turn the shutter drum through 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS auf" zu drehen und in                 1800to the " shutter open" position and hold in this f
Die Verschlu8trommel ist mittels Kopplungshebel um Using the coupling lever, turn the shutter drum through 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS auf" zu drehen und in 1800to the " shutter open" position and hold in this f
  \
dieser Stellung mit der Hand festzuhalten (siehe Fig. 22).
dieser Stellung mit der Hand festzuhalten (siehe Fig. 22).       position by hand (see fig. 22),
position by hand (see fig. 22),
Person 1                                                           1st person Blindschieber, Schutzriegel und Quellentrager mit Hilfe           Quickly push the dummy drawer, the tungsten rod and der Ladestange zGgig in den Kopf einschieben, bis der             the source drawer into the head using the loading rod, Quellentrsger am Ende des GAMMATRON-Kopfschach.                   until the source drawer comes into contact with the end tes anst6Et. AnschlieBend Ladestange nach rechts drehen,           of the GAMMATRON-head channel. Then turn the dabei muB:                                                         loading rod to the right making sure that:
\\
Person 2                                                           2nd person Arretierstange wieder einschieben, bis sie in die Bohrung         pushes the locking rod back in until it fits into the hole im Quellentrager einrastet und festschrauben,                     in the source drawer and can be screwed tight.
Person 1 1st person Blindschieber, Schutzriegel und Quellentrager mit Hilfe Quickly push the dummy drawer, the tungsten rod and der Ladestange zGgig in den Kopf einschieben, bis der the source drawer into the head using the loading rod, Quellentrsger am Ende des GAMMATRON-Kopfschach.
1           Person 1                                                           1st person
until the source drawer comes into contact with the end tes anst6Et. AnschlieBend Ladestange nach rechts drehen, of the GAMMATRON-head channel. Then turn the dabei muB:
;          Uberprufung der Arretierung des Quellentrigers:                   Checking the locking of the source drawer:
loading rod to the right making sure that:
Eine Bewegung des Quellentrigers darf weder durch Zug             Movement of the source must not be possible either by noch durch Drehung im Uhrzeigersinn mittels Ladestange             pulling or turning in the clockwise direction. Finally, turn m6glich sein. AnschlieBend ist die Ladestange gegen den           the loading rod in the anti <lockwise direction (approxi.
Person 2 2nd person Arretierstange wieder einschieben, bis sie in die Bohrung pushes the locking rod back in until it fits into the hole im Quellentrager einrastet und festschrauben, in the source drawer and can be screwed tight.
Uhrzeigersinn zu verdrehen (ca.1/2 Umdrehung), bis der             mately 1/2 turn), until the tungsten rod is separated Schutzriegel vom Quellentrsger gelost ist. (Bajonettver.           from the source holder (bayonet lock). Now pull out the schluB). Nun den Schutzriegel mit Blindschieber 1 - 2 cm           tungsten rod and the dummy drawer by 1 - 2 cm.
1 Person 1 1st person Uberprufung der Arretierung des Quellentrigers:
Checking the locking of the source drawer:
Eine Bewegung des Quellentrigers darf weder durch Zug Movement of the source must not be possible either by noch durch Drehung im Uhrzeigersinn mittels Ladestange pulling or turning in the clockwise direction. Finally, turn m6glich sein. AnschlieBend ist die Ladestange gegen den the loading rod in the anti <lockwise direction (approxi.
Uhrzeigersinn zu verdrehen (ca.1/2 Umdrehung), bis der mately 1/2 turn), until the tungsten rod is separated Schutzriegel vom Quellentrsger gelost ist. (Bajonettver.
from the source holder (bayonet lock). Now pull out the schluB). Nun den Schutzriegel mit Blindschieber 1 - 2 cm tungsten rod and the dummy drawer by 1 - 2 cm.
herausziehen.
herausziehen.
Person 2                                                           2nd person Die VerschluStrommel ist mit Hilfe des Kopplungshebels             The shutter drum is then to be turned through 1800 to (27) um 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS zu" zu drehen und             the " shutter closed" position using the lever (27) ar'd an das Verschlu3getriebe anzukoppeln.                             again coupled to the shutter gear system.
Person 2 2nd person Die VerschluStrommel ist mit Hilfe des Kopplungshebels The shutter drum is then to be turned through 1800 to (27) um 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS zu" zu drehen und the " shutter closed" position using the lever (27) ar'd an das Verschlu3getriebe anzukoppeln.
l Person 1 l                                                     l 1st person l Schutzriegel mit Blindschieber m den Transportinnen-               Fully withdraw the tungsten rod and drawer.
again coupled to the shutter gear system.
behalter zieheni Sperrsenraube (25 a) wieder einschrauben.                         Screw the locking screw (25 a) back in.
l Person 1 l l 1st person l Schutzriegel mit Blindschieber m den Transportinnen-Fully withdraw the tungsten rod and drawer.
Innenbehalter durch Losen der sier Befestigungs-                   Separate the irmer transport container from the ! ead Ly schrauben vom Strahlericopf trennen.                               f tmovity the four attaching screws.
behalter zieheni Sperrsenraube (25 a) wieder einschrauben.
Innenbeha'tet wegf ahren und auf dem Boden abstellen.             Move container away and lower to the floor.
Screw the locking screw (25 a) back in.
Kopplungs. und Beladescheibe abnel men.                           Remove the attachment plate and Ic.ading disk.
Innenbehalter durch Losen der sier Befestigungs-Separate the irmer transport container from the ! ead Ly schrauben vom Strahlericopf trennen.
Das Hohlfulhtucir (12/ Fig.19) aus dem Schacht ll                 Take the hollow feed block (12/ fig.19) from the channel.
f tmovity the four attaching screws.
nehmen.                                                           Slide the square dummy drawer (24) from this side into Viereckigen Bhndschieber (24) von dieser Seite in den             the channel thus pushing the round dummy drawer with Schacht il schieben und dabei den runden Blindschieber           the tungsten rod, adapter sleeve and second hollow block from the channel, mit Schutzriegel, Adapterhulse und zweitem Hohlfull.
Innenbeha'tet wegf ahren und auf dem Boden abstellen.
stuct aus dem Schacht schieben.
Move container away and lower to the floor.
T 2.050.033.03.01
Kopplungs. und Beladescheibe abnel men.
Remove the attachment plate and Ic.ading disk.
Das Hohlfulhtucir (12/ Fig.19) aus dem Schacht ll Take the hollow feed block (12/ fig.19) from the channel.
nehmen.
Slide the square dummy drawer (24) from this side into Viereckigen Bhndschieber (24) von dieser Seite in den the channel thus pushing the round dummy drawer with Schacht il schieben und dabei den runden Blindschieber the tungsten rod, adapter sleeve and second hollow block mit Schutzriegel, Adapterhulse und zweitem Hohlfull.
from the channel, stuct aus dem Schacht schieben.
; T 2.050.033.03.01


e This guarantees:
e This guarantees:
Dadurch ist gewahrleistet:
Dadurch ist gewahrleistet:
Sollte im Schacht I noch eine Quelle sein, kann keine       That if a source should still be located in the other erhohte Strahlung auftreten, da der Schacht ohne Quelle     channel, no increased radiation dose will occur as the immer mit einem Blindschieber gefullt ist,                   channel without a source is always filled with the dummy drawer. Finally, slide in the lead fiiler (23) and fit the Anschlie8end BleifUllstack (23) einschieben und die beiden Abdeckungen (22) am Innenbehalter anschrauben.       two covers (22) back onto the container.
That if a source should still be located in the other Sollte im Schacht I noch eine Quelle sein, kann keine erhohte Strahlung auftreten, da der Schacht ohne Quelle channel, no increased radiation dose will occur as the immer mit einem Blindschieber gefullt ist, channel without a source is always filled with the dummy Anschlie8end BleifUllstack (23) einschieben und die drawer. Finally, slide in the lead fiiler (23) and fit the beiden Abdeckungen (22) am Innenbehalter anschrauben.
: 6.         Final assembly
two covers (22) back onto the container.
: 6.       AbschlieBende Arbeiten Now turn the head so that the head attachment plate Nun den Strahlerkopf so verdrehen,daG die kopfseitige (coupling surface) is in horizontal position.
6.
Kopplungsscheibe (Kopplungsflache) waagerecht steht.
AbschlieBende Arbeiten 6.
Remove the counter-weights and their supports. Remove Gegengewicht und deren Befestigungsbolzen abmontie.
Final assembly Nun den Strahlerkopf so verdrehen,daG die kopfseitige Now turn the head so that the head attachment plate Kopplungsscheibe (Kopplungsflache) waagerecht steht.
head attachment plate after removing the screws. Take ren. Kopfseitige Kopplungsscheibe nach Losen der Schraube abnehmen. Bleiring (6) aus dem Strahlerkopf         the lead ring (6) from the head, herausnehmen.
(coupling surface) is in horizontal position.
Achtung:                                                    Caution:
Gegengewicht und deren Befestigungsbolzen abmontie.
Vom Herausnehmen des Blerringes bis zum Einsetzen der       Between removing the lead ring and replacing the colli-Blende tritt an der Blendenseite des Strahlerkopfes er.     mator, an increased radiation leakage occurs at the colli-mator side of the therapy head!
Remove the counter-weights and their supports. Remove ren. Kopfseitige Kopplungsscheibe nach Losen der head attachment plate after removing the screws. Take Schraube abnehmen. Bleiring (6) aus dem Strahlerkopf the lead ring (6) from the head, herausnehmen.
Caution:
Achtung:
Vom Herausnehmen des Blerringes bis zum Einsetzen der Between removing the lead ring and replacing the colli-Blende tritt an der Blendenseite des Strahlerkopfes er.
mator, an increased radiation leakage occurs at the colli-mator side of the therapy head!
hohte Leckdosisleistung auf.
hohte Leckdosisleistung auf.
Blende wieder in den Kopf einsetzen und Stecker K 1 Fit the collimator back into the head and connect up plug K 1 with its socket.
Fit the collimator back into the head and connect up Blende wieder in den Kopf einsetzen und Stecker K 1 miteinander verbinden.
miteinander verbinden.
plug K 1 with its socket.
Remove the ring headed screw (5) from the collimator Ringschrauben (5) von der Blende abschrauben.
Remove the ring headed screw (5) from the collimator Ringschrauben (5) von der Blende abschrauben.
Attach the collimator to the head using the four proper Blende mit Hilfe der vier Schrauben befestigen.
Attach the collimator to the head using the four proper Blende mit Hilfe der vier Schrauben befestigen.
Blendenabdeckung (17) aufsetzen und anschrauben.            screws.
screws.
Blendenabdeckung (17) aufsetzen und anschrauben.
Place on the collimator cover (17) and screw into position, Arretierstange (16) abschrauben und im Gerat aufbe.
Place on the collimator cover (17) and screw into position, Arretierstange (16) abschrauben und im Gerat aufbe.
Unscrew locking rod (16) and store within the unit.
Unscrew locking rod (16) and store within the unit.
Line 2,099: Line 2,877:
Check the treatment head for proper functioning of all Strahlerkopf auf sein Funktion uberpruf en!
Check the treatment head for proper functioning of all Strahlerkopf auf sein Funktion uberpruf en!
movements!
movements!
S T 2.050 OJ3 03 01                                     l l
S l
T 2.050 OJ3 03 01 l l
 
7.
Sicherheitshinweise 7.
Safety measures (3
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen beim Umgang mit Safety measures when working with uranium V
Uran-Teilen parts Caution:
Achtung:
The GAMMA TRON S contains URANIUM parts as shown Das GAMMA TRON S enthalt URAN.Teile gemaa fol.
in the following illustrations. When working with the gender Abbildung. Bei Arbeiten am Strahlerkopf und an treatment head and the collimator, the following safety der Blende sind die nachstehenden Sicherheitshinweise instructions are to be observed.
zu beacnten.
~
g-f n / m's h h W j W N'
~\\\\~w
((qW i
@(Qr"4-N N
h xN.
- H I' H _.
* Br BrNN s
\\
s 6
N /
M' W\\s\\NN
;\\Pb x
N i
g k-
'N \\
N
^'
\\
k k';-d N['k\\
'N
,h;
[\\
N, 1
kN
/.
NN N
i x
NW
^ k (
Ar l
\\
l
l
: 7. Sicherheitshinweise                                    7. Safety measures Sicherheitsvorkehrungen beim Umgang mit                      Safety measures when working with uranium (3
V      Uran-Teilen parts Caution:
Achtung:                                                      The GAMMA TRON S contains URANIUM parts as shown Das GAMMA TRON S enthalt URAN.Teile gemaa fol.
in the following illustrations. When working with the gender Abbildung. Bei Arbeiten am Strahlerkopf und an        treatment head and the collimator, the following safety der Blende sind die nachstehenden Sicherheitshinweise instructions are to be observed.
zu beacnten.
_%  ~
g-                    .
f n  -
H _.
H I'
        @(Qr"4- ' '-
                      /  ;
Nm's      hWjW g W\s\NN M'
N' BrNN s h  N
                                                              \
i
                                                                                  ~\\~w h xN.N
                                                                                    ;\Pb s
((qW x  6 i
* Br N /
k-
                                                                                    ^
                                                                                          'N \,h;                    N
                \      k  k';-d                N['k\    'N                                                            [\
kN        /.        NN                                            N NW i  x
                                                                                                                        ^ k (
N,    1 Ar l              \      l                                    .
{
{
I
) M(uh I
                          )4 M(uh                                                               s'            l.f(p             uJ l                     t-                                     '
l.f(p s'
j.
uJ 4
NPb PbD '       !
l t-j.
                                              'Pb Pb        W                     (i VY ON            f
NPb PbD '
                            , YL                 y             f O                           ' e]
Pb W
Pb            rl d@
(i f
l uw&   e t[\Pb d
, YL y
Pb e ''i"
f VY
                                                                                              ^
'Pb ON O
9,
' e] rl u w &
                                                                                                                  %#              Pb CL         !i                                           .J
e ''i d
                                                                                                                  ._.PbM rj       /sw                 % WM(
e
                                                                                                                        ; i ,i I, ii L-          - wJ                                    L        :L.__-
^
W-fj                   $W Trimmerausfuhrung bei ausziehbaren Halbschattentrim.         Trimmer construction with pull out penumbra tr: mmc mern (GAMMATRON S 80)                                         (GAMM ATRON S 80)
t[\\Pb Pb 9,
Trimmeraus'uhrung bei abnehmbaren Halb>chatten.             Trimmer construction with removeable penumbra trimmern (G AMM AT RON S 65)                                 trimmers (G AMM ATRON S 65)
Pb Pb l
Pb = Blei                                                       Pb = lead Br = Bronze                                                     Br = bronze St = Stahl                                                       St = steel W = Wolfram                                                     W = tungsten U = abgereichertes Uran                                         U = depleted uranium Die Dosisteistung an der Oberflache der Uran-Bauteile         The dose rate at the surface of uranium pa-ts is within
._.PbM CL
    -    liegt in der GroBenordnung von 50 mRlh. Besondere Ab.         the region of 50 mR/h. Special shielding measures are not necessary. Care must only be taken that direct con.
!i d@
schirmmaGnahmen sind nicht erforderlich. Es muR nur tact (touching) with uranium parts is reduced to an abso-dafur gesorgt werden, dab die direkte Kontaktberuhrung der Uranteile auf das erforderliche Mindestmaa be.           lute minimum.
.J WM( i L-
- wJ rj
/sw ii
, I, L
:L.__- % ; i W-fj
$W Trimmerausfuhrung bei ausziehbaren Halbschattentrim.
Trimmer construction with pull out penumbra tr: mmc mern (GAMMATRON S 80)
(GAMM ATRON S 80)
Trimmeraus'uhrung bei abnehmbaren Halb>chatten.
Trimmer construction with removeable penumbra trimmern (G AMM AT RON S 65) trimmers (G AMM ATRON S 65)
Pb = Blei Pb = lead Br = Bronze Br = bronze St = Stahl St = steel W = Wolfram W = tungsten U = abgereichertes Uran U = depleted uranium Die Dosisteistung an der Oberflache der Uran-Bauteile The dose rate at the surface of uranium pa-ts is within liegt in der GroBenordnung von 50 mRlh. Besondere Ab.
the region of 50 mR/h. Special shielding measures are schirmmaGnahmen sind nicht erforderlich. Es muR nur not necessary. Care must only be taken that direct con.
dafur gesorgt werden, dab die direkte Kontaktberuhrung tact (touching) with uranium parts is reduced to an abso-der Uranteile auf das erforderliche Mindestmaa be.
lute minimum.
schrankt wird.
schrankt wird.
  \
\\
G T 2.050.033.03.01
G T 2.050.033.03.01


Die zuginglichen Uranteile sind oberflichenbehandelt       Accessible uranium parts have a treated surface and must und dUrfen deshalb in keiner Weise bearbeitet werdent       therefore not be worked upon in any wayf Ferner ist bei den Ein- und Ausbauarbeiten der Blende       in addition, the greatest care must be taken when fitting mit grMter Sorgfalt vorzugeheni                             and removing the collimatori All uranium parts which have been damaged or cannot Schadhaft gewordene oder aus sonstigen GrUnden nicht       be used for any other reasons must be immediately re-mehr verwendbare Uranteile sind umgehend der Siemens       turned to Siemens AG, Medical Engineering Group, AG, Med Erlangen zuzufUhren.                               Erlangen.
Die zuginglichen Uranteile sind oberflichenbehandelt Accessible uranium parts have a treated surface and must und dUrfen deshalb in keiner Weise bearbeitet werdent therefore not be worked upon in any wayf Ferner ist bei den Ein-und Ausbauarbeiten der Blende in addition, the greatest care must be taken when fitting mit grMter Sorgfalt vorzugeheni and removing the collimatori All uranium parts which have been damaged or cannot Schadhaft gewordene oder aus sonstigen GrUnden nicht be used for any other reasons must be immediately re-mehr verwendbare Uranteile sind umgehend der Siemens turned to Siemens AG, Medical Engineering Group, AG, Med Erlangen zuzufUhren.
Personen, die mit schadhaft gewordenen Uranteilen in       Persons who have come into contact with damaged ura-BerUhrung gekommen sind, mUssen nach Beendigung der         nium parts must wash their hand thoroughly with water Arbeiten und insbesondere vor dem Einnehmen von             and soap af ter terminating work and especially before Speisen ihre Hinde grUndlich mit Wasser und Seife rei-     eating.
Erlangen.
Personen, die mit schadhaft gewordenen Uranteilen in Persons who have come into contact with damaged ura-BerUhrung gekommen sind, mUssen nach Beendigung der nium parts must wash their hand thoroughly with water Arbeiten und insbesondere vor dem Einnehmen von and soap af ter terminating work and especially before Speisen ihre Hinde grUndlich mit Wasser und Seife rei-eating.
nigen.
nigen.
O O
O O
l TVS/Meier l                                                                                                       VT 45/Hain l   T 2.050.033.03.01                                                                           RVT 5/Kriemann
TVS/Meier l
l VT 45/Hain l
T 2.050.033.03.01 RVT 5/Kriemann


a
a
: 8. '/orhalten bei au8ergew6hnlichen Situationen                   8. Action in unexpected situations Bei Einhaltung der vorliegenden Anweisung sind alle               By the observation of these directions, all the precau-p Vorkehrungen fur ein sicheres Laden oder Entladen                 tions have been met for safely loading the radiation des Strahlerkopfes getroffen. Ladungen nach dieser               head. Loadings in accordance with these directions Anweisung wurden bei der Siemens AG, UB Med                       have been carried out many times by the Medical Erlangan, ohne die geringsten Zwischenfille vielfach             Engineering Group of the Siemens AG in Erlangen, erprobt.                                                          without incident.
: 8. '/orhalten bei au8ergew6hnlichen Situationen
Sollte wider Erwarten eine strahlengef 8hrdende Sit-             If contrary to expectations a situation of radiation uation auftreten, so gelten folgende VerhaltensmaB-               danger should arise, then the following instructions regeln:                                                           apply:
: 8. Action in unexpected situations Bei Einhaltung der vorliegenden Anweisung sind alle By the observation of these directions, all the precau-p Vorkehrungen fur ein sicheres Laden oder Entladen tions have been met for safely loading the radiation des Strahlerkopfes getroffen. Ladungen nach dieser head. Loadings in accordance with these directions Anweisung wurden bei der Siemens AG, UB Med have been carried out many times by the Medical Erlangan, ohne die geringsten Zwischenfille vielfach Engineering Group of the Siemens AG in Erlangen, without incident.
Alle Beteiligten verlassen sofort den strahlengefhbr.           All the persons involved immediately leave the room deten Raum,                                                       endangered by radiation.
erprobt.
Der strahlengef&hrdete Raum und evtl. mitgefihrdete             The room endangered by radiation and possibly neigh-Nachbarriume sind gegen Betreten unbeteiligter Per-             bourning rooms also endangered by radiation must be sonen zu sict ern !                                             secured against the entry of persons not involved I Die Beteiligten sollten sich ein Bild von der einge-             Those involved should formulate a picture of the sit-tretenen Situation verschaffen.                                   uation which has arisen.
Sollte wider Erwarten eine strahlengef 8hrdende Sit-If contrary to expectations a situation of radiation uation auftreten, so gelten folgende VerhaltensmaB-danger should arise, then the following instructions regeln:
Folgende Dienststellen sind unverz0glich telefonisch             The following departments are to be informed imme-zu unterrichten:                                                 diately:
apply:
Abteilung TVS Tel.09131 App.84-2568                               Department TVS Tel.09131 App.84-2568 Abteilung VT Tel. 09131 App. 84-3108                             Department VT Tel. 09131 App. 84-3108 Sollte dies nicht moglich sein,in Abt. VT per Telex               If ithis is not possible, Department VT ist to be in-zu verstandigen.                                                 formed by telex.
Alle Beteiligten verlassen sofort den strahlengefhbr.
: 9. BestUckung und Versandvorschriften fur den                   9. Fitting out and dispatch directions for the Transportbehulter                                               transport container a) Notiz von TVS 1 vom 27. Okt.1976                             a) Notice from TVS 1 of the 27th Oct.1976 b) Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behalters S 1747               b) Direction for loading the container S 1747, Sheets Blatt 1-6.                                                         1-6 10.Umladeformular                                                 10. Reloading forms Die Formulare sind grundsatzlich auszuful:en, Kop en             The forms must be fully fnled out and copies sent to davon sind an TVS und VT 43 zu senden. Formulare                 TVS and VT 43. The forms are to be requested from sind bei VT 43 anzufordern. Musterformular ist anbei.             VT 43. A sample form is enclosed.
All the persons involved immediately leave the room deten Raum, endangered by radiation.
Der strahlengef&hrdete Raum und evtl. mitgefihrdete The room endangered by radiation and possibly neigh-Nachbarriume sind gegen Betreten unbeteiligter Per-bourning rooms also endangered by radiation must be sonen zu sict ern !
secured against the entry of persons not involved I Die Beteiligten sollten sich ein Bild von der einge-Those involved should formulate a picture of the sit-tretenen Situation verschaffen.
uation which has arisen.
Folgende Dienststellen sind unverz0glich telefonisch The following departments are to be informed imme-zu unterrichten:
diately:
Abteilung TVS Tel.09131 App.84-2568 Department TVS Tel.09131 App.84-2568 Abteilung VT Tel. 09131 App. 84-3108 Department VT Tel. 09131 App. 84-3108 Sollte dies nicht moglich sein,in Abt. VT per Telex If ithis is not possible, Department VT ist to be in-zu verstandigen.
formed by telex.
: 9. BestUckung und Versandvorschriften fur den
: 9. Fitting out and dispatch directions for the Transportbehulter transport container a) Notiz von TVS 1 vom 27. Okt.1976 a) Notice from TVS 1 of the 27th Oct.1976 b) Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behalters S 1747 b) Direction for loading the container S 1747, Sheets Blatt 1-6.
1-6 10.Umladeformular
: 10. Reloading forms Die Formulare sind grundsatzlich auszuful:en, Kop en The forms must be fully fnled out and copies sent to davon sind an TVS und VT 43 zu senden. Formulare TVS and VT 43. The forms are to be requested from sind bei VT 43 anzufordern. Musterformular ist anbei.
VT 43. A sample form is enclosed.
f m
f m
l T 2.050.033.03.03 l
l T 2.050.033.03.03 l
Line 2,171: Line 2,993:


c Erlangen,27th October 1976 TVS 1 el-rh 23 59 O
c Erlangen,27th October 1976 TVS 1 el-rh 23 59 O
Notiz zur Anweisung fur die Transportbeh5lter                 Note for the instructions for the transporting Be- und Entladung                                             container, loading and unloeding Anmerkung:                                                   Remark:
Notiz zur Anweisung fur die Transportbeh5lter Note for the instructions for the transporting Be-und Entladung container, loading and unloeding Anmerkung:
Die Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behn;ter S 1747           The instruction for loading the container S 1747 Sh.1 Bl.1 bis 6 ist nach den " Regulations for the Safe Trans-     to 6 is produced in acccrdance with the " Regulations port of Radioactive Materials 1967 Edition " der Inter-       for the safe Transport of Radioactive Materials 1967 national Atomic Energy Agency, safety series N6, Wien         Edition " of the International Atomic Energy Agency, 1967" erstellt.Diese Regeln sind 1973 Uberarbeitet und       safety series N 6, Vienna 1967. These regulations were mit neuem Absatz bzw. Randnummern herausgekommen,             revised in 1973 and were issued with new paragraph and margin numbers.
Remark:
Eine Anderung rier Anweisung und des Zulassungsscheines     A change in the instruction and the licence for the type fur den Typ8 Behalter nach den neuen IAEA Regeln             8 container in accordance with the new IAEA-regula-soll jedoch erst Mitte des Jahres 1977 nach Ausgabe der       tions should, however, take place first in the middle of Uberarbeiteten internationalen Eisenbahnverkehrsord-         the year 1977 following the issue of the revised interna-nung filD, die nach den neuen Regeln erstellt ist, er-       tional railway traffic rules RID, which is produced in folgen. Diese Auskunft erhielten wir telefonisch am           accordance with the new regulations. We received this 19.10.1976 von Herrn Dr. Kolb der Physikalisch-Tech-         information by telephone on the 19th Oct.1976 from nischen-Bundesanstalt Braunschweig.                           Dr. Kolb of the Physikalisch Technischen-Bundesan-stalt in Brunswick.
Die Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behn;ter S 1747 The instruction for loading the container S 1747 Sh.1 Bl.1 bis 6 ist nach den " Regulations for the Safe Trans-to 6 is produced in acccrdance with the " Regulations port of Radioactive Materials 1967 Edition " der Inter-for the safe Transport of Radioactive Materials 1967 national Atomic Energy Agency, safety series N6, Wien Edition " of the International Atomic Energy Agency, 1967" erstellt.Diese Regeln sind 1973 Uberarbeitet und safety series N 6, Vienna 1967. These regulations were mit neuem Absatz bzw. Randnummern herausgekommen, revised in 1973 and were issued with new paragraph and margin numbers.
Die Anderung der Anweisung un,d die Antragstellung           The change in the instruction and application for the O
Eine Anderung rier Anweisung und des Zulassungsscheines A change in the instruction and the licence for the type fur den Typ8 Behalter nach den neuen IAEA Regeln 8 container in accordance with the new IAEA-regula-soll jedoch erst Mitte des Jahres 1977 nach Ausgabe der tions should, however, take place first in the middle of Uberarbeiteten internationalen Eisenbahnverkehrsord-the year 1977 following the issue of the revised interna-nung filD, die nach den neuen Regeln erstellt ist, er-tional railway traffic rules RID, which is produced in folgen. Diese Auskunft erhielten wir telefonisch am accordance with the new regulations. We received this 19.10.1976 von Herrn Dr. Kolb der Physikalisch-Tech-information by telephone on the 19th Oct.1976 from nischen-Bundesanstalt Braunschweig.
fur die Anderung des zo r Zeit guitigen Zulassungsscheines   change to the currently valid licence No. 6.32-E 1-3 Nr. 6.32-E 13 wird mit Herrn Dr. Kolb rechtzeitig ab-         will be discussed in good time with Dr. Kolb.
Dr. Kolb of the Physikalisch Technischen-Bundesan-stalt in Brunswick.
O Die Anderung der Anweisung un,d die Antragstellung The change in the instruction and application for the fur die Anderung des zo r Zeit guitigen Zulassungsscheines change to the currently valid licence No. 6.32-E 1-3 Nr. 6.32-E 13 wird mit Herrn Dr. Kolb rechtzeitig ab-will be discussed in good time with Dr. Kolb.
gesprochen.
gesprochen.
Elsner T 2.050.033.03.03 Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behiltes s S1747                 Advice for loading the container S1747
Elsner T 2.050.033.03.03 Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behiltes s S1747 Advice for loading the container S1747
: 1. Verantworlich f0r die Einhaltung dieser Vorschriften         1. The person dispatcher of these instructions is in each (m
: 1. Verantworlich f0r die Einhaltung dieser Vorschriften
L ist der jeweilige Absender.                                     case responsible to see that they are observed.
: 1. The person dispatcher of these instructions is in each (m
: 2. Nach den Vorschriften der " International Atomic             2. The transporting container was developed in accor-Energy Agency, safety series No 6, Wien 1967 (1973)           dance with the regulations of the " International Ato-
ist der jeweilige Absender.
              "wurde der Transport Behalter entwickelt und ist als           mic Energy Agency, safety series No. 6, Vienna 1967
case responsible to see that they are observed.
              ."B (U) Verpackung" nach IAEA C 1.2 (228-241) unter             (1973)" and it is licenced as "B (U) Packaging" in der identical No D/DB 0003 B (U) von der Bundes-               accordance with I AEA (C-1.2 (228-241) under the anstalt fur Materialpr0 fung zur Bef6rderung von 60Co           identical No. D/DB 0003 B (U) by the Bundesanstalt und 137 Cs Quellen in besonderer Form zugelassen,               for Material Testing, for the conveyance of 60Co and 137 Cs sources in special form.
L
: 3. Far die Quellen muS nach IAEA A 2,15 (228 241) vom           3. In accordance with l AEA-A-2.15 (228-241) there Erzeuger eine Zulassung seiner zustandigen Landes-             must be available from the manufacturer, a licence beh6rde vorhegen,                                               for the sources from the responsible authorities in his country.
: 2. Nach den Vorschriften der " International Atomic
: 4. Zugelassen sind fur den Transport Behalter eine Go-         4. A total activity of at most 17000 Ci, Co-60 or Cs 137 samtaktivitat von h6chstens 17000 Ci, Co-60 oder             is permissible for the transporting container, cs 137.
: 2. The transporting container was developed in accor-Energy Agency, safety series No 6, Wien 1967 (1973) dance with the regulations of the " International Ato-
Das Cs 137 darf bis zu 10'% Cs 134 enthalteri. Beide           The Cs 137 may contain up to 10% of Cs 134. Both Quellenarten entsprechen' der group l11 nach A 3               types of source correspond to group 111, in accordance (401 411 Aktivit&tsgrenze). Der Transport-Behditer             with A-3 (401411 activity limit). The transporting con-ist so abgeschirmt, da8 er der category lil-yellow             tainer is so screened that it corresponds to category nach C 3.4 (c) (508 und 509) entspricht. Der "trans-           lli yellow in accordance with C-3.4 (c) (508 and 509).
"wurde der Transport Behalter entwickelt und ist als mic Energy Agency, safety series No. 6, Vienna 1967
port index" nach A 2.16. (137139) richtet sich nach             The " transport index" in accordance with A 2.16 den vorhandenen Quellen. Er darf den Wert 10 nicht             (137 139) is dependent on the source in question. It Oberschreiten. Index 10 entspricht 10 mr/h/1 m vom             must not exceed the value 10. Index 10 corresponds Zentrum des Transport Behalters. Als " Full load"               to 10 mr/h/1 re f om the centre of the transporting b         nach A 2.5. und C 3.4 d (531 und 532) konnen die               container. In ace.ordance with A 2.5 and C-3.4 d genannten Werte unter besonderen Bedingungen                   (531 and 532) tae nominated values can be to some noch etwas uberschritten werden.                               extent exceeded under special circumstances.
."B (U) Verpackung" nach IAEA C 1.2 (228-241) unter (1973)" and it is licenced as "B (U) Packaging" in der identical No D/DB 0003 B (U) von der Bundes-accordance with I AEA (C-1.2 (228-241) under the anstalt fur Materialpr0 fung zur Bef6rderung von 60Co identical No. D/DB 0003 B (U) by the Bundesanstalt und 137 Cs Quellen in besonderer Form zugelassen, for Material Testing, for the conveyance of 60Co and 137 Cs sources in special form.
: 5. Der Transport Behalter muS zum Versand in ordent-           5. The transporting container must be in good order lichem Zustand sein.                                           when used for conveyance.
: 3. Far die Quellen muS nach IAEA A 2,15 (228 241) vom
a) Alle Oberflachen, auch die in den Schachten und             a) All surfaces, including those in the channels and an den Einbauteilen, mussen auf Verseuchung                   on the attached parts must be checked for con-UberprUf t sein. Zugelassen sind nach Bla bis                 tamination.'In accordance with 81 a, up to 0,5 zu 0,5 mr/h an der Oberflache und nach B1b bis                 mr/h are permissible at the surface and in accor-zu 10'4/u Ci/cm2 (504 und 549-533) fur lose an-               dance with B 1 b, up to 10'4/ u Ci/cm2 (504 and haftende Verseuchur.aspartikel.                               549 553) for loosely adhering contaminated par.
: 3. In accordance with l AEA-A-2.15 (228-241) there Erzeuger eine Zulassung seiner zustandigen Landes-must be available from the manufacturer, a licence beh6rde vorhegen, for the sources from the responsible authorities in his country.
: 4. Zugelassen sind fur den Transport Behalter eine Go-
: 4. A total activity of at most 17000 Ci, Co-60 or Cs 137 samtaktivitat von h6chstens 17000 Ci, Co-60 oder is permissible for the transporting container, cs 137.
Das Cs 137 darf bis zu 10'% Cs 134 enthalteri. Beide The Cs 137 may contain up to 10% of Cs 134. Both Quellenarten entsprechen' der group l11 nach A 3 types of source correspond to group 111, in accordance (401 411 Aktivit&tsgrenze). Der Transport-Behditer with A-3 (401411 activity limit). The transporting con-ist so abgeschirmt, da8 er der category lil-yellow tainer is so screened that it corresponds to category nach C 3.4 (c) (508 und 509) entspricht. Der "trans-lli yellow in accordance with C-3.4 (c) (508 and 509).
port index" nach A 2.16. (137139) richtet sich nach The " transport index" in accordance with A 2.16 den vorhandenen Quellen. Er darf den Wert 10 nicht (137 139) is dependent on the source in question. It Oberschreiten. Index 10 entspricht 10 mr/h/1 m vom must not exceed the value 10. Index 10 corresponds Zentrum des Transport Behalters. Als " Full load" to 10 mr/h/1 re f om the centre of the transporting b
nach A 2.5. und C 3.4 d (531 und 532) konnen die container. In ace.ordance with A 2.5 and C-3.4 d genannten Werte unter besonderen Bedingungen (531 and 532) tae nominated values can be to some noch etwas uberschritten werden.
extent exceeded under special circumstances.
: 5. Der Transport Behalter muS zum Versand in ordent-
: 5. The transporting container must be in good order lichem Zustand sein.
when used for conveyance.
a) Alle Oberflachen, auch die in den Schachten und a) All surfaces, including those in the channels and an den Einbauteilen, mussen auf Verseuchung on the attached parts must be checked for con-UberprUf t sein. Zugelassen sind nach Bla bis tamination.'In accordance with 81 a, up to 0,5 zu 0,5 mr/h an der Oberflache und nach B1b bis mr/h are permissible at the surface and in accor-zu 10'4/u Ci/cm2 (504 und 549-533) fur lose an-dance with B 1 b, up to 10'4/ u Ci/cm2 (504 and haftende Verseuchur.aspartikel.
549 553) for loosely adhering contaminated par.
icles.
icles.
b) Der Transport Behalter darf nur komplett versendet           b) The transport;ng container may enly be dispatched werden. Er besteht aus einem zwmteihgen AuSen-                 cor9plete. It consists of a two-part outer contair er, beha:ter, dessen Bodenteil ein Dammpaket und                   whose base part has an insulating pack and two zwei Kufen besitzt, und einer Holzauskleidung die             runners ard a wooden lining whk h is seated firmly fest im Boden bzw. Oberteil des AuSer benalters               in the bsse, or upper part of the outer cortainer.
b) Der Transport Behalter darf nur komplett versendet b) The transport;ng container may enly be dispatched werden. Er besteht aus einem zwmteihgen AuSen-cor9plete. It consists of a two-part outer contair er, beha:ter, dessen Bodenteil ein Dammpaket und whose base part has an insulating pack and two zwei Kufen besitzt, und einer Holzauskleidung die runners ard a wooden lining whk h is seated firmly fest im Boden bzw. Oberteil des AuSer benalters in the bsse, or upper part of the outer cortainer.
sitzt. Im Innenbehalter sind je nach Versandart 1             According to tne nat;re of the dispatch from 1 to bis 13 Quedenschieber, Bleischieber und Pfrop'en               13, in the inner contair.er source drawers, lead angeordcet,                                                     drawers and plugs are arranged.
sitzt. Im Innenbehalter sind je nach Versandart 1 According to tne nat;re of the dispatch from 1 to bis 13 Quedenschieber, Bleischieber und Pfrop'en 13, in the inner contair.er source drawers, lead angeordcet, drawers and plugs are arranged. T 2.050.033.03.03 i
T 2.050.033.03.03 i
.-._,_-,_____m.,
_              .-._,_-,_____m.,


c) Im innenbehulter massen beide Schichte, Quellen-             c) In the inner cont 6.er, both channels, source and und Bleischieber sowie Pfropfen sauber und                       lead drawers as well as plugs must be clean and dry.
c) Im innenbehulter massen beide Schichte, Quellen-c) In the inner cont 6.er, both channels, source and und Bleischieber sowie Pfropfen sauber und lead drawers as well as plugs must be clean and dry.
trocken sein. Die zwei Dichtungsflichen am Behul-               The two sealing surfaces at the container and the iter und den Abdeckflanschen massen gratfrei und                 covering flanges must be clean and free our burrs.
trocken sein. Die zwei Dichtungsflichen am Behul-The two sealing surfaces at the container and the iter und den Abdeckflanschen massen gratfrei und covering flanges must be clean and free our burrs.
sauber sein. Alle 24 Schrauben (M20 x 40) dieser                 All 24 screws (M 20 x 40) of this covering flange Abdeckflansche massen gut angezogen und die                     must be properly tightened and the :afety catch Sicherheitsriegel mit HingeschloS abgesichert se:n.             with padlock must be secuted.
sauber sein. Alle 24 Schrauben (M20 x 40) dieser All 24 screws (M 20 x 40) of this covering flange Abdeckflansche massen gut angezogen und die must be properly tightened and the :afety catch Sicherheitsriegel mit HingeschloS abgesichert se:n.
d) Der Innnenbeh&lter muS in das trockene Bodenteil             d) The inner container must be inserted in the base des AuGenbehilters so eingesetzt sein, dab die roten             of the outer container so that the red markings on Markierungen an innenbehditer und Bodenteil sich                 the inner container and base coincide with each gegenUber stehen,                                               other, e) Das Oberteil des AuSenbehilters muS so auf das               e) The upper part of the outer container must be Unterteil abgelassen werden, dab der PaSstift dem               lowered onto the lower part so that the dowel       '
with padlock must be secuted.
PaSloch gegenUber steht.                                         pin is in line with the dowel hole.
d) Der Innnenbeh&lter muS in das trockene Bodenteil d) The inner container must be inserted in the base des AuGenbehilters so eingesetzt sein, dab die roten of the outer container so that the red markings on Markierungen an innenbehditer und Bodenteil sich the inner container and base coincide with each gegenUber stehen,
f) Alle 12 Schrauben (M 16 x 220) des AuSenbehbiters             f) All the 12 screws (M 16 x 220) of the outer con-massen eingefettet, mit Sicherungsringen versehen               tainer must be greased, fitted with locking washers und fest angezogen sein. Der Riegelstift ist mittels             and tightened firmly.The safety catch must be se-HingeschloS zu sichern.                                         cured with the padlock, g) Ein mit Strahlenquellen beladener Transport-Be-               g) A transporting container loaded with radiation halter darf, der category 111 yellow entsprechend,               sources may not have more than 200 mr/h at any nicht mehr als 200 mr/h an irgendeinem Punkt der                 point on the surface of the outer container and not Oberflache des AuSenbehalters und nicht mehr als                 more than 10 mr/h at 1 m from the centre of the 10 mr/h in 1 m vom Zentrum des Transport Behal-                 transporting container, corresponding to the cate-ters haben.                                                     gory lli yellow.
: other, e) Das Oberteil des AuSenbehilters muS so auf das e) The upper part of the outer container must be Unterteil abgelassen werden, dab der PaSstift dem lowered onto the lower part so that the dowel PaSloch gegenUber steht.
(Siehe Blatt 1 Abs. 4).                                         (See sheet 1 section 4).
pin is in line with the dowel hole.
h) Zur erh6hten Sicherheit gegen unbefugtes Offnen               h) For increased safety against unauthorized opening, kann die Trennfuge zwischen Ober und Unterteil                   the joint between the upper and lower parts of the des AuSengehalters etwa an der Stelle, wo der PaB-               outer container can be locked approximately at stift sitzt, versiegelt werden.                                 the place where the dowel pin sits.
f) Alle 12 Schrauben (M 16 x 220) des AuSenbehbiters f) All the 12 screws (M 16 x 220) of the outer con-massen eingefettet, mit Sicherungsringen versehen tainer must be greased, fitted with locking washers und fest angezogen sein. Der Riegelstift ist mittels and tightened firmly.The safety catch must be se-HingeschloS zu sichern.
: 6. Angaben am AuSenbehaiter                                     6. Information on the outer container a) In jedem Fall muS am AuGenbehalter nach C 3.5.5               a) In accordance with C-3.5.5. and C-3.5.6. (516 und C-3.5.6.1516 und 517) ein Kennschild                         and 517) a nameplate 17 99 469 S 1747 must in 17 99 469 S 1747 dauerhaft angebracht sein.                     every case be durably attached to the outer con-tainer.
cured with the padlock, g) Ein mit Strahlenquellen beladener Transport-Be-g) A transporting container loaded with radiation halter darf, der category 111 yellow entsprechend, sources may not have more than 200 mr/h at any nicht mehr als 200 mr/h an irgendeinem Punkt der point on the surface of the outer container and not Oberflache des AuSenbehalters und nicht mehr als more than 10 mr/h at 1 m from the centre of the 10 mr/h in 1 m vom Zentrum des Transport Behal-transporting container, corresponding to the cate-ters haben.
b) Bei Versand ohne Svahlenquellen muS das Selbst-               b) When bei. g dispatcned withour radiatinn sources.
gory lli yellow.
klebeetikett 17 99 295 S 1747 mit dem Wortlauf                   the self-adhesive label 17 99 295 51747 with the
(Siehe Blatt 1 Abs. 4).
        " Empty packaging having contained radioac' ave                 wording " Empty packaging naving contained radio-materials" angebracht sein 8.1. 4 (313).Abgedeckt               active materials" must be attached B 1.-1. (311).
(See sheet 1 section 4).
oder abgenommen muS sein Bl.-4. (313) das "Ra-                   The " Radioactive" warn.ng .abel 17 99 303 S1747 dioactive" Warnschild 17 99 303 S 1747 von fruheren             from earlier del;verres mu-t be covered or removed Lieferungen Part. E Fig. 4 (Section v. Fig. 4).                 B 1.-4. (3'3) Part. E fig. 4 (section V. fig. 4).
h) Zur erh6hten Sicherheit gegen unbefugtes Offnen h) For increased safety against unauthorized opening, kann die Trennfuge zwischen Ober und Unterteil the joint between the upper and lower parts of the des AuSengehalters etwa an der Stelle, wo der PaB-outer container can be locked approximately at stift sitzt, versiegelt werden.
c) Pei Versand mit Strahlenquellen mussen an 2 gegen-         . c) When being dispatched with radiatmn sources, labels Uberliegenden Seiten des AuSenbehalters Schilder                 17 99 303 S 1747, with information on the natu.e 17 99 303 S 1747 mit den Angaben uber Art und                   and activity of the contents as well as information Aktivitat des Inhalts sowie der Angabe des Trans-               on the transport index must be attached to 2 oppo-port Indexes angebracht sein.                                   site sides of the outer container.
the place where the dowel pin sits.
Ev. vorhandene Schilder 17 99 295 S 1747 mussen                 Any already existing labels 17 99 295 S 1747 must entfernt sein.                                                   be removed.
: 6. Angaben am AuSenbehaiter
: 6. Information on the outer container a) In jedem Fall muS am AuGenbehalter nach C 3.5.5 a) In accordance with C-3.5.5. and C-3.5.6. (516 und C-3.5.6.1516 und 517) ein Kennschild and 517) a nameplate 17 99 469 S 1747 must in 17 99 469 S 1747 dauerhaft angebracht sein.
every case be durably attached to the outer con-tainer.
b) Bei Versand ohne Svahlenquellen muS das Selbst-b) When bei. g dispatcned withour radiatinn sources.
klebeetikett 17 99 295 S 1747 mit dem Wortlauf the self-adhesive label 17 99 295 51747 with the
" Empty packaging having contained radioac' ave wording " Empty packaging naving contained radio-materials" angebracht sein 8.1. 4 (313).Abgedeckt active materials" must be attached B 1.-1. (311).
oder abgenommen muS sein Bl.-4. (313) das "Ra-The " Radioactive" warn.ng.abel 17 99 303 S1747 dioactive" Warnschild 17 99 303 S 1747 von fruheren from earlier del;verres mu-t be covered or removed Lieferungen Part. E Fig. 4 (Section v. Fig. 4).
B 1.-4. (3'3) Part. E fig. 4 (section V. fig. 4).
c) Pei Versand mit Strahlenquellen mussen an 2 gegen-
. c) When being dispatched with radiatmn sources, labels Uberliegenden Seiten des AuSenbehalters Schilder 17 99 303 S 1747, with information on the natu.e 17 99 303 S 1747 mit den Angaben uber Art und and activity of the contents as well as information Aktivitat des Inhalts sowie der Angabe des Trans-on the transport index must be attached to 2 oppo-port Indexes angebracht sein.
site sides of the outer container.
Ev. vorhandene Schilder 17 99 295 S 1747 mussen Any already existing labels 17 99 295 S 1747 must entfernt sein.
be removed.
T 2.050.033.03.03 e
T 2.050.033.03.03 e
: 7. Bei Versend des Benuiters zum Quellen4ieferenten         7. When dispatching the container to the source supplier, sind den Begleitpapieren jeweils 2 Schilder                 2 labels 17 99 303 S 1747 are to be included with the i                                       17 99 303 S 1747 beizulegen.                               advice papers.
: 7. Bei Versend des Benuiters zum Quellen4ieferenten
: 8. Die Schlossel fur die 3 Vorhingeschl6sser sind den       8. The keys for the 3 padlocks are to be issued along Begleitpapieren beizugeben,                                 with the advice note.
: 7. When dispatching the container to the source supplier, sind den Begleitpapieren jeweils 2 Schilder 2 labels 17 99 303 S 1747 are to be included with the i
: 9. Dem Quellenlieferanten ist Angabe zu machen,in           9. The source supplier is to be informed in which channel welchen Schacht (No. I oben und il unten) die Lie-           (No. I above and 11 below) the delivery should be forung erfolgen soll.                                       made.
17 99 303 S 1747 beizulegen.
advice papers.
: 8. Die Schlossel fur die 3 Vorhingeschl6sser sind den
: 8. The keys for the 3 padlocks are to be issued along Begleitpapieren beizugeben, with the advice note.
: 9. Dem Quellenlieferanten ist Angabe zu machen,in
: 9. The source supplier is to be informed in which channel welchen Schacht (No. I oben und il unten) die Lie-(No. I above and 11 below) the delivery should be forung erfolgen soll.
made.
1 4
1 4
4 l
4 l
I i
I i
VT 45Avengert                                                                           T 2.050.033.03.03 4
VT 45Avengert T 2.050.033.03.03 4
)
)
    . . ,    - - - -  - - - - , -      , , , , - - . . , .    - , -      _ - . - - ,                - . -  -      , . - - ,e-   - - - - - - - . - , - - - - = - - ~ ~ - .
,e-
- - - - - - -. -, - - - - = - - ~ ~ -


G l
G Versandart Schacht Beladung Nature of Channel Loading I
Versandart                                                                     Schacht                       Beladung Nature of                                                             -
j 17 82 044 S 1747 f
Channel                       Loading j     17 82 044 S 1747             f             I 42 81 11 S 1601
]
                                                                    ]
42 81 11 S 1601
                                    \ 17 99 253 S 1747 /              [         11 1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci 1 x Co60up to 11000 Ci l         1 x Co60 bis 6000 Ci 1 x Co60up to 6000 Ci 42 81 119 S 1 01 ll       1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci 2                       I                Y
\\
                                \L 17 99 253 S 1747\ J/
/
V
1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci 17 99 253 S 1747
                                                                  -I                      bei ungl. Ladg. stirkere Quelle in Schacht 11 1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci where the sources are of equal strength load the stronger source in channel 11 42 82 489 S 1603 q 17 99 279 S '1747 1799261S 1747 4                '
[
                                                                        /                   1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci y                            /         I 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci
11 1 x Co60up to 11000 Ci l
                            \                                     /                         1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci
1 x Co60 bis 6000 Ci 1 x Co60up to 6000 Ci 42 81 119 S 1 01 I
                                  \--   17 99 253 S 1747-- /
Y
I          1 x Co up to 11000 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603                 17 99 261 S 1747 2xCs137 bis insges. 5000 Ci
-I ll 1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci 2
                                              /   N                           I 2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci 4
bei ungl. Ladg. stirkere Quelle in Schacht 11
1 Y             Y 42 81 119 S 1601
\\
                            \                   v                 /           ti         1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci s     17 99 253 S 1747 _./                             1xCo60up to 11000 Ci 17 99 253 S 1747 ,
\\ /
                            /         17 82 044 S 1747         \
1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci V
Iy                   I         i         lg           1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603             17 99 279 S 1747 L 1799 261 S 1747           1x s      up to 4250 Ci 42 82 48. S 1603             17 99 279 S 1747 l             1xCs 137 bis 4250 Ci 1 x Cs 137 up to 4250 Ci 6                    g
where the sources are of equal strength load L 17 99 253 S 1747 J the stronger source in channel 11 42 82 489 S 1603 q 17 99 279 S 1747 1799261S 1747
                            \ \ 17 99v 261 S 1747 _/ !
/
                                                        /            7
1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci 4
                                                                              '            1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S,1603                 17 99 279 S 1747
/
                                    *                      #                l              1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci g              ,                                                1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 7                     \           v             v         !
I 1 x Cs137up to 4250 Ci y
7
\\
                                                                            "            2xCs137 bis 4250 Cs
/
                              \_     17 99 261 s 174l         _/                         2 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 y
1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci I
                                            /         y            ,
\\--
l              2xCs137 bis insges. 5000 Ci 2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci
17 99 253 S 1747-- /
                            '          Y             Y         /       ;;            2xCs137 bis insges. 9000 Ci
1 x Co up to 11000 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 261 S 1747 2xCs137bis insges. 5000 Ci
                                - 17 99 261 S 1747 -/                                     2 x Csf37 up to a total of 9000 Ci 42 81 119 S 1601                     1 1 x Co 0up to 6000 Ci 9
/
g                  ,                    7 k       17 82 044 S 1747             /
N 1
                                                              -I            '
I 2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci 4
17 99 253 S 1747 Y = Strahlrechtung der Quellen
Y Y
          = Radiation direction of the sources T 2.050.033.03.03                                                                                                                                                                                         e
42 81 119 S 1601
 
\\
e Versendert                                                                 Schecht                     Beledung
v
/7     Nature of                 15 15 296           17 82 044                   Channel                     Loading dispatch                   S 1747               S 1747
/
                            /                                                 \
ti 1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci s
l 10                   .
17 99 253 S 1747 _./
I                        1xCo60 bis 9000 Ci 20 96 402               20 96 303                         in rundem Quellentriger S 3513                    S 3502                    Il   1 x Co60up to 9000 C1 40 76 030 S 1747                                     in round source carriers 15 15 295 S 1747                                               1 x Co60 bis 6000 Ci in rundem Quellentriger I
1xCo60up to 11000 Ci 17 99 253 S 1747,
1 x Co60up to 6000 C1 44                  '          "
/
E              f       }                   in round source carriers a
17 82 044 S 1747
                                                  >              }
\\
j                     j                           1 x Co60 bis 9000 Ci 20 96 402             20 96 303                           in rundem Quellentriger S 3513                 S 3502                       11   1xCo60 up to 9000 Ci 40 76 030 S 1747                                       in round source carriers 42 81 119 S 1601                         17 99 253 S 1747           i x g60 bis in quadra-I 1 Co60 u to in I           ,                                          s:;uarse source carriers O         12 1 x Co60 bis in
Iy I
[l rundem Quellentriger 1 x Co60 up to in round source carriers 1 x Co60 bis in rundem Quellentriger
i lg 1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci 1x s up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 L1799 261 S 1747 42 82 48. S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 l
_. ,.,.                                              I  1 x Co60 up to in p                                         round source carries T                                         1 x Co60 bis in quadra-Il t;5chern Quellestrape 42 81 119 S 1661               17 99 253 S 1747                 1 x Co up to in
1xCs 137 bis 4250 Ci g
                                                                                              ,quaise sou ce ca:riers y = Strahlrichtung der Quellen,1000 Ce Co60entsprechend 1150 Orhm,1000 Ci C;,137 = 20 Ohrm.
/
                  = Radiation direction of the sources,1000 Ci Co60 corresponding to 1150 rnm,1000 Ci C,137 = 200 thm Achtung:Ausfuhrliche Bestuckungsangaben tur runde Quellentrager stehe "Quellenversand S 3502 BL 1.
1 x Cs 137 6
* Cautson:For comprehensive fitting instructions for roundcarriers see " Source dospatch 5 3502 Sh.1" O                                                                                                           T 2.050.033.03.03
up to 4250 Ci 7
\\
v 1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci
\\ 17 99 261 S 1747 _/
1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S,1603 17 99 279 S 1747 l
1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 7
g 7
\\
v v
2xCs137 bis 4250 Cs
\\_
17 99 261 s 174l
_/
2 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 l
2xCs137
/
bis insges. 5000 Ci 2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci y
y 2xCs137 Y
Y
/
bis insges. 9000 Ci
- 17 99 261 S 1747 -/
2 x Csf37 up to a total of 9000 Ci 42 81 119 S 1601 1
g 7
1 x Co 0up to 6000 Ci 9
k 17 82 044 S 1747
/
17 99 253 S 1747
-I Y = Strahlrechtung der Quellen
= Radiation direction of the sources e
T 2.050.033.03.03 e
Versendert Schecht Beledung
/7 Nature of 15 15 296 17 82 044 Channel Loading dispatch S 1747 S 1747
/
\\
l 10 I
1xCo60 bis 9000 Ci 20 96 402 20 96 303 in rundem Quellentriger Il 1 x Co60up to 9000 C1 S 3513 S 3502 40 76 030 S 1747 in round source carriers 15 15 295 S 1747 1 x Co60 bis 6000 Ci in rundem Quellentriger I
1 x Co60up to 6000 C1 E
f
}
in round source carriers 44
}
a j
j 1 x Co60 bis 9000 Ci 20 96 402 20 96 303 in rundem Quellentriger S 3513 S 3502 11 1xCo60 up to 9000 Ci 40 76 030 S 1747 in round source carriers 42 81 119 S 1601 17 99 253 S 1747 i x g60 bis in quadra-I 1 Co60 to in u
I s:;uarse source carriers O
12 1 x Co60 bis in
[l rundem Quellentriger 1 x Co60 up to in round source carriers 1 x Co60 bis in rundem Quellentriger I
1 x Co60 up to in p
round source carries T
1 x Co60 bis in quadra-Il t;5chern Quellestrape 42 81 119 S 1661 17 99 253 S 1747 1 x Co up to in
,quaise sou ce ca:riers y = Strahlrichtung der Quellen,1000 Ce Co60entsprechend 1150 Orhm,1000 Ci C;,137 = 20 Ohrm.
= Radiation direction of the sources,1000 Ci Co60 corresponding to 1150 rnm,1000 Ci C,137 = 200 thm Achtung:Ausfuhrliche Bestuckungsangaben tur runde Quellentrager stehe "Quellenversand S 3502 BL 1.
* Cautson:For comprehensive fitting instructions for roundcarriers see " Source dospatch 5 3502 Sh.1" O T 2.050.033.03.03


C AN                                     VCN                           teassas=<=.ru UB Med Erlangen
C AN VCN teassas=<=.ru UB Med Erlangen
                                                      ...,5...,
...,5...,
VT 43 r.i.,on Erlangen m,.z.,e.ao aoia,.N..,,ei .            va.... z..e.a                 o,i oad r.o Load changeover form Confirmation of the change at a Gammatron 1,2,3, R, Cs, S installation with Co40 or Cs-137 source.
VT 43 r.i.,on Erlangen m,.z.,e.ao oia,.N..,,ei va.... z..e.a o,i oad r.o a
installation Test number BZ-number Location Customer Source                                           old                 new Certificate number BZ-number Certificate date Manufacturer Source d;ameter in cm l Certificate dose rate RHM i
Load changeover form Confirmation of the change at a Gammatron 1,2,3, R, Cs, S installation with Co40 or Cs-137 source.
installation Test number BZ-number Location Customer Source old new Certificate number BZ-number Certificate date Manufacturer Source d;ameter in cm l Certificate dose rate RHM i
l l Drawer number l
l l Drawer number l
l Unload / load date-Whereabouts of unloaded source                                   _
l Unload / load date-Whereabouts of unloaded source Remarks and special occurrences Place, Da*e.
Remarks and special occurrences Place, Da*e .                                       Technician .
Technician.
Tech. Manager .
Tech. Manager.


e     c       e       -
e c
427
e 427
    -L g1                                    Oberpr0 fung der Transportbehsiter Typ S 1747                   T2-910.036.01.01.05 v'   SIEMENS                                for co bzw. cs-137-oueiren ilI        o.io-so.i.                 Check of shipping container Model S 1747 m win e.mov.-
-L Oberpr0 fung der Transportbehsiter Typ S 1747 T2-910.036.01.01.05 g1 SIEMENS v'
n v.ws hjli, for Co-60 or Cs-137 sources 1.(il.
for co bzw. cs-137-oueiren il m win e.m.-
s!                                                                                                                                  '
I n v.ws ov hjli o.io-so.i.
: h. j a  Sicherheitschecklisten fur Montage                           Safety checklist for installation id I l.lIf g fur die Be- und Umladungen an Gammatron-Anlagen er-folgt die Anlieferung der Co40- bzw. Cs-137-Quellen in Co-60 or Cs-137 sources for loading and reloading Gammatron systems are delivered in Siemens shipping I
Check of shipping container Model S 1747 for Co-60 or Cs-137 sources 1.(il.
g3Q      Siemens Transportbeh Itern, Typ S 1747. Andere               containers, Model S 1747. No other shipping containers j!b       Transportbehilter sind nicht zugelassen.                     are permitted, anz r ja "qt   '
: h. j Sicherheitschecklisten fur Montage Safety checklist for installation s!
Der Transportbehulter muS zum Versand in ordent-lichem Zustand sein, d.h. es dUrfen keine Mingel vor-The shipping container must be in proper condition for shipments, i.e. it must not have any defects which could liegen, die den gefahrlosen Transport beeintruchtigen       jeopardize a safe shipment. Responsibility for this be-Q{j          k6nnen. Verantwortlich hierfUr ist der jeweilige Absen-der, d.h. beim RUckversand die zustEndige Gesch5f ts-longs to the current sender or,in return shipments, to the corresponding branch office or Siemens subsidiary.
a id I l.lIf fur die Be-und Umladungen an Gammatron-Anlagen er-Co-60 or Cs-137 sources for loading and reloading g
  !I       stelle bzw. Landesgesellschaft.
folgt die Anlieferung der Co40- bzw. Cs-137-Quellen in Gammatron systems are delivered in Siemens shipping Ig3Q Siemens Transportbeh Itern, Typ S 1747. Andere containers, Model S 1747. No other shipping containers j!b Transportbehilter sind nicht zugelassen.
ld In der Tl 413 (T2.910.033.01.01) ist unter Punkt 6 die       in Tl 413 (T2.910.033.01.01) under Item 6, the con-
are permitted, anz r ja "qt Der Transportbehulter muS zum Versand in ordent-The shipping container must be in proper condition for lichem Zustand sein, d.h. es dUrfen keine Mingel vor-shipments, i.e. it must not have any defects which could liegen, die den gefahrlosen Transport beeintruchtigen jeopardize a safe shipment. Responsibility for this be-Q k6nnen. Verantwortlich hierfUr ist der jeweilige Absen-longs to the current sender or,in return shipments, to
    !p       BestUckung und Versandvorschrift fur den Transportbe-       tents and shipping regulations for the shipping container y         h5lter ausfUhrlich beschrieben.                             are described in detail.
{j der, d.h. beim RUckversand die zustEndige Gesch5f ts-the corresponding branch office or Siemens subsidiary.
Iij       Zus5tzlich wurde beiliegende Checkliste mit Obersichts-       In addition, there are the attached check lists and sur-zeichnung erstellt.                                         vey diagram.
!I stelle bzw. Landesgesellschaft.
  *!N Nach jeder Be- und Umladung muS vor der Freigabe zum         After loading and reloading, the shipping container must jM       Weitertransport der Transportbeh51ter anhand dieser         always be checked against this check list before being re-Checkliste UberprOf t werden.                               kased for further use.
ld In der Tl 413 (T2.910.033.01.01) ist unter Punkt 6 die in Tl 413 (T2.910.033.01.01) under Item 6, the con-
Q{5 U-H;j       Sollten Mangel vorhanden sein, die den gefahrlosen           if any defects show up whth could jeopardize safe ship-
!p BestUckung und Versandvorschrift fur den Transportbe-tents and shipping regulations for the shipping container y
{ila     Transport beeintrschtigen k6nnen, ist der Transport zu       ment, shipment must be stoppeo and TDT 43, telephone stoppen und TDT 43. Telefon 09131/84--3108/3454 zu           09131-84-3108/34E4, contacteJ for further instruc-ma       benachrichtigen und weitere Anweisungen einzuholen.         tions.
h5lter ausfUhrlich beschrieben.
Nach AbschluS der Arbeiten ist die ausgefallte und           At the conc!usion of wurk, the check list is to be filled 83         unteschriebene Check;iste an TDT 43/2 in Erlangen zt.       out, signed, and sent to TDT 43/2 in Erlangen.
are described in detail.
!    'I   senden.
Iij Zus5tzlich wurde beiliegende Checkliste mit Obersichts-In addition, there are the attached check lists and sur-zeichnung erstellt.
l!N     *
vey diagram.
*!N Nach jeder Be-und Umladung muS vor der Freigabe zum After loading and reloading, the shipping container must jM Weitertransport der Transportbeh51ter anhand dieser always be checked against this check list before being re-Q{5 Checkliste UberprOf t werden.
kased for further use.
U-H;j Sollten Mangel vorhanden sein, die den gefahrlosen if any defects show up whth could jeopardize safe ship-
{ila Transport beeintrschtigen k6nnen, ist der Transport zu ment, shipment must be stoppeo and TDT 43, telephone stoppen und TDT 43. Telefon 09131/84--3108/3454 zu 09131-84-3108/34E4, contacteJ for further instruc-ma benachrichtigen und weitere Anweisungen einzuholen.
tions.
Nach AbschluS der Arbeiten ist die ausgefallte und At the conc!usion of wurk, the check list is to be filled 83 unteschriebene Check;iste an TDT 43/2 in Erlangen zt.
out, signed, and sent to TDT 43/2 in Erlangen.
'I senden.
l!N*
:3
:3
-f a
-f a
,h1 1 1t 1
,h1 1 1t 1
!H i bf!
!H i bf!
pm!
pm!
dO!
dO!
lm! kIIa i3%
m! a l kII i3%D
D
-' jf TDT 43/Wengert 8i GVK 9/Northrup deutsch/englisch O
-' jf8i
SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen
,          TDT 43/Wengert GVK 9/Northrup                                                                                         deutsch/englisch O                 SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT                             Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen
= = = = = - - = =
          = = = = = - - = =


An                                                     To:
An To:
UB Med                                                 Med. Eng. Group O
O UB Med Med. Eng. Group g
TDT 43/2 Erlangen TDT 43/2 Erlangen g
TDT 43/2 TDT 43/2 Erlangen Erlangen Checkliste fur Transportbeh5lter Check list for shipping container Fab r.-N r.1747/............
Checkliste fur Transportbeh5lter                       Check list for shipping container Fab r.-N r.1747/. . . . . . . . . . . .               Serial No.1474/. . . . . . . . . . ..
Serial No.1474/..........
Positions Nummern entsprechen den in der Zeichnung angegebenen Nummern.
Positions Nummern entsprechen den in der Zeichnung angegebenen Nummern.
K5stchen hinter jeder Position abhaken, wenn diese in Ordnung ist.
K5stchen hinter jeder Position abhaken, wenn diese in Ordnung ist.
Item Numbers correspond to the numbers indicated in the diagram.
Item Numbers correspond to the numbers indicated in the diagram.
Check off the box after each item when okay.
Check off the box after each item when okay.
: 1. Haube                               schmutzfrei und auf Beschudigung achten       -
1.
Hood                                 No dirt;look for damages                       -
Haube schmutzfrei und auf Beschudigung achten Hood No dirt;look for damages
(
(
: 2. a) Schild                               "Typ 0/2001/B(U)" dauerhaf t befestigt und Text vollstEndig lesbar a) Label plate                         "Model 0/2001/B(U)" permanently attached, text completely legible h
2.
b) Schild                               "Gewicht des BehElters ca. 2000 kg" dauer-haf t befestigt und Text vollstEndig lesbar   -
a) Schild "Typ 0/2001/B(U)" dauerhaf t befestigt und Text vollstEndig lesbar a) Label plate "Model 0/2001/B(U)" permanently attached, text completely legible h
b) Label plate                         " Weight of container approx. 2000 kg" per-manently attached, text completely legible
b) Schild "Gewicht des BehElters ca. 2000 kg" dauer-haf t befestigt und Text vollstEndig lesbar b) Label plate
: 3. Holzinnenauskleidung                 fest und vollst5ndig Inner wooden lining                 Secure and complete                           -
" Weight of container approx. 2000 kg" per-manently attached, text completely legible 3.
h
Holzinnenauskleidung fest und vollst5ndig Inner wooden lining Secure and complete h
: 4. 12 Stck. Spezialschraube             17 99 246 S 1747 unbescl*5digt und gefettet   -
4.
12 special screws                     17 99 246 S 1747 undamaged and greased         -
12 Stck. Spezialschraube 17 99 246 S 1747 unbescl*5digt und gefettet 12 special screws 17 99 246 S 1747 undamaged and greased 12 Stek. F5cherscheibe 33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798-St 6980 12 lock washers 33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798-St 6980 5.
12 Stek. F5cherscheibe               33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798-St 6980               -
Boden schmutzfrei, auf einwandfreien Zustand der Holzauskleidung und Besch5digungen achten Bottom no dirt, wooden lining in satisfactory condi-tion;look for damages
12 lock washers                     33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798-St 6980               -
+
: 5. Boden                               schmutzfrei, auf einwandfreien Zustand der     -
 
Holzauskleidung und Besch5digungen achten       -
6.
Bottom                               no dirt, wooden lining in satisfactory condi-tion;look for damages
Kufe Befestigung der Kufe mit dem Boden pr0 fen O
  - - - ,                                          +                                             *
8ese check ettechment er bese te the <ieer O
: 6. Kufe                           Befestigung der Kufe mit dem Boden pr0 fen O     8ese                           check ettechment er bese te the <ieer O   7. Dichtung                       17 99 378 S 1747 am ganzen Umfang vorhan-den, unbesch5digt und Ober die Flanschfluche vorstehend Seal                           17 99 378 S 1747 present over complete girth, undamaged and protruding over the flange surface
7.
: 8. DEmmplatte                     17 91056 S 1747 Paketh5he 120 mm, bei Unterschreitung des MaSes um mehr als 10 mm             -
Dichtung 17 99 378 S 1747 am ganzen Umfang vorhan-den, unbesch5digt und Ober die Flanschfluche vorstehend Seal 17 99 378 S 1747 present over complete girth, undamaged and protruding over the flange surface 8.
entsprechend Dumm-Material aufkleben Insulating board               17 91056 S 1747 Package height 120 mm; when exceeded by more than 10 mm, glue on appropriate insulating mater _ial
DEmmplatte 17 91056 S 1747 Paketh5he 120 mm, bei Unterschreitung des MaSes um mehr als 10 mm entsprechend Dumm-Material aufkleben Insulating board 17 91056 S 1747 Package height 120 mm; when exceeded by more than 10 mm, glue on appropriate insulating mater _ial 9.
: 9. 4 Stck. Schraube               35 39111 M16 x 120 DIN 931-8.8 6603 Four screws                     35 39111 M16 x 120 DIN 931-8.8 6603 4 Stck. F5cherscheibe           33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798 - St. 6980                     -
4 Stck. Schraube 35 39111 M16 x 120 DIN 931-8.8 6603 Four screws 35 39111 M16 x 120 DIN 931-8.8 6603 4 Stck. F5cherscheibe 33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798 - St. 6980 Four lock washers 33 46 566 A 1o.5 DIN 6798 -St.6980 0
Four lock washers               33 46 566 A 1o.5 DIN 6798 -St.6980                       -
~
0                                                                                              ~
10.
: 10. Innenbeh51ter                   schmutzfrei, unbesch5digt
Innenbeh51ter schmutzfrei, unbesch5digt
                                                                                                  ~
~
Inside container               no dirt, undamaged
Inside container no dirt, undamaged
                                                                                                  ~
~
: 11. Kennschild                     33 72 737 (1019 SRN 825) Fabr.-Nr.            ...
11.
(entsoricht der Fabr.-Nr. des Transportbe-               -
Kennschild 33 72 737 (1019 SRN 825) Fabr.-Nr.
hutters) dauerhaf t befestigt und Text voll-stundig lesbar O     Label plate                     33 72 737 (1019 SRN 825) Serial No.
(entsoricht der Fabr.-Nr. des Transportbe-hutters) dauerhaf t befestigt und Text voll-stundig lesbar O
(the Serial No. of the shipping container) per-manently attached, text completely legible
Label plate 33 72 737 (1019 SRN 825) Serial No.
: 12. 2 Stck. Deckel                 schmutzf rei, unbeschudigt Two covers                     no dirt, undamaged
(the Serial No. of the shipping container) per-manently attached, text completely legible 12.
                                                                                                  ~
2 Stck. Deckel schmutzf rei, unbeschudigt Two covers no dirt, undamaged 13.
: 13. Beidseitige Klingeritdichtungen 17 99 683 S 1747 unbesch5digt und eingeklebt Two-sided Klingerit seals       17 99 683 S 1747 undamaged and glued in O
Beidseitige Klingeritdichtungen 17 99 683 S 1747 unbesch5digt und eingeklebt
O                                         _3_                                     12_,, e.e3e.e ,
~
: 14. 24 Stek. Schraubo                                                         35 39 129 S 1747 24 screws M20 x 40 DIN 6912-8.8, gefettet 35 39 129 S 1747 g
Two-sided Klingerit seals 17 99 683 S 1747 undamaged and glued in O
M20 x 40 DIN 6912-8.8, greased                                                                                 g
O
: 15.     Roter Markierungsstrich und Schachtkennzeichnungen gut lesbar vorhanden Red mark and compart.nent identification marks present and legible
_3_
: 16.     Beidseitige Zentrierflansche                                             Ausdrehung gratfrei und unbesch5digt Two-side centering flanges                                               recess without burrs, undamaged
12_,, e.e3e.e,
: 17.     Vor jeder Bef5rderung einer Therapiestrahlenquelle muS an diese Use ein Vorh5ngeschloS angebracht werden.
 
14.
24 Stek. Schraubo 35 39 129 S 1747 M20 x 40 DIN 6912-8.8, gefettet g
24 screws 35 39 129 S 1747 M20 x 40 DIN 6912-8.8, greased g
15.
Roter Markierungsstrich und Schachtkennzeichnungen gut lesbar vorhanden Red mark and compart.nent identification marks present and legible 16.
Beidseitige Zentrierflansche Ausdrehung gratfrei und unbesch5digt Two-side centering flanges recess without burrs, undamaged 17.
Vor jeder Bef5rderung einer Therapiestrahlenquelle muS an diese Use ein Vorh5ngeschloS angebracht werden.
Before transporting a therapy radiation source, a padlock must always be attched to this hook.
Before transporting a therapy radiation source, a padlock must always be attched to this hook.
: 18.     Bemerkungen:                                                           .                                                                                    .  .          .
18.
Remarks:                                                             .                                                                          .
Bemerkungen:
Remarks:
O
O
                          , den (Ort)/(Location)                                                                                                                                                 (Datum)/(Date)
, den (Ort)/(Location)
O Prufer/ Examiner (Name) Unterschrif t/(Name) signature Falls Mdngel vorliegen, die den gefahrlosen Transport                                                                                       if there are any defect which could jeopardize a safe beeintrdchtigen k6nnen,ist der Transport zu stoppen                                                                                         shipment, shipment must be stopped and TDT 43, und TDT 43, Tel. 09131-84-3108/84--34 54, zu be-                                                                                           Tel. 09131 3108/84-34 54 contacted for further nachrichtigen, um weitere Anweisungen einzuholen.                                                                                           instructions.
(Datum)/(Date)
T2-910.036.01                                                                                                                                                                           _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
O Prufer/ Examiner (Name) Unterschrif t/(Name) signature Falls Mdngel vorliegen, die den gefahrlosen Transport if there are any defect which could jeopardize a safe beeintrdchtigen k6nnen,ist der Transport zu stoppen shipment, shipment must be stopped and TDT 43, und TDT 43, Tel. 09131-84-3108/84--34 54, zu be-Tel. 09131 3108/84-34 54 contacted for further nachrichtigen, um weitere Anweisungen einzuholen.
instructions.
T2-910.036.01 _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _


4 9
4 9
C
C
                                                'l                     _
'l Q
Q          [j@' @'MW'd B S't' M//,
[j@' @'MW'd B S't' M//,
g-1 g                < < <w         3 b
1 3
j 2
'- b g - < < <w 2
w:
j g
x s s                      y a
x s w:
3 12 7'r u$m:k         8'Y' m        '
s y
                                                                    'd       b is 13       'd s                     ~~~^~"
7'r $m:k a
If  $.          15
8'Y'
:- j        , "i                                        I;                                  {
'd b
          .s          .
3 u m is 12 If 15 13
c                  .p..
'd s
x                .
f$!                              )
: s.                I
                                    '*                                          16 16 (u ;xs                  .. :
ll./-
1              x ~:t                      n-
                                                \                              10
{
{
                                ~
~ ~ ~ ^ ~ "
j
, "i I;
c
.s
.p..
f$!
)
x I
16 s.
(
16
;xs ll./
u 1
x ~:t n-
~
\\
f.,
f.,
i .-
{
O                                                 v       l                   1
10 i.-
                                                              -i 7/
O v
                                                                                ,1 yF1                         yi:             0 l'r                           ]         L 5
l 1
                                \                   \
7/
    %I                           1                                       #
-i
O     1 l
,1 yF1 yi:
                                    \\                 \
0 l'r
                                                        \
]
      .                              \                 \
5 L
6               8             9                 15 O
\\
O O                                                                                       T2-910.030.01}}
\\
% I 1
O 1
\\
\\
l
\\
\\
\\
\\
6 8
9 15 O
O O T2-910.030.01}}

Latest revision as of 13:58, 11 December 2024

Requests Fee for 860110 Application for QA Program Approval for Radioactive Matl package:0551.Related Documentation Encl
ML20141P249
Person / Time
Site: 07100551
Issue date: 02/05/1986
From: Gerard Jackson
NRC OFFICE OF ADMINISTRATION (ADM)
To: Horndasch A
SIEMENS CORP.
Shared Package
ML20141P246 List:
References
NUDOCS 8603190187
Download: ML20141P249 (100)
v • d • e


Text

-

l FEB 0 51986 i

Docket No. 71-0551 Siemens Medical Systems, Inc.

ATTN: Mr. Alfred F. Horndasch Therapy Service Department 186 Wood Avenue South l

Iselin, NJ 08830 Gentlemen:

This refers to your January 10, 1986 letter for approval of your Quality i

Assurance Progran.

Enclosed is a copy of revised 10 CFR 170, which became effective June 20, 1984.

Please notice 9170.31, fee Category 10F, which specifies fees for applications for Part 71 quality assurance approvals, including renewals and amendments thereto. Applicants in fee Category 10F pay an initial application fee of $150 and are subsequently billed at six-month intervals for all accisnulated NRC costs or upon completion of the review, whichever occurs sooner. The total fee assessed will be based on the actual NRC cost (professional staff-hours) to process the application as well as any contractual cost incurred.

Based on the above, please remit an application fee of $150 and mail it to my attention.

If you have any questions concerning the fee, please let me know, l

Sincerely, Original SiFJ.t4 B1

~ G1enda1 * "

Glenda Jackson License Fee Management Staff

~

Office of Administration

Enclosure:

d ti-10 CFR 170 (June 20,1984) cx \\

W h 'y,f DISTRIBUTION:

POR Quality Assurance Fee File

\\

Y Matls. Fee File GJackson, LFMB 86031901G7 e60110 Len Gordon, FCTC, HMSS PDR ADOCK 07100551 LFMB R/F (2)

C PDR I

i

"'"" LFMS:ADM..

i l

===L GJackson:rej

""" 2/.1 86

.wennmnaMiss~ casa

~

OFFICI AL. RECORD COPY

. _ _ -, _. _ -. _. ~ _ _. _ -. _ _

~-

..~.-

=

x L!.UllttG.VE_LLE{.

~

USA M

- p

[g

" " 4. G s e s7sa

{fgg}

w_

. w w=

c a a V O 1077 p

{

GAMMATRON 1,2,3, R, S und CAESA.GAMMATRON b]a T 2.910.012.01.01.05

()

1 SIEMENS Arbeiten an beladenen GAMMATRON.Anlagen GAMMATRON 1l 2,3, R, S and CAESA GAMMATRON a

      • "***i-Work oraloaded GAMMATRON units

. y I.

'X d m'/

bh 23i Sicherheitshinweise Safety notes k3 IIj 5

1.

Allgemeines 1.

General i

I l{

1.1. Arbeiten, insbesondere am Strahlerkopf, dUrfen 1.1. Work, especially that on the radiation head, may 2

nur von informierten Fachkriften ausgefGhrt werden, only be performed by trained experts. These experts must Diese Fachkrifte mGssen an einer information oder an have taken part in a course or training session given by fu s einem Kurs von US Med teilgenommen haben und eine Siemens Med and possess a certification in writing that

$j scnriftliche Bescheinigung besitzen, daS sie Service an they are entitled to perform servicing on charged Gamma.

beladenen Gammatron Geriten durchfGhren dUrfen.

tron units, fl FGr das Be und Entladen eines Strahlerkopfes mit 1.2. For loading and unloading a radiation head with a 1.2.

einer Cobalt 60-oder Caesium 1374uelle, bedarf es einer cobalt 60 caesium 137. source, a special certificate is re.

s j

gesonderten Bescheinigung. Nur der Personenkreis, der quired. Only those persons possessing such a certificate g}

diese Bescheinigung besitzt, darf Ladungen durchfGhren.

may perform chargings. Charging may only be performed ba((

Ladungen dGrfen nur mit Kopplungsvorrichtungen durch.

with coupling devices. These coupling devices are suited a

gefGhrt werden. Die Kopplungsvorrichtungen passen nur to fit the Siemens transport holder S 1747 (Please consult

[Hi zum Siemens.Transportbehilter S 1747. (Siehe Rund.

Circular VT 45 ha le dated 8.10.76), A gammatron may schreiben VT 45 ha te v. 8.10.76) Ein Gammatron darf not be loaded with a radiation source until all pertinent g i erst mit einer Strahlenquelle beladen werden, wenn alle regulations and impositions have been fulfilled in so far

! l einschligigen Vorschriften und Auflagen erfGilt sind, so.

as they apply to radiation protection and installation on U

{$

weit sie bauseitig den Strahlenschutz und die Installation site. For this, the details in the project plan with radia-id betreffen. Verbindlich dafGr sind die Angaben im Projekt.

tion orotection, details given in the dimensional plan and plan mit Strahlenschutzangaben,im MaSblatt und son.

other documents by Siemens Medical are obligatory, stigen Unterlagen vom UB Med.

M* 11, 1.3. Personen, die Arbeiten gemia 1.1 und 1.2 durch.

1.3 Persons performing work according to 1.1 and 1.2.

fGhren, sind strahlenexponierte Personen und unterliegen above are exposed to radiation and thus subject to focal den Landesgesetzen Gber Strahlenschutz,2. B. in der legislation on radiation protection, for example in the Bundesrepublik Deutschland, der ersten Strahlenschutz.

Federal Republic of Germany, to the first Radiation g

verordnung. Nur diese Personen, die einer Strahlenschutz.

Protection Ordinance. (Strahlenschutzverordnung). Only fg Gberwachung unterliegen, dGrfen sich im Kontrollbereich those persons subject to radiation protection monitoring 4{

aufhalten. Sie mGssen gesetzmiSig eine Strahlenschutz.

may be present in the check zone. They must, according

}

plakette und ein Pendosimeter und als werksmiSige Auf.

to legal requirements, wear a radiation protection badge j

l lage ein akustisches Warngerit z. 2. TDL 3, Sach Nr.

and a pen dosimeter in addition to an acoustical warning g

}

44 21798 NH 019 tragen.

instrument required by factory regulations, for example j] l TD L 3, part No 44 21798 NH 019.

di 4

i Mit einem Direktsichtdosimeter (z. 8. Graetz X 50) ist in the case of a direct view dose meter (for example I

bei Betreten des Bestrahlungsraumes der Strahlungspegel Graetz X 50), the radiation level is to be checked upon

,gg zu kontrollieren und zu GberprGfen, ob der VerschluS ge.

enterir'g the radiation room as to whether the cover is j

schlossen ist. Das Direktsichtdosimeter muS immer bei closed. The direct view dose meter must always be worn Betreten des Kontrollbereiches mitgenommen werden, when entering the check zone.

~

r.!.

,kI}g{

deutsch/englisch T/

L -

SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen 0."C*.Z".* *~.C. C======C"=*

,'";* r *. !.i=*~,'"*".1=0.".';:i" !*J':~%'O' **""

(2b3$.h

i 1.3.1 Die Gesetze und Bestimmungen zur elektrischen, 1.3.1 The laws and regulations regarding electrical, i

mechanischen und strahlenschutztechnischen Sicherheit mechanical and radiation safet'y must b's adhered to (for

. sind einzuhalten (fGr die B R D r. 8. VD E 0100, VD E 0107c the Federal Republic of Garmany.for example VDE 0100, VDE 0750, DIN 6846,1 Str.Sch.V).

VDE 0107, VDE 0750, DIN 8846,1 Str.Sch.V).

i

\\

FGr Landesgesellschaften und Landesvertretungen gilt:

The following applies for branch offices and foreign sub-

~

Die in der BRD geltenden Gesetze und Bestimmungen sidiaries:

sind einzuhalten, sofern diese nicht im Widerspruch zu,

. The laws and regulations valid in the Federal Republic of 3

den nationalen Sicherheitsbestimmungen stehen.

. Germany must be adhered to in so far as they are not in 1

direct conflict with local safety regulations.

/

1.4. Vor Aufnahme von Service-Arbeiten an einer Tele-1.4. Before starting service work on a Telegamma a

j gamma-Anlage ist der Betreiber der Anlage zu verstin-system, the operator of the system must be informed.

I digen.

i 1

1.4.1 Wenn Arbeiten durchgefGhrt werden,beidenen 1.4.1 When work is being performed, where radiation I

Blockierungen. die den Strahlenschutz betref fen (Strahlen-protection devices (pick-up units) are temporarily out of l

fingergerite), vorGbergehend ausgesetzt werden mGssen, function, this can only be performed with the agreement so darf dies nur nach Zustimmung des Strahlenschutzbe-of the official concerned with the radiation protection of j

auftragten der Anlage erfolgen. Gilt nicht fGr 2.6.

the system. Does not apply in the case of 2.6.

1 1.4.2 Die Freigabe des Strahlungsbetriebes muS durch 1.4.2 Permission for radiation can only be given by the i

den Strahlenschutzbeauftragten der Anlage erfolgen.-

radiation protection official responsible for the unit (Eventuelles Absichern von strahlengefihrdeten Neben-(attention must be payed to secure any neighbouring tiumen!). -

^

rooms endangered by radiation!).

2.

MaBnahmen vor Beginn der Atbeiten an '

2.

Measures prior to starting work on Tele-Telegamma-Anbgen s

gamma systems.

h; s.

2.1. Der Betrieb der Bestrahlu6gseinrichtung birgt Ge.

2.1. The operation of radiation devices involves radia-

)

fahren durch Strahlung, durch 'mechanische und elektri.

tion hazard through inherent mechanical and electrical

' sche Funktionen in sich.

functions. The following instructions must be observed im'interesse der Sicherheit sind nachfolgende Anweisun-carefully in the interest of safety.

'geri genauestens zu beachten.

2.2. Riume gegen Betreten durch Unbefugte sichern 2.2. Make sure that the room is not entered by persons (Hinweisschild, Seilabsperrung).

without permission (warning notice, rope barrier).

I 2.3, Arbeiten an stromiosen Anlagen sind nur beige-2.3. Work on systems not under current can only be Bffneten Sicherungstrenner oder entfernter Hauptsiche-performed with opened safety switch or Mmoved mains rung durchzufGhren.

fuse.

)

l

'Achtung:

Caution:

}

Raumlichtschaltung und Raumlichtanschlasse sind da-Switch and connections forroom.ligh ting are not switched i

durch nicht abgeschaltet.

ofin this case.

i Achtung:

Caution:

Nach VDE 0750, s 8 b, massen die unter Spannung According to VDE 0750, s 8 b, allparts under voltage

\\

stehenden Teile durch Abdeckungen gegen zufElliges must be securedagainst unintentional touching by covers

)

Berdhren geschGtzt und deutlich als unter Spannung and clearly marked as being active (room-light switches, i

stehend gekennzeichnet werden (Raumlichtschaltung, roomdight connections).

RaumlichtanschlUssel, t

i 2.4. Arbeiten an einer unter Spannung stehenden An-2.4. Work on a system connected to voltage is not i

lage ist verboten. Falls jedoch zwingend erforderlich, ist allowed. However, should this be absolutely necessary, die Anwesenheit einer zweiten Person unbedingt erforder-the presence of a second person is required under all cir.

lich.

1, cumstances.

j, 2.5. Der SchlGssel des SchlGsselschalters zur Betitigung 2.5. The key to the key switch for actuating the lock des Verschlusses ist abzuziehen und sicher aufzubewah-system is to be removed and kept in a safe place.

ren.

T 2.910.012.01 2-5 i

h

i p,

2.6. SchlGsselschalter und ~0rkontakte dGrfen nicht 2.6. Key switch and door contacts must not be bridged 4

GberbrGekt werden.

over.

2.7. Bei Unterbrechung der Arbeiten sind Raume, von 2.7. When interrupting work, rooms from which it is denen ausdas Einschalten oder die Bedienung der Anlage possible to switch on or operate the unit must be secured m6glich ist, abzuschlie6en.

against entry.

i 3.

MaSnahmen vor dem Einschalten der Strah-3.

Measures prior to switching on radiation lung i

3.1. Es mua sichergestellt werden, dag sich vor Ein-3.1. Care must be taken that no persons are present in schalten der Strahlung keine Personen im Sperrbereich the prohibited zone during radiation.

aufhalten.

I 3.2. TGre zum Bestrahlungsraum schlie8en.

3.2. Close doors to radiation room.

4.

Ma8nahmen wihrend des Betriebes 4.

Measures to be taken during operation 4.1. Sofort nach dem Einschalten der Anlage (ohne 4.1. The " Emergency OFF" switch and (in the case of

(

Strahlung) ist der "Not Aus".Schalter und (mit Strah-radiation) the door contact are to be tested immediately

\\

lung) der TGrkontakt zu testen.

after switching off the uni (without radiation).

t 4.2. Im eingeschalteten Zustand mu3 die Anlage von 4.2. When switched on, the unit must be continuously mindestens einer Person dauernd Gberwacht werden, supervised by at least one person.

4.3. Bei unerwartet auftretenden Schwierigkeiten in 4.3. In the case of unexpectedly occurring difficulties Bezug auf die Einhaltung der Sicherheit fQr Patient, Be.

with regard to maintenance of safety forpatient. operator dienenden sowie Oritte, ist umgehend der Technische and third persons, the technical manager of the represen-Leiter der Geschiftsstelle, der Landesgesellschaft oder tatives office, foreign subsidiary or branch office is to be j

Landesvertretung zu verstandigen.

informed.

i j

4.4 Sicherheitstechnische Anderungen dGrfen nur nach 4.4. Technical changes to safety conditions may only Angaben der dafGr erstellten Werksanleitung durchgefGhrt be performed in accordance with details given in the fac-(

werden.

tory instructions provided for this purpose.

,I

~

4.5.

BeiMir;eln, die den sicheren Betrieb beeintrichti-4.5.

In the case of defects which reduce safe operation,

{

gen, ist die Anlage - jedoch nur mit Einwilligung des Be-tne unit -although only with permission of the operator treibers - stillzulegent

-is to be put out of commission!

l Die Anlagedarf e st danndem Betreiber wiederGbergeben The system may only be returned to the operator for use werden,wenn die Mangel beseitigt sind.

when the defect has been corrected.

i 5.

Besondere Hinweise fur Telegammagerste 5.

Special notes for Telegamma units i

5.1. Im Strahlerkopf und teilweise in der Blende 5.1 In the radiation head and partially in the dia.

i f

(Gammatron S)ist Uran als Abschirmmaterial vorhanden. phragm (Gammatron S) uranium is used as protective i

Uran darf in k einer Weise bearbeitet werden. Wurde Uranmaterial. Uranium rrust not be worked upon in any way.

I

{

beryhrt, so sind nach der Arbeit grGndlich Hinde zu if uranium has been touched, hands must be washed

waschen, thoroughly after work.

1 j

5.2. Sind die Abdeckungen vom Quellenschacht ent.

5.2. It is absolutely forbidden to perform any kind of l

fernt, so darfen auf keinen Fall Geritebewegungen, elek.

unit movements under any circumstances, whether elec-j trisch oder von Hand, durchgefGhrt werden.

trical or manual when the covers on the source shaft are

{

not in position.

I i

5.3. Sind unvorhergesehene St6rungen vorhanden, die 5.3. Should an unprecedented defect occur whereby a eine einmalige Personendosisbelastung von mehr als 3 person may expect a unique exposure dose of more than j

Rem erwarten lassen (quadratisches Abstandsgesetz der 3 Rem (pay attention to the quadratic law of radiation t

$trahlung beachtenl), so ist der Bestrahlungsraum unver-1 at distance!), the radiation room is to be evacuated im.

}

(

zGglich zu verlassen, abzuschlieGen und sofort Abteilung mediately, closed and the department TVS, Tel. 2568, j

TVS,Tel. 2568 oder VT 45,Tel. 3108, UB Med Erlangen, or VT 45, Tel. 3108, Medical E ngineering Group Erlangen zu verstindigen.

(UB Med), to be informed at once.

[;

VT 45/Hain T 2.910.012.01 i

i 4

Ejj g((

3>

"I~}

W 412 fg n

-- w m w.,

/N h

(

)g T 2.910.071.01.01.02 Ujs General remarks and preparatory work

1)

SiEMENS for the loading and unloading of 9 mie wm a Co-60 or Cs-137 source aI!

I]Il I

o.

4.=

S" 1: }

st g

Adjusting Instructions jp{

al l J.

Contents

{h Page yg

~ 1.

Prerequisites 2

ig.3 1.1. Statutory requirements on the handling of radioactive materials 2

5 r,;{

1.2. Personnel dosimeter and radiation. measuring appliances 3

h.I 1.3. Weights 3

[*j.lf;,, g;,

ms 1.4. Selection of the transport route 4

,. eg

(.)

2.

Loading frame for exchanging sources 6

l 2.1. Remark 6

It 2.2. List of contents of the transport crate 6

I 2.3. Assembling the crane frame 6

Ih 2.4. Dismantling the crane frame 9

l2

',y 3.

List of tools, aids and monitoring devices 12 1

g,J;.

-. i :

sy s

i e i !

I ql.

ie f.

,ip t

s, r

i l r.l 1

t I-I {

l *-

s I N

, is l I, 1'

i

[., ik eng'f tch SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen e.===.========.

  • .*lL*.*. '.*:=" *OC%*****.'f*;O**.'.*.;*ff0'"** * **'***

r

.:... n..

1.

Prerequisites For the loading and unloading of a Co40 or Cs.137 source, coupling devices are needed which are specific for the unit involved (Gammatron 1,2,3, R S and Caesa).

All these coupling devices can be screwed only to the Siemens dual-channel contaire, viodel B (S 1747).

Therefore, sources for Gammatron units must be loaded with this container model.

Coupling device, Gammetron S, complete, container and head ends Part No. 20 96 923 S 3513 Coupling device, Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Causa container end Part No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling (attachment) plate, Gammatron 3 (from unit no.1011/0211 onwards)

  • head end Part No. 4189 411 S 3513 Coupling (attachment) plate, Gammatron 1,2, and R head and Part No. 4190 864 S 3513
  • w%,

,.i, Coupling (attachment) plate, Caesa Gammatron head end Part No. 42 79 717 S 3513 j

Additional intermediate piece, Gammatron 2 and R head end Part No. 4190 989 S 3513 Additional intermediate piece, Gammatron 1 head end Pan No. 4191276 S 3513 in addition, for all loading and unloading work, a loading frame, Part No. 44 39 451 SH 085, is required.

For transporting the container into the treatment room, a lif ting trolley is also needed (possibly, depending upon the nature of the floor covering, provided with plastic wheels).

  • In the case of units with earlier f actory numbers, thecoupling plate is dif ferent and inquires should be made of VT 43.

1.1.

When handing radioactive materials, the following points MUST be complied with:

1.1.1. For all loading / unloading, servicing and repair work, the regulations (requirements) of the authorization docu-ments granted to the f actory, the customer and the local sales office, subsidiaries or agencies abroad, must be complied with accordingly. Particular attention should be paid to the regulations concerning the informing of the appropriate authority, f or example, when carrying out loading / unloading, repair work, etc. that needs more than one day to complete and also in the case of any unusual occt rrence.

1.1.2. The measurement of the personnel dose and the medical examination of the employees must be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the country concemed. In the case of the Federal Republic of Germany, these requirements are contained in paragraphs 36 and 46 of the 1. Strahlenschutzverordnung (1st Radiation Protection Ordinance) (from April 1,1977, the appropriate paragraphs of the new Radiation Protection Ordi-nance).

1.1.3. The changing of radiation sources, and also repairs to the shutter of a Gammatron unit, rest be carried out by at least 2 persons; one of these persons must be thoroughly familiar with the design and construction of the unit and be fully conversant with all the requirements of radiation protection applicable. Thste experts must be in possession of a written authorization provided by Siemens Erlangen to the effect that he may carry out such work.

T 2.910.071.01 1.1.4. For all work carried out on the Gammatron units, the treatment heads and transport containers, the instructions

.O cor. rained herein must be strictly complied with.

1.1.5. For all such work as loading, unloading and exchanging the source, copes of the applicable valid handling aut-horizations and the appropriate instructions for carrying out work issued by the f actory, must be in possession of the persons carrying out the work. When abroad, the approp ate laws of the country involved must be obser-ved.

1.2.

Personnel dosimeter and radiation-measuring appliances During the transport of radioactive materials (also the accompanying of transports) and also during loading, un-loading or sourve exchange, a counter device must be available f or a measuring range of at least 1 mr/h to 1 R/h.

Every person concerned with the work must wear a radiationprotection badge (for example, film dosimeter) and carry an integratir g pocked dosimeter with direct display and also an acoustic alarm device (for example TDL 3).

The latter must be adjustable at least to the ranges 2,5,10 and 20 mR.

1.3.

Weights 1.3.1. Transport container type BS 1747 (17 99188 S 1747) (old designation S.hi 47 a) 4 i'.. k'm ;..

Total weight approx. 2000 kp Fire protection hood approx. 350 kp Base approx. 150 kp Source. holder approx.1500 kp Dimensions:

Transport container, complete

=

800

=

730#

=

t l

1 l

A d Q I ll i Il

](

{gNJ J

l L

8o

.9.s oo I

1f f

t R

IR MP 1

o y

?

o

+

4 oo i

IN P-I

  • - 500 - ->

1000 1

Total weight: approx. 2000 kp hg.1 Fig. 2 i T 2.910.071.01 j

l l

2

-,-~-,-r-----,

-.n,

.. - - -,., ~. - _ _ _ -

.,,--,--,..-,n,.-,--.n.

Inner transport container O

o

/on o

q g.g

}

(

o'o

,k j,

N l

k l

h _-_.-

.:d t: =: :-.= =/

t e

v i

t

'F.

F o

y y

o E

.3 Fig. 3

-+ #

Fire protection hood approx. 350 kp

^

)

=

800 t

Source container Il I Il I

N with 2 source channels Base 3

approx.1500 kp approx.150 kp a

n l

\\

l 3

j t = =:- = =/

] l\\

bR 85 4

(\\

l ln

@D i

t y'

3 7.

oc cc

\\

l

/

M, v

v e

n v

i Dimensions of smaller base m brackets Fig. 4 I

.)

1.3.2. Transport crate with loading frame and hoist approx. 300 kp 1.3.3. Transport crate with coupling devices approx. 250 kp 1.4.

Selection of the transport route The transport route into the treatment room must be selected in such a way that the floor can support a load of at least 1800 kp. To improve the distribution of the weight, thick wooden planks or steel plates should be used On (Fe floor, Remark:

Prior to the transport into the treatment room, the fore protection hood must be lifted off. To do this, lift the hood vertically upwards to ensure that it does not " jam"against the container i

j

,1.4.1, Preparation for the continued transport Open the padlock on the set pin (1/ Fig. 5) and remove. Release the 12 bolts (2/ Fig. 5) with the 24 mm open-ended spanner.

Lif t of f the fire-p'otection hood (3rFig. 51.

Transport the container into the treatment room.

T 2.910.071.01 Remark:

Normally,in the treatment room, the container can be lifted out of the base with the aid of the loading frame.

,- m

(?

If, however, a container should be supplied in a high base, it is more expedient to lift the transport container n

)

(1/ Fig 6) out of the base beforehand and then transport is alone into the treatment room (care must be taken to ensure that the transportcontainer is properly supported so that transport can be reliably and safely effected).

1.4.2. When re-inserting the container into the base, the red mark (3/ Fig. 6) must be made to coincide with the red mark (4/ Fig. 6).

The fire-protection cover (3/ Fig. 5) is then lowered into the base in such a way that the set pin (1/ Fig. 5) engages in the hole (5/ Fig. 6).

The fire-protection cover is then secured by screwing into place.

The padlock on the set p;n (1/ Fig. 5) is again fitted.

/

, ~,

)

k

+- j

.-r

=

=

v}-.

i

(

y..j L/

i:: g.;

c.

g-l,

ll \\ <

1.aua f.. ~

i:. 7:.i.

[ll

~E-r-

-Q'if "

l

' /

R.....

'j:

.. o yh::

3.i+

f ;_,

o u,._,up 4.

,b. M-1 o

o

??

N O

Fig. 5 Fig. 6

'b T 2.910.071.01

8 2.

Loading frame for exchanging sources (Part No. 44 39 431 SH 085)

2.1. Remark

The loading frame with hoist is packed in a transport crate.

The loading frame can be assembled by two persons, but three are better.

2.2.

List of contents of the transpo,t crate 1 crane frame comprising the supporting member (1/ Fig. 7) and 4 multi-section supporting members (2/ Fig. 7).

1 hoist,2500 kg litting capacity 3/ Fig. 7) 1 lif ting :ing,2000 kg lifting capacity (4/ Fig. 7)

I crab. 2000 kg lifting capacity (5/ Fig. 7) 4 struts (6/ Fig. 7) r*

e : o.. =

h 3

2 O

gom

,, /

/

2

,.,4 4

7., -

,,, ~,

I

,,.s,~""

,,s "

s h

~

D s-2 e

/

',,.,,e': s

,,,,,s~

8 6

~""

s*'""',,

, s.,a,s gas 'd

,.,,F*

e

,,s,s

.,s' Fig. 7 2.3.

Assembling the crane frame 2.3.1. Arrange the individual elements around the supporting element (1/ Fig. 7). Ensure that the marking rings (7/ Fig.

7) coincide! In addition, the numbers 1 to 4 have been stamped into the metal near the fixing holes (in some cases also dots).

2.3.2. Screw the upper support element to the ins;de of the supporting member as shown in Fig. 8.

T 2.910.071.01 -

7

. J i

j i

ip 3

]

I

-.m.:

e e

=

l

/[

"-.s t

.1 w

f.

E e

/

f e

g f

f Fig. 8 2.3.3. Insert the lower supporting element into the upper element and secure with the struts.

2.3.4. Place the loading frame on its side as shown in Fig. 9 and then set it up.

Remark:

Depending upon the nature of the floor in the treatment room, wooden planks might be placed under the feet of the frame to protect the floor and provide better weight distribution!

  • ~

4 I

U T 2.910.071.01

e 4..

~

r

^~

m

,,s..

xe 4

a..

~

~ - - - -..

. - ~.

z-el --.

,.sw %,.

I

_ 4 0 o

.___.s.

r,b,;e. -

4

~ ' '

exs. l ume. -

em h

xg0 0

[pmy.

)

Fig. 9

(...'

2.3.5. Fit the erab.

Hang the hoist from the bearing bolt of the crab.

/@-

T 2.910.07g,oy.

s'#

.48.***

9 OO@@s 3

7 i'"

39 992 $,%

g 't 3 X

%,D

~

j i

1 <\\

\\

a t

l t

I l

sin 3

an as

't f

i F

(

l n

i I

f l

s

{

F 1

i L

{

}

p

}.

1

=

..u

(

i.

I'.lMAe st:

t 4,

6

.-)

jf f'

i 1

I i-t O

i

{

N man t.

f

\\

m a

.l i t

i a

k f.,j

[

ll l8 f

i

=

~

l==,

1:-

O'

  1. l I

(d)

{

g r.

.t t

t y

(

4 Fig.10

.-c.

2.3.6. Screw the Tommy screw (2/ Fig 10) into the holes of the c!amping elements (3/ Fig.10). Lock the crab (4/ Fig.

10) into position with tne a.d of the ciamping elements.

Note:

For the s:rew (5/ Fig 10) to the bearing member, $1nce this is an absolute necessity to ensure securement of the crab (4/ fig.10). The loading frame most always be set up in such a way that the end with the screw (S/ Fig 10) is pointing away from the treatment head.

2.4.

Dismantling the crane f rame I

2.4.1. The Crane frame is dismantled by reversing the procedure descr >ed under Point 2.3.

i

. T 2.919 071.01

g I

i e t-7 2.4.2. Stowing the individual parts in the transport crate is carried out in three groups:

Group I:

1 bearing member (1/ Fig.11)

I hoist (2/ Fig.11) j 1 sl:ng (3/ Fig.11) i 1 crab (4/ Fig.11) 2 struts, short (6/ Fig.11)

Remark:

The hoist (2/Fm.11) must be placed in the crate as shown in Fig.1111 The separating board for group 11 will l

otherwise not rest on the supports (5/ Fig.1111 i

j Group 11:

1 board (1/ Fig.12) j 4 upper supporting elements (2/ Fig.12) i l

Grwp 111: 4 k,wer supporting elements (1/ Fig.13)

, 7 2 struts,long (2/ Fig.13) i~h?fyi,,[c.

}

~.

  • 4'

'l

see,

. ~

j j

t 1

i

...9..

f.

j i

I I

1 i

1 l

i 1

5 a l'$

{

e i

T 2.910.071.01

- 1 i

I

[

l L

Gr::up I

~

~ww--

v c y 3 / ~ =./

v=mxpy I i.

e,.... e. _...

,. i _ m.,a

()

'b h 3 ' >EC'% T fq-c ~ {d @

h n on. ;9:.v. wx.?'.%..

14

i

p m:t %;,.... r. w n.s &..........g:,a c...,

h w~

... e

.. m, m, :..

r a.

w.... g.~

s

e... I 2,:.

i s

o i

5

\\

=w E

.9 fti" L

M....

J'. l yv

. !,;; sh.

6 ;, n

.s 1

i

/,

I &.f.?:.:

Y m

-I

',...\\, u\\

)

+;p

1. T:<,.<p. '.- c.. e'.

ic.:. ->.*.

..r,.e.

4 m

\\

.g

i g

-c.

', w : 0.2. '> w 9 *6 v' ' l..(, :

-s

, f,..

s O.','

!?1* :, *. -,0-

.... ~.... *; $

  • ,;', ? 7 ;.,-2,'-

\\t\\

g a

s

.,' 3D'd$$/.k,D d,, i.*.'

'3/, ' ~. '. 'N kj 2

. r;f,C.4

/

]t.

  • > *3 C j [

I i,'

(

l.

s Fig.11 Group 11

'.]

wg. yy ~ - -

~ = xiyi c /

.2.... o

. rf..

. :2.

7i

.....-1

.c.

. m._ ___./) *,

J \\ _.c-W_ _

. cs m.

~

f, 'm3 l a?,,.::..';y;g._.;.9_ 3:;.

i;

.~1,

{, M ye mwsMas" ':vexamre:0nz.t l 3 l gids~5 : seemssyg:st) O " 4-Oj. ;

.. y.. 9 -.. : y l l ~

g' f, [

j

_ } ll:.,-

w l,

Di$75:>/ $ffM *fi:Vf

4

$Otsffffd$$$ 5:wMW SMS'*%f$Wd WMS 1

I, (s

.r

-:.7. f_,3 qll,

, l 1.. <

s...

~

J L M,,nnawa.-~~~meme;fmmmnenenwslmamneem} a-o 4.,. ; ] l w

_ l l y.c.

, re.

t 4.~

mm-estsE 2

O' '.O (scuews-esmer sm:~gl pwww veus:

Ql.:.?:'

....;:-:.; ri.- :' :~ '. -l Q ' j i, \\ \\

t.;

p, l._

Fig.12 Group lit q-

_r_; ppg ;s xx v-

-x

2 ;

..:.,:. t __I'.

\\-d

_ 1

p. m

_2,

.g}

f

' ].

I

, ts. -

ll:<.i.

- q.

[

\\

/' ^

's

$,: fry y g-

/q

g. e y /.f

.~ n.y f

.,x

..r.,.,,

[g, rW V gj

,/,./ r'\\ill4:,6-

. (...: ~.. -

v f

3,

ef):[

> sm:u

- %.ff ~;h"t

..._... s.f

~

z.:.,.

A

' '. p'

)

^

c.

~

[ l-l:

. (.s. ~

s-

- ~ r.,

[

l l :,

Q-

...]l

- +

T s

/

l s.. g 7-i b,. :

~..s.:. l l j _. -

[ Qi l l w..

  • 1

,}

Fig 13 T 2 910 071.01

3.

List of tools, aids and monitoring devices 3.1.

Tools 1 set of open-ended spanners,13 - 22 mm 1 ' set of Allen keys 6 - 14 mm 1 set of screwdrivers, sizes 4 - 8 1 Allen key 17 mm 1 Open-ended spanners 24 mm,27 mm,30 mm and 32 mm 1 Precision spirit level, accuracy 0.5 mm/m 1 Rubber hammer 1 fong forceps 3.2.

Aids 1 pendulum phantom, Part No.1713 023 S 1705 1

approx. 5 - 10 mm thick plexiglass disk 4 approx. 3 - 5 cm thick wooden planks Protective gloves Plastic bags Large sheet of wrapping paper Films 18 x 24 (for example, Strukturix D 4)

Dust coat Coupling device,lif ting trolley and loading frame (see also point 1 of these ins euctionW t

3.3.

Monitoring devices 1 dose rate alarm device TDL 3 (or something similar) 1 counter tube 1 mR/h - 1 R/h 1 film badge or similar 1 Pen-Oosimeter with charging cevice l

l T 2.910.071.01

-.- 12 --

Mr A. Horndsceh Isolin 413

~

O T 2.910.033.01.01.02 GAMMATRON 1,2,3, R and CAESA

)

l I SIEMENS l':'0ll1*2r.

l 8g i

cowo..

Loading and unloading Il 5,

oei.4.*

i 21 i

] g 11.77

)

=

$ }.

s,2 Mounting instructions I 'k' Contents Page

]I 1.

Introduction 2

43)2 1l i 2.

Prescribed requirements for the transporting container 3

i I i

I

{2 3.

Preparation of the transporting container and loading frame 4

4.

Preparation at the unit and subsequent source exchange 10 4.1.

Gammatron 1 11 4.2. Gammatron 2/R 18 aplg 4.3.

Gammatron 3 26 I

4.4 Caesa4ammatron 36 5.

Procedure in unusual situations 44

}1.

j1; 6.

Equipping and dispatch regulations for the transporting container 44 O

5,e 4 ll 7.

Forms for the changeover 44 o!!Ir it i !

i

'li !I erMr li1 44 4 i il i

4 e

I i

4 i

i I

!$ ih

'I ri t

l

! -11 i

s I

o i:

l i

.. s O

II-j enghsch SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen

':.',*:"" ','" %::. ll, t*::::::':*^ :;' L' :?;':'.*::::T":2..

ll;*.'::::.* ;**.2*; *.*::::*.l':;' !:;... l.'11.*::;T: "**

a 1.

Introduction The Gammatron units may only be loaded or unloaded under the directions of a trained expert from the works. This expert must have adequate knowledge and experience in dealing with radioactive materials,in questions of radiation protection and in the techniques of radiation measurement. He must possess written authorization from the Medical Engineering Group in Erlangen to carry out this work. If such an expert is not available,it is possible to request one from the Medical Engineering Group Erlangen, Dept. VT 43. This request must be made at least 2 weeks before the planned loading. Otner persons who assist in loading or unloading must be instructed on the work to be carried out and the dangers which can possibly arise, by an expert in the matter.

By loading and unloading of a Gammatron,is understood, the sliding of the source drawer fitted with the high curie source, out of the transporting container and into the Gammatron head and vice versa.

On exchanging the source, the source drawer with the old source 's pushed out of the Gammatron head into the trans-porting container and subsequently the source drawer with the new source is pushed out of the transporting container into the Gammatron head.

The loading and unloading must be carried out by at least 2 persons.

1.1.

Personal dosimeter and radiation measuring instruments During loading, unloading or source changing, a counter tube instrument (e. g. Graetz X 50) must be available, with a m easuring range of at least 1 mR/h to 1 R/h. Each person involved in the work must carry an integrated pocket dosime-ter (Pen-Dosimeter) with direct indication, a radiation protection badge (e. g. Film dosimeter) and an acoustic warning device (e. g. TDL 3) set to 5 mR 'h or 10 mH/h.

1.2.

Reference documents General information and preparations for laoding and unloading with a Co 60 or Cs 137 source. T 2.910.071.01.01.

Specifically for the unit:

Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 1 R 85.0672.03.03.01.01 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 2 R 85.0678.03.03.0101 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron 3 S 85.1009.03.03.0101 Adjusting and setting to work, Gammatron R S 85.1011.03.03.01.t,1 Adjusting and setting to work, Caesa-Gammatron S 85.1008 03.03.01.01 1

O T 2.910.033.01 e

p 2.

Prescribed requirements for the transporting container V

2.1 When initially loading a redietion head 2.1.1 Normal case The transporting container is supplied with a radiation source. In the second channel there must be a dummy drawer.

2.1.2 Special case (only possible with two initial loadings, or 1 initial loading and I changeover loading). The transpor-ting container is supplied with two radiation sources, it must be determined f rom the delivery documents, in which channel the source intended for the customer is housed. A dummy drawer must be available, which is pushed into the empty chan,1el following the initial loading of the first unit.

2.2. When exchanging a radiation source Only the radiation source intended for the customer should be in the transporting container. The decayed radiation source is housed in the second channel of the transporting container with the aid of a throug-bored dummy drawer.

2.3. When unloading a radiation heed (E. g. Shutter failure, inspection of the radiation head). An empty transporting container must be requested from Erlangen.

2.4 Romerk

In the case of initialloadings and exchanges of radiation sources, note all the details on the delivery note (insert No.,

BZ number, loading date of the unit. copy of the source certificate etc.) and send them to Dept. VT 43 in Erlangen.

Warning:

The radiation direction of the source in the transporting container must always point downwards.

O m T 2.910.033.01

~.-

i 9

top Source insert number N

/

o S1601/II.. ol ION s

Source Fig.1 The end face of the source drawer Only source drawers without uranium inserts may, as yet, be delivered and used. These source drawers are identified by additionally rivetted-on labels (1/ fig.1).

If a drawer without this rivetted-on label be supplied, then immediately, before the loading, Dept. VT 43, Tel 84 3108 is to be informed and the loading postponed until the matter has been expla* red.

2.5. The loading capacity for the transporting container S 1747 is regulated by the " Directions for the loading of the container S 1747, in the Appendix to these instructions.

The source supplier must guaranteee that these regulations have been observed. If there appear to be discrepancies, then VT 43 is to be informed. For the return disp &tch, the empty enannel must contain a dummy drawer.

Remark:

Before proceeding with the insertion, the coupling device must be checked to see that it is complete. In connection with this, see the following instructions, specific for Gammatron 1,2,3. R and Caesa.

3.

Preparation of the transporting container and loading frame 3.1.

Push the assembled crane frame in front of the unit (see in addition the instruction, " General information and preparations for loading and unloading a Co 60 or Cs 137 source T 2.910.071.01.01"). The hoist must in its long!!udi-nal direction, stand central to e drawer channel of the source head. The side on which the crane carriage can be pushed, must be away from the head.

O T 2.910.033.01 e

3.1.1 Travel the transporting container under the crane frame. Attach the rope sling to the container.

Warning:

Wo.-k at the transporting container may only be carried out, when it is steady and not swinging.

3.1.2 Spread out a sheet of packing paper on the floor in front of both channel openings of the transporting container.

Wear protecting gloves.

3.1.3 Unscrew the channel cover (1/ fig. 2) with a 17 mm socket head cap screw key and lay it on the packing paper.

The lead screenings (1/ fig. 3) are then visible.

IO

l4 If)!

%I }

a O'

. o'

==

o 'N

[Io ff%

  • a o e

B O

D

-l

&:61

\\

d e

1/

l

%go=<e /

a w

a

.N g:

g

/

n y

=

Fig. 2 Fig. 3 O T 2.910.033.01

et

+

i r

M Radiation head F9 f q-q

' L_h'i l b.

Transporting container g 3

.L

.I I.l

-l Radiation source d

E N

~ l:

y gm CAUTION!!

Area of slot-leakage radiation Channel axis Area with increased radiation level I

Fig. 4 I

(

O T 2.910.033.01 c

3.1.4 Remove both the lead screening blocks and lay them down on the pecking paper.

gs 3.1.5 If there are radiation sources contained in channels I and 11 (2/ fig. 3), then it must be ascertained from the deli-very documents, which source is intended for which customer.

Note the number of the source drawerl Warningt As from this moment, no one must go into the area of the channelaxis (1/ fig. 4), or if it is necessary to go in, it should be for the shortest time possible.

Slot-lenkage radiation!

Working area, see (2/ fig. 4).

3.1.6 The main direction of radiation from the source in the source drawer goes directly downwards. The drawer carries at both ends the identification " top"

" source" and it must always lie in the channel of the transportation container in this position (instructions from the Medical Engineering Group to the source suppliers).

The number engraved on the end f ace of the source drawer must agree with the information on the delivery note. (See fig.1).

If this is not the case, it is necessary to inform Dept. VT 43, Tel. 84 3108 immediately and suspend the loading proce-dure until the matter has been explained.

3.1.7 Replace the lead screening blocks.

3.2. Preparation for unloading 3.2.1 Screw the coupling plate (1/ fig. 5) to the container with the 4 socket head cap screws M 6 x 25 (3ffig. 6). In doing so, take care that the centering spigot is seated in the container flange. Do not yet tighten the screws.

Fit the centering piece (2/ fig. 5) to the coupling plate (to do this, the lower lead screening block must be removed) and screw on firmly with the two screws M 10 x 20 (1/ fig. 6). Then by tightening the screw (2/ fig. 6), the coupling plate is centered to the container channel. Tighten the socket head cap screws (3/ fig. 6). Remove the centering piece (3/ fig. 5) af ter releasing the screws (1/ fig. 6 and 2/ fig. 6).

Replace the lead screening b:ock again.

Screw in the locking screw 4efig. 6.

f e T 2.910.033.01

at 4

r O

O

\\

O y_.

r;., O L.

2 0

3 F;g. 5

\\$

n n

/,-

' /c, (N

1

(

i, g

d -)

t Wh-e

\\,s

,1 e

i Fig. 6 O

T 2.910.033.01 - - -

e 3.2.2 Secure the loading disc (1/ fig. 7) to the reverse side with the 4 screws M 6 x 30 (2/ fig. 7).

fs 3.2.3 Fasten the support piece (3/ fig. 7) in the position of the dummy drawer.

3.2.4 Exchange the normal dummy drawer for the bored-through dummy drawer (fig. 8).

To do this position the bored-through dummy drawer with its head end to the container and with this push the normal dummy drawer out to the rear.

Il

' I.,f

+

h

, M-g-)

p

y; g

i-g G

d 2

1 O

Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Warning:

If there is a source in the transporting container, then the second channel must be filled (also when interchanging the dummy drawers), or otherwise the radiation protection of the container is not fully guaranteed.

Thus the transporting container is prepared for the source exchange proper.

l i

l 1

O T 2.910.033.01

o 4.'

Properation at the unit and subsequent source exchange Waiting area:

During the loading or unloading, those persoris who are not directly involved in the procedure must leave the room.

The two persons remaining in the room must remain in the prescribed waiting ares (see fig. 9) during the exchanging procedure (pushing the source drawer from the radiation head into the transport container and vice versa).

i5$$ '

iiiA5 Radiation head

/

f I

3

!:i:5:!:!

565

Area of increasedj;i;!

~~

i;! Area of increased.:::

!! radiation level (jjj

![ radiation level-I:IIil ljl 1

O Transporting container Loading rod

,g Area of increased radiation level

\\

\\

/

Waiting area during the changeover procedure Fig. 9 T 2.910.033.01,

i l

l f

4.1.' Gemmetron 1 Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.

Loading frame for source exchange item No.44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Cs at the container item No.4191169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 1,2 and R head end item No. 4190 864 S 3513 Intermediate piece for Gammatron 1 head end item No.4191276 S 3513 Contents:

/

A.

General remarks B.

Preparatory work C.

Unloading D.

Loading E.

Final work O

O T 2.910.033.01 l

l

o A.

General remarks in both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel Coupling device 3

Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.

^^*

emy

'S f

~,

s-<

??

f

'j g

g*

g O

"j t

i b

ff ; *

h o

~s k

9

  • J --}

O Fig.10 l

1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Container side coupling plate 3 = Centering piece for 2 4 = Loading disc 5 = Support slide 6 = Head side coupling plate 7 = Centering piece for 6 l

8 = Intermediate piece for 6 9 = Rope sling l

10 = Loading rod 1

1 O

T 2.910.033.01 e

On safety:

If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more.

During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switcheden condition, so that all the brakes are acting.

B.

Preparatory work The carriage of the Gammatron 1 is travelled downwards and the radiation head so turned that the radiation port is in the downward direction and the source channel is horizontall After unscrewing the cladding on the right-hand side of the stand, the locking pin (1/ fig.11) for the spring counterbalance must be pushed through the holes in the lower rope wheels.

^p Q-A o

(

l' m

a M

l!

. I j

i

.'l e

/a 4 g

I..

J

@,2::;

n"

/

Q E3!$

4 g

3

/

Fig.11 Remove all the cladding f rom the radiation head. Remove the safety bar for the source drawer (1/ fig.12) by unscre-wing the two screws 12/ fig.12). Remove the lead protecting cap (3/ fig.12) by unscrewing the securing screw (4/ fig.12).

Draw out the slot-plate, ensuring that the source drawer remains in position (e.g. loading rod). Note the position of the slot-plate for assembly later.

O

, T 2.910.033.01 l

G

- g\\$ I

/]

w

~-

.+,

9 1

4

- /

s s

j

~

~

36 Fo]$

c s

@@ @@GKD@/

Fig.12 Warning:

After removing the safety bar (1/ fig.12) increased care the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.

Secure the source drawer by the safety bar again and then remove the slot plate at the other side of the head as pre-viously described. Remove screws (5/ fig.12). Before attaching the coupling device, the type nameplate at the side of the radiation head has to be removed.,asten the intermediate piece to the rad'ation head with the two screws (3/

fig.13).

Do not tighten the screws yet!

Fasten the coupling plate (1/ fig.13) and intermediate piece (2; fig.13) with the IWo screws (4sfig.13).

Push in the centering piece (lifig.14) fully and tighten the two screws (3/ fig.13).

Take out the centering piece again.

e:-

msmas.

,f uo as o..,e MW%

L m

ChKRV

.l(

.0,

.s;.;i.

4 N

x 3

..e

, 7 7_.

;;p

+

4 './

q g

i:i g>

sig.,3

,4.,4 l

T 2.910.033 01 r i

c

/^

Special case g

()

There are radiation heads of smaller dimension,in which the source drawer projects at both sides of the channel. In this case, it is necessary when centering, to remove the safety bar (1/ fig.12) at the side of the head remote from the contai-ner, since during centering with the centering piece, the source drawer is pushed about 4 cm out of the channel. Since at this time, the source drawer is not secured against sliding out of the channel, during the centering procedure,it is ne-cessary for one person to secure the source drawer with the loading rod until the centering procedure is completed,i. e.

the centering piece has been taken out again, the source drawer pushed back to its original position and the safety bar screwed on again. None the slot leakage radiation zone. T C.

Unloading Bring the transporting container prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame. Raise the transporting container, until the two couphng plate! can be secured together with the screws (1/

fig.15).

(D 1I T

.'"/

l m

t l

Q@

t

/

s:;-

e.

1 EL r n o iM Transporting Gammatron j

container head 4

mA

?A 2

s.

g q

_t,

-\\

l Fig.16 Fig.15 Remark:

Since the couoHng plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling 15 made to the required channel.

Push the loading rod through the hored-through dummy drawer as shown in fig.16 and screw firmly to the source dra-wer in the Gammatron head.

Then screw out the safety p ns at the plate at the container side.

Draw the source d'awer into the transporting container with the loading rod. In doing so the bored-through dummy drawer will be drawn out of the container channel on to the $!ide The gripping hand!e of the loading rod must be held horizontally.

When slid ng the sourt Pawer the area of increased dose (see fig. 9) must be kept clear.

l O l T 2.910.033.01 1

1

at D.

Loading The loading of the Gammatron 1 in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading. Release the connection of the container to the Garnmatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower channel).

Take out the screening blocks (see 3.1.7).

Warning:

The bored through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig.17, the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried out. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, untilit lies centrally in the transporting contsiner.

5 1

\\

\\ s (k

Q

./

Fig.17 E.

Final work Separate the transporting container frnm the Gammatron head set it oown on the htt:ng carriage and tra et it to the side.

Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head.

Replace the slot plate.

Put the lead protection caps (3/ fig.12) on both sides of the radiation head back in position and secure the source dra-wer with the safety bars (1/ fig.12).

Attach the type nameplate once again to the radiation head. Screw in screws (5:f;g.12) once again. In the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point 3.2.4).

Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting conta;ner.

Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this-O T 2.910 033.01

._... ~ ~..

e l

I J

j

'd i

i Check the light-beam indicator and the radiation in accordance with Parayaph 5 of the instruction," Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron 1", Printing number R 85.0672.03.03.01.01.

t I

i t

r i

4 1

l i

e 1

I

]

I i

b 1

l i

l

^

\\

4 1

i 4

I 3

i 1

1i 1

1 t

I i T 2.910.033 01 1

I i__.,___.. _ _. _.. -. _ _ _ _. _. _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a 4.2. Gammatron 2tR Loading and unloading.

Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.

Loadir.g frame for source exchange item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3, R and Cs, at the container item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 1,2 and R item No. 4190 864 S 3513 head end Intermediate piece for Gammatron 2 and R item No. 4190 989 S 3513 head end Contents:

A.

General remarks B.

Preparatory work C.

Unloading D.

Loading E.

Final work 9

1 O

T 2.910.033 01.

c

'i) r

's, A.

General remarks

()

In both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coup ing device is complete.

R.

..1

=

~

,se s

+

' ^<

^'

^ '^

'}

A.

{ss

$h.

h!

['

  • ^

~

n

.x

~, :' -

B 3

'4j

.3

.~

^

g

~"

sji

f,

O\\

Fig.18 V

1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Conta:ner s de coupling plate 3 = Centering p'ece for 2 4 = Load,ng disc 5 = Support st;de 6 = Head side coupl.ng p! ate 7 = Centering p ece for 6 8 = Rope shng 9 = Load ng rod r\\

f%)

- l9 -

T 2.910 033.01

a On safety:

If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then.the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switcii-on condition, so that all the brakes are acting.

B.

Preparatory work Swing the suppon arm out laterally to about 1700. Prop up the counterbalance arm with a beam (about 1,20 m long).

Turn the radiation head so that the radiation port is directed downwards and the source channelis horizontal. Remove the side cladding from the radiation head.

  • 1 1:::i 2

- ~ s:gr. s

__/;fi s

+

l 7, g

.3..

,, i~; l

~

' fire

~

Fig.19 O

T 2.910.033.01 l l

e

'I

'1 Remove the covering cap (1/ fig.19) by releasing the two screws (2/ fig.19).

[,

Take out the lead block (1/ fig. 20).

Draw out the slot-plate. ensuring that the source drawer remains in position (e. g. by means of the loading rod). Note the position of the slot-plate for assembly later.

Warning: Increased care A frer removing the safety cap (1/ fig.19), the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.

'm 7

u fmy, +

sw

'I

' !!!${s ' I

/

_4;"

O Fig. 20 Replace the lead block (lif tg 20i again and secure the source drawer by screw:ng on the covering cap (1/ fig.19). Then remove the slot plate at the second s.ce of the head. as described previously.

Fasten the intermed: ate piece 12/f g 21) to the radiation head with the two screws (4/ fig. 21).

Do not t:ghten the screws' O T 2.910.033.01

a

.T s

? c '," :, f b ll ' ', :

z,

t y

<,, F E-g

. @: a O

Y

~

f

.k

.2D, y -,.

l 5 C 18

.jy lD 8'

9 e

,t 3 4

L MM p 3;;.

54.;. '.;...

giii N '

g Q......

?G:~

2%4

,,4,_,,

Fig. 21

=%

Screw on the coupling plate (1/ fig. 21) and intermediate piece {2/ fig. 21) firmly with the two screws (3/ fig. 21).

Push the intermediate piece (1/ fig. 22) fully in and t:ghten the two screws (2 f.g. 22) firmly. Spread the centering piece with screw (3/ fig. 22). Tighten screws (4/f;g. 21) firmly. Remove the center'ng p ece aga:n after releasing the spreading screws (3/ fig. 22) and the securing screws (2/ fig. 22)-

'W

. e, 3

e

. g,s e

,1

'\\

.g 11 r

g.

==

s.

p

=

M l

h 7,

Frg. 22 l

l T 2.910.033 01 e

/7 C.

Unloading Bring the transporting container prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame. Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with the screws (1/

fig. 23).

,s f

.-j N

e e

umma pj

)

Transporting Gammatron container head

_I 1

+

j k?

Fig. 24 Fig. 23 Remark:

Since the coupling plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling is made to the required channel.

Push the load'ng rod througn the bored through dummy drawer as shown in fig. 24 and screw firmly to the source dra-wer in the Gammatron head.

Then screw out the safety pins at the plate at tne container side.

Draw the source drawer into the transporting container with the loading rod. In doing so the bored through dummy drawer will be drawn out of the container channei on to the slide. The gripping handle of the loading rod must be held horizontally. When slid.ng the source drawer the area of increased dose (see fig. 9) must be kept clear.

U T 2.910.033.01

Q D.

Loading The load.ng of the Gammatron 2/R in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading. Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower 7

channel). Take out the screening blocks (see 3.1.7).

Warning:

The bored-through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 25 the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rodis screwed through this to the new source drewer. Then the loading can be carried out. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, untilit lies centrally in the transporting container.

'd e

19)

)

_m se -

ss 5$ '.

is o.

/

~

e

,~

s I

$g.

g i

Fig. 25 E.

Final work Separate the transporting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the hf ting carriage and travel it to the side.

Remove the Coupling plate from the Gammatron head.

Reolace the slot plate.

Put the lead protection caps (1/ fig. 20) on both s. des of the radiation head back in position and st ure the source dra-wer with the safety bars (1/f t.19).

O T 2.910.033 01 1

et.

fry, in the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point 3.2.4.),

Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting container, Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this.

Check the light beam indicator and the radiation in accordance with the following unit specific instructions:

Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron 2 - paragraph 5. Printing number R 85.0678.03.03.01.01 Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron R - paragraph 6, Printing number 85.1011.03.03.01.01.

.s-eW' t

7 i

l l

' T 2.910.033.01 I

I

0 4.3. Gammatron 3 Loading and unloading Besides the usual erection tools, the following special tools must be used.

Loading frame for source exchange item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3.

R and Cs at the container item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling plate for Gammatron 3 Item No. 4189 411 S 3513 head end from unit No. 1011/0211 (see general remarks and preparations).

Contents:

A.

General remarks B.

Preparatory work C.

Unloading D? Loading E.

Final work O

O T 2.910 033.01 e

"T A.

General remarks (V

in bo-Ji loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequence!

Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.

[5 * '

'y. ; s e..

s',

9" l%

% sy

,s

~

.p~,.

e d

it r

ng (3

s

/

Fig. 26 1 = Bored-through dummy drawer 2 = Conta:ner side coughng plate 3 = Centering p<ece for 2 4= Load.ng disc 5 = Support slice 6 = Head side couphng p! ate 7 = Centering p'ece for 6 8 = Rope shng 9 = Loading rod O T 2.910 033.01

at f

On safety:

If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the source is to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care-fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switch on condition, so that all the brakes are acting.

B.

Preparatory work Swing out the support arm to about 1700 laterally. Prop up the counterbalance arm with a beam (about 1,20 cm long).

To release the connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum. oull the bracket (1/ fig. 27) forcefully out-wards, turn it through 1800 and allow it to engage positively. Tighten the screw (2/ fig. 27). The link (3/ fig. 27) is seated firmly in the recess in the radiation head. The connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum is broken.

3 2

1 5

A

/

R

' o O?

O O

4 6

' O 4

O c

Fig. 27 i

i O

T 2.910 033.01 - -

e Take off the shutter drive (1/ fig. 28) after unscrewing the 3 screws (2/ fig. 28).

O (3

0*

O

'G g

g qa

((O,g?))g) r l

\\

o

?

e g

if O

O O

(

3 o.

i i\\ 4 b-l N@d g a

l};,

-(

Fig. 28 Fig. 29 O

Unscrew the disc (1/f.g. 29L Warning:

Do not disturb the adjusting screws (2/ fig. 29).

Take out the lead screening (3/f <g 29) after unscrewing the securing screw.

Then remove the short stot p' ate at the rear side of the channel.

Turn the radiation head 50 that the rad:ation port faces upwards and the source channellies horizonta!! Screw out the screw (6 fig. 27) and the two securing screws (4/ fig. 27). Carefully take off the shutter cap (5/ fig. 27).

Draw out the slot p! ate ensuring that the source drawer is held in place (e. g. press the source drawer to the rear in the channel with the loading rod)

Note the position of the slot-Diate for reassembly later.

Note:

The shutter cap werghs 19,5 xg.

Warning: 1.icreased care A fter removing the shutter cap, the source drawer is r'o longer secured against sliding out. T 2.910.033.01

G Fasten the coupling plate (1/ fig. 30) to the radiation head, with the two screws (2/ fig. 30). Do not tighten the screws.

)

' l'

- ' eg b s,, g

'?

C 3,,og,

], x0 s

eN 1s

'l 1

Y ' ',

7 t

J ss X

' s ' l ',' I j;.s.,

/

q 4

a

@'S i

Fig. 30 O

l l

Position the centering piece (1/ fig. 3 n it. courling plate and fasten with the two screws (lif;g 32).

By tightening the screw (2/ fig

'C' " C >. ng plate is centered to the source drawer channel. Subsequently tighten the two screwt (2/ fig. 30).

Remove the centering piece at.. saz.,

y the screws (1/ fig. 32 and 2/ fig. 32).

O T 2.910.033 01 C

y 4

^ # '

Als

', k' +

., 0 ',t ? ;

I i

y c-W9f o

'l $\\

b, L

  • !*h

'. 4 G lj

' ' ;f

,,. ' ~ '^ 3 k

q$

N s.

+

l

^ ' M.

%,6;,

,,,, /

'a se Fig. 31 O

L)

LL r

i*

T f

'b-

's

f:c
4..; g.:

6

+

T c*

G c.

3. :.

v-:

3 fJA k..

1p c}

9...7 i

.y c.-

,.s i.

4 a 2!

gs 2

1 Fig. 32 O

_ 31 -

T 2.910 033 01

e l;,

C.

Unloading Bring the transporting container (see Point 3 of these instructions) prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame.

Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with tne screws (1/ fig. 33).

O P

(

..f bj

.a

~~

9a

< t Ed I

b[ *@]l i

1 M

Transporting Gammatron l

ilio i container head

,d O

~ '

g j

m.

1 i

e m-i

",l t

I s

.k,

-N

~

S

\\

Fig. 34 Fig. 33 Remark:

Since the coupling plate on the container is centered to both channels in the container. care must be taken to en-sure that in each case the coupling is made to the required channel.

Push the loading rod through the bored-througn dummy drawer as shown in f.g. 34 and screw firmly to the source dra-wer in the Gammatron head. Then screw out the safety pins at the plate at the container s>de.

Draw the source drawer into the transpo'ttng container with the loading rod in doing so the bored through dummy drawer will be drawn out of the container channel on to the si.de. The gripp.ng hand e of the load.ng rod must be held horizortally.

When sliding the source drawer the area of increased dose (see fig 9) must be kept clear.

O T 2.910.033.01 -

C D.

Loading

,h The loading of the Gammatron 3 in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading.

Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to e new level (for the lower channel).

Warning:

The bored-through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 35, the bored-through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried % t. In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, until it lies centrally in the transporting container.

4 J

~

\\

S N

.v t

S-

}

c

$ll,M" l

Yl h

O Q,

ll Fig. 35 O T 2.910 033.01

et E.

Final work Separate the trangorting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the lifting carriage and travel it to the s;de.

Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head.

Replace the slot plate.

Fit the shutter cap (1/ fig. 36).

The source drawer is fixed by tightening the screw (3/ fig. 36). Fit the short slot-plate agian on the shutter drive side and the lead screening (3/ fig. 29) and washer (1/ fig. 29).

Mount the shutter drive.

Remake the connection between the shutter drum and the shutter drive. Draw the connection pins (2/ fig. 36) out-wards, turn through 180 and allow them to engage in the hole in the shutter drive. Assist the engaging procedure by 0

turning the toothed wheel (1/ fig. 37),

r O

8 S ;

0

,N

' r _ *G ArPM%^

O 6

)~

hf,'

i l

o o

1 f.

Y i.m 4

@)

o/

.h b

o

)\\

Q

^

/

N, f

/

2 i

4

/

i Fig. 37 Fig. 36 i

O T 2.910.033.01 e

1 in the transporting container, exchange the bored-through dummy drawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point g

3.2.4.).

Unscrew the coupling plates from the transporting container.

Replace the lead screening blocks in the container and close this.

Check the light-beam indicator and the radiation in accordance with Paragraph 9 of the instruction," Adjusting and setting to work Gammatron 3, Printing number S 85.1009.03.03.01.01" 1

I O

l l

1

! T 2.910.033.01 l

O i

4.4 Caesa4ammatron Loading and untoading Besides the normal erection tools, the following special tools must be used.

Loading frame for source exchange item No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Coupling equipment for the Gammatron 1,2,3.

R and Cs, at the container item No. 4191 169 S 3513 Coupling place for Caesa-Gammatron head end item No. 42 79 717 S 3513 (to be purchase via Dept. VT 45)

Contents:

A.

General remarks B.

Preparatory work C.

Unloading D.

Loading E.

Final work O

O T 2.910.033.01 e

A.

General remarks in both loading and unloading, it is essential to follow the prescribed sequencel w.)

Coupling device Before being used, it must be checked to see that the coupling device is complete.

l!

(

T:!:

, 2c' E,^-

'$)

lil'e1 i,i?ilI

] ; 'O' ""A"

{

?:*.

  • % ~

M si a

e W 7:.%A* :

6 i pw d$

h 4

g q -y

_4

%)

Fig. 38 1 = Bored through dummy drawer 2 = Container s6ce couphng plate 3 = Centering p<ece for 2 4 = Load:ng disc 5 = Support si,ae 6 = Head s.de couphng plate 7 = Centering p ece for 8 8 = Centerrng p.ece for 6 9 = Rope sling 10 = Load <ng rod O T 2.910.033.01

.O On safety:

If during the changeover procedure any signs of jamming of the loading equipment become evident, then the' source is l

to be immediately returned to its starting position, the equipment is to be dismantled and the centering procedure care.

j fully carried out once more. During the changeover procedure, the unit is to be left in the switch-on condition, so that l

all the brakes are acting.

B.

Properatory work The carriage of the Caesa4ammatron is travelled downwards. Remove the covering cap at the radiation head.

To release the connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum, pull the bracket (1/ fig. 39) forcefully out-wards, turn it through 1800and allow it to engage positively.

The blocking link (2/ fig. 39) fatches in automatically. The connection between the shutter drive and the shutter drum is broken.

r

~

h. b
g/

%t

.f

N},

2 1

4

+-

O 3h G

G 4

$f en Fig. 39 O

T 2.910.033.01.

c Take off the shutter drive (1/ fig. 40) after unscreweing the 3 screws (2/ fig. 40).

e C-

'O

^

o g

%iQ ks

, e,

  • L B

+

9 m

pp -

o 2

O

h. [

q i

-.(.

A e 9

,;;' m ~ s >

?'.

j Fig. 40 Fig. 41 O

i Unscrew the disc (1/ fig. 41).

Warning:

Do not disturb the adjusting screws (2/ fig. 41).

\\

i Taire out tha lead screening (3/ fig. 41) af ter unscrewing the securing scres. Then remove the short slot plate at the rear side of the channel.

i l

Turn the radiation head so that tne radiation port is facing upwards and the source drawer channellies horizontal!

Support the rad.atron head aga,nst conve gent rotation, since with the coup!ing plate attached and the intermedtate pie ce, it would turn convergently and the source channel no longer lie horizontally. Screw out the screw 13/ fig 39) and the two securing screws (4/f g 39) at the front side.

Carefully take of f the shutter cap (5/f tg. 39L Draw out the slot plate ensuring that the source drawer is held in place (e. g press the source drawer to the rear in the channel with the loading rod). Note the position of the slot plate for reassembly later.

Warning: Increased care A fter removing the shu tter cap, the source drawer is no longer secured against sliding out.

O T 2.910 033.01

Q Fasten the intermediate piece (1/ fig. 42) to the radiation head with the two screws (2/ fig. 42). Do not tighten the screws yet.

L' y

Mr.

Q L'

i

\\ j';s3 s,;<,, p,, p

,,, s.,

f K

~

g3

.; ;& r,7n::-

-J : >pl ~ ' r>.+

.w r CS-6A n

M.,

>.: q;.w.

,e

.e

~

if7'T

." f 0,

e

.a w

gD e

! (..' a(

}+. w,, / g?.

{, y a~

i G

p' I.J "32:j,fd::ll.h.,

Fig. 42 O

Insert the centering piece (1/ fig 43) into the intermediate piece and secure wrth the two screws (2/ fig. 43).

The intermediate piece is centered to the source drawer channel by tighten;ng the screw (3/f;g 43). Then tighten the two screws (2/ fig. 42).

At the head side attach the couphng plate to the intermediate piece.

Remove the centering piece af ter unscrewing the $ crew (2/ fig. 43 and 3/ fig 43).

O T 2.910.033 01 c

l C.

Unloading Bring the transporting container (see Point 3 of these instructions) prepared for unloading up to the radiation head by V

pushing the hoist carriage along the crane frame.

Raise the transporting container, until the two coupling plates can be secured together with the screws (1/ fig. 44),

(i)

/I

%i y&.lf '

A ql

--j

-g-a f

e 4i g

=

Transporting Gammatron

- 3 j

container head

(

3 ElIo I 2

=...l 3

i C

- -y g

Fig. 45 Fig 44 Remark:

Since the couoting plate on the contaoner is centered to both channels in the container, care must be taken to ensure that in each case the coupling os made to the required channel.

Push the 'oad.ng rod through the bored through dummy drawer as snown in fig 45 and screw firmly to the source dra-wer in the Gammatron head Then screw out the safety pins at the plate at the Conta:ner side.

Draw the source drawer mto the transporting container with the loading rod.

In doing so the bored thr7 ugh dvmmy drawer wol be drawn out of the Container channel on to the shde. The gripping hand'e of the load.ng rod "nust be r. aid horizontally.

When shd ng the source drawer 'he are..e of increased dose isee fig. 9) must be kept clear, i

i T 2.910 033 01 l

l

D.

Laoding The loading of the Caesa4ammatron in an analogous manner, follows the reverse sequence to the unloading.

4 Release the connection of the container to the Gammatron head and move the transporting container to a new level (for the lower channel).

Vrarning:

The bored through dummy drawer must likewise be used for the loading. As shown in fig. 46, the bored through dummy drawer is placed on the carrier slide and the loading rod is screwed through this to the new source drawer. Then the loading can be carried out.

In doing so, the dummy drawer is only pushed in so far, until it lies centrally in the transporting container, f Yft E

e

\\

\\

I El

/

?

jf

~,

,,i s /

5 Fig. 46 O

T 2.910.033 01 - -

e E.

Final work Separate the transporting container from the Gammatron head, set it down on the lifting carriage and travel it to the V

side.

Remove the coupling plate from the Gammatron head. Replace the slot plate.

Fit the shutter cap (1/ fig. 47).

The source drawer is fixed by tightening the screw (2/ fig. 47). Fit the short slot-plate again on the shutter drive side and the lead screening (3/ fig. 41) and washer {1/ fig. 41).

Mount the shutter drive.

Remake the connection between the shutter drum and the shutter drive. Draw the connection pins (3/ fig. 47) out-wards, turn through 1800 and allow them to engage in the hole in the shutter drive. Assist the engsging procedure by turning the toothed wheel (1/ fig. 40).

r-r.

p

.3 go 3

2 o

o l

Og L

'f '

e

.l_

. x, Fig. 47 in the traneporting conta;ner. excoange tre bored througn dummy crawer for the normal dummy drawer (see Point

3. 2.4 L Unscrew the couni:ng p;ates f rom the transport:ng container.

Replace the lead screen ng biocks n the conta ner and close this Check the bght beam ind cator and the rad atron in accordance with Paragraph 7 of the instruction, " Adjusting and sett;ng to work Caesa Gammatron, Pr nt ng number S 85 1008 03 03 01.01" i

O T 2.910.033.01 l

l 1

1 5.

Procedure in unusual situations Sy proceeding as directed in these instructions, all precautions for a safe loading or unloading of the radiation head have been taken. Loadings in accordance with these instructions have been proven many tirnos by the Sierr ens AG, Medical Engineering Group, in Erlangen without the slightest incident.

If contrary to expectations a situation of radiation danger arises, then the following regulations in respect of action apply:

All those involved must leave the room endangered by radiation, immediately.

The room endangered by radiation and any neighbouring rooms which may also be endangered must be secured against the entry of any persons not involved.

Those involved should then formulate a picture of the situation which has arisen.

The following serv:ce offices are to be informed immediately:

Dept. TVS Tel.09131 App.84 25 68 Dept. VT Tel.09131 App.84-3108 If this is not possible, Dept. VT is to be informed by telex.

6.

Equipping and dispatch regulations for the transporting container a) Memorandum from TVS of the 27th Oct.1976 b) Instructions for loading the container S 1747, Sheets 1-6.

7.

Forms for the changeover The forms must be fully completed. Copies of them are to be sent to TVS and VT 43. The forms are to be requested from VT 43. An example form is attached.

O 1

T 2.910.033.01 -. - -

C Erlangen,27th October 1976

- TVS 1 et-rh 23 59 Note for the instructions for the transporting container, Ioeding and unloading Remark:

The instruction for loading the container S 1747 Sh. I to 6 is produced in accordance with the " Regulations for the safe Transport of Radioactive Materials 1967 Edition" of the international Atomic Energy Agency, safety series N 6, Vienna 1967. These regulations were revised in 1973 and were issued with new paragraph and margin numbers.

A change in the instruction and the licence for the type B container in accordance with the new l AEA - regulations should, however, take place first in the middle of the year 1977 following the issue of the revised international railway traffic rules RID, which is produced in accordance with the new regulations. We received th*s information by telephone on the 19th Oct.1976 from Dr. Kolb of the Physikalisch Technischen Bundesanstalt in Brunswick.

The change in the instruction and application for the change to the currently valid licence No. 6.32-E 13 will be dis-cussed in good time with Dr. Kolb.

O Elsner b

I T

O T 2.910 033.01

Q Advice for loading the container S 1747

1. The person dispatcher of these instructions is in each case responsible to see that they are observed.
2. The transpotQ j container was developed in accordance with the regulations of the " International Atomic Energy Agency, afety series No. 6, Vienna 1967 (1973)" and it is licenced as "B (U) Packaging" in accordance with (

(C-1.2 (228 241) under the identical No. D/DB 0003 B (U) by the Bundesanstalt for Material Testing, for the con-veyance of60Co and 137Cs sources in special form.

3. In accordance with l AEA-A-2.15 (228-241) there must be available from the manufacturer, a licence for the sour-ces from the responsible authorities in his country.
4. A total activity of at most 17000 Ci, Co40 or Cs 137 is permissible for the transporting container.

The Cs 137 may contain up to 10 % of Cs 134. Both types of source correspond to group lli,in accordance with A activity limit). The transporting container is so screened that it corresponds to category til yellow in accor-(401-411 dance with C-3.4 (c) (508 and 509). The " transport index" in accordance with A 2.16 (137139) is dependent on the source in question, it must not exceed the value 10. Index 10 corresponds to 10 mr/h/1 m from the centre of the transporting container. In accordance with A-2.5 and C-3.4 d (531 and 532) the nominated values can be to some extent exceeded under special circumstances.

5. The transporting container must be in good order when used for conveyance.

a) All surf aces, including those in the channels and Cn the attached parts must be checked for contamination. In accordance with B 1 a, up to 0.5 mr/h are permissible at the surf ace and in accordance with 81 b, up to 10-4 u Ci/cm2 (504 and 549 553) for loosely adhering contaminated particles.

b) The transporting container may only be dispatched complete. It consists of a two part outer container, whose base part has an insulating pack and two runners and a wooden lining which is seated firmf y in the base, or upper 1 to 13, in the inner container part of the outer container. According to the nature of the dispatch from source drawers, lead drawers and plugs are arranged.

In the inner container, both channels. source and lead drawers as wen as plugs must be clean and dry. The two c) sealing surf aces at the container and the covering flanges must be clean and free of burrs. All 24 screws (M 20 x 40) of this covering flange must be properly tightened and the safety catch with padlock must be se-Cured.

d) The inner container must be inserted in the base of the outer container so that the red markings on the inner con-tainer and base coincide with each other.

e) The upper part of the outer container must be lowered onto the lower part so that the dowel pin is in hne with the dowel hole.

5 O T 2.910 033.01

c i

i 6

f) All the 12 screws (m 16 x 220) of the outer container must be grossed, fitted with locking washers and tightened g

firmly, The safety catch must be secured with the padlock.

g) A transporting container loaded with radiation sources may not have more than 200 mr/h at any point on the surface of the outer container and not more than 10 mr/h at 1 m from the centre of the transporting container, corresponding to the category Ill-yellow.

(See sheet I section 4).

h) For increased safety against unauthorized opening, the joint between the upper and lower parts of the outer con-tainer con be locked approximately at the place where the dowel pin sits.

6. Information on the outer container a) In accordance with C-3.5.5. and C-3.5.6. (516 and 517) a nameplate 17 99 469 S 1747 must in every case be durably attached to the outer container, b) When being dispatched without radiation sources, the self adhesive label 17 99 295 S 1747 with the wording

" Empty packaging having contained radioactive materials" must be attached B 1.-4. (313).

The " Radioactive" warning label 17 99 303 S 1747 from earlier deliveries must be covered or removed B 1.-4 j

(313). Part. E fig. 4 (section V, fig. 4).

c) When being dispatched with radiation sources, labels 17 99 303 S 1747, with information on the nature and acti-i vity of the contents as well as information on the transport index must be attached to 2 opposite sides of the ou-ter container. Any already existing labels 17 99 295 S 1747 must be removed.

7. When dispatching the container to the source supplier 2 labels 17 99 303 S 1747 are to be included with the advice papers.
8. The keys for the 3 padlocks are to be issued along with tid advice note
9. The source supplier is to be informed in which channel (No. I above and 11 below) the delivery should be made.

k i T 2.910.033.01

O Nature of Channel Loading d,spatch i

l i

3 17 82 044 S 1747 4

(

42 81 11 S 1601 17 99 253 S 1747 ll 1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci 1

1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci 42 81119 S Igo1 1

Y

\\

I 2

\\

g j

1 x Cc60 up to 11000 Ci where the sources are of equalstrength Y

/

gg k-17 99 253 S 1747 i Ioad the stronger source in channel ll 42 82 489 S 1603 q 17 99 279 S 1747 1799 261S 1747 4

/

/

l 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 3

Y 42 81 119 S 1601

\\

Y

/

11 1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci

/

L 17 99 253 S 1747 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 261 S 1747 j\\

[

]

2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci 4

Y Y

42 81 119 S 1601

\\

V

/

ll 1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci N._

17 99 253 S 1747 /

17 99 253 S 1747 -

\\

/

17 82 044 S 1747 IY l

I il 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 L1799261 S 1747 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 i

1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci

\\Y

/

r 6

s

/

\\

V 11 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci L.17 99 261 S 1747

_/

42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 i

1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci j

v

?

7

\\

/

Y Y

ll 2 x Cs 37 up to 4250 Ci 1

\\. - 17 99 261 S 1747 -/

42 82 489 S 1603 I

2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci j

8 1

2 x Cs 37 up to a total of 9000 Ci 1

s Y

Y ll L 17 99 261 S 1747./

42 81 119 S 1601 1

1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci i

Y

/

9 k

17 82 044 S 1747

/

17 99 253 S 1747 y - nad,ation e,rection of tre sources 1

1 T 2.910 033.01 17 H 253 S 1747 Nature of Channel Loading

[

j dispatch 15 15 296 17 82 044 C'

S 1747 S 1747 1

10 20 96 402 20 M 303 1 x Co60 up to 9000 Ci gg S 3513 S 3502 in round source carriers 40 76 030 S 1747 15 15 295 S 1747 1 x Co60 up to 6000 Ci g

o in round source carriers l 9 g

t )

6 20 96 402 20 96 303 1 x Co60 up to 9000 Ci S 3513 S 3502 ll 40 76 030 S 1747 42 81 119 S 1601 17 99 253 S 1747 l

1 x Co60 up to y -

)

in square source carriers s

y 9

o d

N 1 x Co60 up to gg in round source carriers 1 x Co60 up to in round source carriers e

i E

d-y I

N 1 x Co60 up to l

in square source carriers 42 81 119 S 1601 17 99 253 S 1747 y = Radiation direction of the sources,1000 Ci Co60 corresponding to 1150 rhm,1000 Cl Cs137 = 200 rhm Caution!

For comprehensive fitting instructions for round carriers see

" Source dispatch S 3502 Sh I" D

a W 45Mengert T 2.910.033.01

o AN VCN ti.... -...;..

UB Med Erlangen

,Q s..rs.it.,

V VT 43 T.i.ron Erlangen ihre Zeiden und ihre Naeriet vom Unsere Zeicen Ort und Tag Load changeover form Confirmation of the change at a Gammatron 1,2,3, R, Cs, S installation with Co40 or Cs-137 source.

Installation Test number BZ-number Location Customer Source old new j

Certificate number BZ-number Certificate date Manufacturer Source diameter in cm Certificate dose rate RHM i

l Drawer number Unload / load date Whereabouts of unloaded source Remarks and special occurrences Place, Date....

Technician..

i Tech. Manager.

k !!

~

41G T 2.050.033.03.03.05 SIEMENS G AMMATRON S 65/S 80 UCv.

g l oewuove T 2.050.033.03.02.05 3

05.78 h j Be-und Entladeanleitung Loading and unloading r i, I l

Die Be und Entladung des GAMMATRON S ist nur mit Loading and unloading of the GAMMATRON S may

)

dem Siemens Transport Behalter Typ B 17 99188 S 1747 only be performed with the Siemens transport container y

g moglich.

type B 17 99188 51747.

sia 4 I Au8er dem ublichen Montagewerkzeug wird folgendes Apart from the usual assembly tools, the following f!!'I Spezialwerkzeug benotigt:

special tools are required:

I jd Ladegestell zum Sach Nr.44 39 451 SH 085 Loading frame for Art. No. 44 39 451 SH 085 Quellentausch changing sources Eeladewerkzeug und Vor.

Sach-Nr.20 96 923 S 3513 Loading tools and device Art. No. 20 96 923 S 3513 richtung fur G AMM ATR ON S for the GAMMATRON S Diese Be-und Entradeanleitung ist Bestandteil behord.

This loading and unloading manual is a part of the licher Umgangsgenenmigungen.

authorized handling permission documents.

{}l j

Anderunge nur mit Zustimmung von TVS (Technische Changes may only be made with the approval of TVS Ij Verbindungsstelle - Strahlenschutz) bei der S;emens AG,

( technical radiation protection department ) at Med. Eriangen. Siemens AG, Med Erlangen fI t Unterlagen: Documents: {yz f Allgemerne Hinweise und Vorbe'eitungen zum Be und Gene al notes and preparat ons for loading and un-j Entladen einer Co 60 bzw. Cs 13 7 Quene. T 2.910.071.01 91 loading a Co 60 or Cs 137 source. T 2.910.071.01.01 3 j inhalt Contents li Seite Page h f

1. Allgemeines 2
1. General remarks a

s

2. Vorbereitende Arbeiten 4
2. Preparation j

83

3. Einleitende Arbeiten zur Entladung 6
3. Work prior to unloading i

l 'I - 8 i ?8'I

4. Entladung 9
4. Unloading I

s

5. Beladung 12
5. Loading k

l h l' 3

6. Abschlie8ende Arbeiten 16
6. Re-assembly and checking i

g 4

7. Sicherheitshinweise 17
7. Safety measures I

l t ] 14 11

8. Verhalten bei auSergewohnlichen 19
8. Behaviour in exceptional situations e 18 Situationen
9. Bestuckung und Versandvorschriften 19
9. Fitting out and freighting instructions j

If( fur den Transportbehalter for transport container - 'sl deutsch/englisch O s'eue"s ^xtie"oesensc"^r1 8ere><8 uee'z'm' sche te<8m>x e<'emeem = = = = = = = = = = = = = =. .";*.Z'.*= *l*O*;;=.~JC"^r.' *,*, lJ'.CC " ~**"

1. Allgemeines 1. Generel remerks Unter Be-und Entladen des GAMMATRONS versteht The terms " loading" and " unloading" apply,3n the case man das Verschieben des die Kobaltquelle enthaltenden of the GAMMATRON, to the shif ting of the drawer with Quellentrsgers aus dem Transportbehilter in den its cobalt source from the transport container into the Strahlerkcpf und umgekehrt. Bei der Umladung wird der treatment head and vice sersa,in this process,the drawer Quellentrager mit der alten Quelle aus dem Strahlerkopf with the old source is moved from the head to the trans-in den Transportbehalter und dann der Quellentrager mit port container, and the new source is moved from the der neuen Quelle aus dem Transportbehalter in den Strah-transport container into the head. lerkopf gefuhrt. Beim Lade-bzw. Entladevorgang ist in der beschriebenen When loading or unloading, the sequence described must Reihenfolge vorzugehent be adhered to exactly! Das GAMMATRON S darf nur unter der verantwort-The GAMMATRON S may only be loaded or unloaded lichen Leitung einer von der Siemens AG. Med. Erlangen under the supervision of an expert trained by the geschulten, fachkundigen Person be-oder entladen wer. Siemens Medical Engineering Group in Erlangen. He den. Dieser Fachkundige muS Uber ausreichende Kennt-must have adequate knowledge and experience in hand-nisse und Erfahrung im Umgang mit radioaktiven Stof-ling radioactive materials, and of radiation protection fen,in Strahlenschuttfragen und in der Strahlenme8-and radiation measuring techniques. technik verfugen. Gegebenenfalls muS dieser Fachkundige von der Siemens if necessary, the expert must be requested from the AG, Med. angefordert werden. Siemens Medical Engineering Group. Die nachfolgend beschriebenen Arbeiten mussen von All work described in these instructions must be per-mindestens 2 Personen ausgefuhrt werden. formed by at least 2 persons. Die zweite Person muS vom verantwortlichen Fachkun. The second person must have been instructed by the digen uber die durchzufuhrenden Arbeiten und die auf. responsible erpert on the work he has to perform and tretenden Gefahrdungsmoglichkeiten unterrichtet sein. the sources of any hazard which may be involved. 1.1. Strahlenindikatoren und Strahlenme8gerate 1.1. Radiation indicators and radiation measuring i Zur Messung mu8 ein Dosisleistungsme8gerat (Me8be. equipment } reich mindestens 1 mR/h - 1 R/h) vorhanden sein, For this, a dose rate meter (measuring range at least au8erdem mu8 jede beteiligte Person ein integrierendes 1 mR/h - 1 R/h) must be available. Furthermore, all Taschendoismeter (Pen. Dosimeter oder aquivalentes persons involved must wear an integrating pocket dosi-Dosimeter) und eine Strahlenschuttplakette (Filmdosi. meter (Pendosimeter or equivalent instrument) and a meter, Glasdosimeter etc.) tragen, radration protection badge ifilm dosimeter, glass dosi-meter etc1 1.2. Beladewerkzeug und Vorrichtung 1.2. Loading tools and equipment Vor dem Einsatt ist das Beladewerkzeug Sacn.Nr. Before starting work check the set of tools. Art. No. 20 96 923 S 3502 auf seine Vollstandigkeit zu uber-20 96 923 S 3502, to see that it is complete: prufen: 4 i i O T 2.050.033.03.01,- ~ _ _ _ _ _

i I 7 (n) v e- . aQ t .CD-o y Q g' a %s w_ 98me] same A, ] J, l j '2 4 Fig.1 1= Hebezeug fur Blende 1= Lifting a m for collimator 2= Flaschenzug fur Blende 2= Hoist for collimator 3= Seilschlupf fur innenbehalter 3= Lif ting slings for the inside transport container 4= Seilschlupf fur Blende 4= Lif ting slings for the collimator 5= Ringschrauben tur Blendenbefestigung 5= Ring-headed screws for collimator attachment 6= Bleiring 6= Lead ring 7= Kopfseitige Kopplungssche.be 7= Attachment plate (for fitting to head) 8= Schraubbolten 8-Threaded counterwe'ght supports 9= Gegengewichte 9= Counter-weights 10 = Ladestange 10 = Loading rod 11 = Blindsch;eber 11 = Dummy drawer 12 = Hohlfullstucke 12 = Feed blocks for source drawer 13 = 8ehalterse tige Kopplungsscheibe 13 = Attachment plate (for fitting to container) 14 = Beladescheibe 14 = Loading disk for container 15 = Div. Schrauben 15 = Various screws (packet) Achtung: Wichtiger Hinweis Caution: Important notice Der Quellentrager muG sich einwandfrei vom Transport. It must be possible to slide the source drawer without behalter tum Strahlerk opf und umgek ehrt schieben 135 doff?culty from the transport container into the therapy sen, ohne tu klemmen Oder antustoGen. head and vice versa, without jamming or collision. Sollte beiemer Umladung ein Klemmen des Quellen-If. when changing sources, the loading tools should tragers auftreten, so ist d>eser sofort in seine Ausgangs. become jammed, the source drawer must immediately be stellung ta bringen. Die Vorrichtungen sind tu demon. returned to its original position, the equipment dismoun. treren und die Arbeiten noch ernmal sorgfalltig von An ted and all work performed once more from the begin fang an durchzufahren. ning. Sollte der Quellentrager erneut klemmen, so sind die if the source drawer should stilljam. all work should be Arbeiten einzustellen und es ist sofort die fur stopped and the service department in the Medical GA MtfA TRONtustandige Service Abteilung bei UB Med Engineering Group at Erlangen responsible for the Erlangen tu verstandigen GA MMA TRON mus t be notified immediately. Is T 2.050 033 03 01

a e 2. Vorbereitende Arbeiten 2. Preparation Gerat einschalten und bis zur Beendigung aller nach-Switch on the unit and leave it in this condition until all folgend beschriebenen Arbeiten im eingeschalteten the work described below has been completed. Zustand belassen. T W 1 i ? 4 5 -3 $i(1 2 l ( d a i i er i jw w Fig. 2 0 Rotate the arm to 2100or i70, according to room con-Tragarm je nach Raumverhaltnis auf 210 oder 1700 ditions, and secure with locking rod (16). schwenken und mit Arretierstange (16) sichern. Fit the rod into the hole at the rear uf the arm and secur e it Die Arretierstange ist auf der einen Seite in d;e am Trag. to the stand at the other end with an M 10 screw. arm befindhche Bohrung zu stecken und auf der anderen With the 65 modv unscrew the penumbra trimmer, or S*ite am Stativ mit e ner Schraube M 10 festzuschrauben. with the 80 modA pull it out and close both sides of the Ha'bschattentrimmer eim 65er Gerat abschrauben bzw. colhmator. Rem.we colhmator cover (f 7). beim 80er Gerat herausitehen und beide Blendenseiten Set up the loading tackle accord ng to room conditimis schhe8en. Blendenabdeckung (17) abnehmen. Ladege. stell je nach Raumlichkeit aufstellen (siehe Fig 31. mit (see fig. 3), assembly the l f ting arm and coilimator hoist. Bring the transport container (18) under the tackle Ausleger und Hebezeuge komplett:eren t>oum as shown in fig 3 and tighten the hf ting tackle Transport Innenbehalter (18) gemaK Fig. 3 unter Lade, up between it and the boom so that it serves as a counter-gesteil bringen und tugeordneten Seilzug zum Hebezeug We rght urter straf fe Spannung bringen (dient als Gegengewicht). I - k [9h.j r p x 3 s u s - b s 'sW /

m, g eb j

[ ,_~YN 19 w J .N f' T ^, 5 F-M q @ df h/ 1 \\ g \\. e Fig. 5 Fig. 4 T 2.050.033 03 01

o Beim B0er Gerat sind am Blendenpaar "A" die Halb. With the 80 model, remove the penumbra trimmers from schattentrimmer herauszuziehen und diese Blendenseite the collimator pair "A"and open this side of the colli-f ~N 2J 6ffnen, an der Blendenseite "B" sind die Halbschatten. mator, sliding in the penumbra trimmers into the colli-tr mmer einzuschieben und diese Seite ist zu schlieBen. mator side "B" and closing this side. Stecker k 1 (19) abschrauben. Unscrew plug k 1 (19). Die vier Schrauben fur die Blendenbefestigung heraus. Unscrew the four screws attaching the collimator, schrauben. Screw the two ring-headed screws (5) into the collimator Zwei Ringschrauben (5) an die Blende ansetzen (Fig. 4). (fig. 4). Unscrew switch s 2, previously marking its posi-Schalter s 2 abschrauben, vorher Stellung markieren. tion. Using the small lifting tackle loops to be found in Blende mit Hilfe des bei dem BelaJewerkzeug vorhan-the loading tool set, suspend the collimator from the denen kleinen Seiltchlupfes am Flaschenzug anhangen hoist and withdraw from the head (withdrawal must be und vom Kopi herausheben (Zugrichtung genau senk-exactly vertical, adjust the collimator hoist together with recht, dazu Ladegestell mit Ausleger ausrichten) und in the lif ting arm and suspend at its highest position (fig. 3). hochster Stellang hangen lassen (Fig. 3). Achtung: Caution: Mua das Ladegestell aus irgendesnem Grund verschoben If the A frame holding up the hoists has to be moved *cr werden, insbesondere beimomentan entspanntem Seil-any reason whatever, especially if the tackle to the con. zug zum Innenbehalter, so ist dies besonders vorsichtig tainer has to be slackened momentarily, this must be durchzufuhren, da durch das Gewicht der Blende das performed with special care as the weight of the cosh-Ladegestellleicht kappen kann. mator can easily tip up the frame! Beim Herausher;en der Blende am G AMM AIHON S 30 When removing the collimator from the GAMM A. ist darauf zu achten, da8 die H&bschattentrimmer n cht TRON 5 80, take care that the penumbra trimmers are bescnadigt werden. not da ")ged. A Achtung: Caution: Bezuglich der an der Blende behndhchen URAIV-Tede Consult safety instructions with re-sind die Sicherheitshrnweise beachten. gard to the uranium parts of the colhmator. Bleir+ng !6 Fig. 5) in den Strahlerkopf einle jen. Dabei Place the 'ead ring (6 't g. 5) ento the head. The plug k i soll der Stecker k 1 in der Aussparung des B!e:ringes zu should be located in the space provided for it in the iead liegen kommen. ring } i / CD 1 C \\ / g w k-N e v s y y y p l/f as A- \\ ~ l 7-r* y N e w 4 yfgh / s i \\' j$ [ _ Nw M 7, \\ f f xlp 4%{ c z g d Fig. 6 7 T 2 040 033 0 '

e Kopfseitige Kopplungsscheibe mit dem zugeordneten Place the head attachment plate with its proper centering Zentrierrand in den Blendentagerungsring einsetten und face onto the coilimator ring, and screw on (fig. 6. anschrauben (Fig. 6). Hierbei ist mit Sorgfalt vorzugehen, Great care must be takten here, as inmrrect centering denn eine nicht einwandfreie Zentrierung kann zu einem can lead to jamming of the source rod when loading or Verklemmen des Quellenriegels beim Be und Entladen unloading. Check by viewing through the opening for fuhren. the collimator cable (arrow fig. 7); rotate the attachment Sichtkontrolle durch den Ausschnitt furs Blendenkabel plate through 1800 and check to see that the attachment (Pfeil/ Fig. 7). Kopplungsscheibe um 1800 drehen und plate is in an even horizontal position on the collimator kontrollieren;da8 die Kopplungsscheibe auf den Blenden-ring. lagerungsring gleichma8ig aufliegt. Attach the counterweights using the proper supports (8) Gegengewicht mit Hilfe der Befestigungsbolzen (8) auf-(fig. 7). Rotate the head so that the head attachrnent plate setzen (Fig. 7). Strahlerkopf so drehen, da8 die kopf-(coupling surface) is in vertical position, if necessary, settige Kopplungsscheibe (Kopplungsflache) senkrecht rotate the attachment plate so that it does not collide steht. Falls notwendig, Kopplungsscheibe drehen, damit with the A frame. die Gegengewichte nicht am Ladegestell anstoGen. 3. Einleitende Arbeiten zur Entladung 3. Work prior to unloading Beschrieben wird eine Umladung. A source e= change is described. Zuerst die Entladung und anschlienend die Beladung. Unloading takes place prior to loading. Hierzu darf sich im Transportinnenoenaltar nur eine For this, the internal transport container may only con-Quelle befinden (vorwiegend im Schacht II). tain one source (pref erably in channel ll). Fur die Entladung werden zusatthch eir.e Adapterhu'se For unloading, an additional adapter sleeve (21) and a (21) und ein Schutiriege: (20) Art. Nr.1515 295 S 1707 pratective bar (20), Art. No.1515 295 S 1707, are re-benotigt. Diese sind kein Besandteil des Beladewerk. quired. These do not constitute a part of the loading zeuges,da diese spater im Behalter whie ben tools as they are later to remain in the container. 3.1. Vorbereitung des Ladewerkzeuges 3.1. Preparmg the loading tools e S\\ ^ \\ '4 (@)::x:x:(@^ -- } v N/ ~ ) li 3 ) <~ l4 / 'm C / l Fig. 8 l l Ladestange (10) nach Abnehmen des Schutirohres durch Af ter removing the protective tube, slide the load.ng rod den runden Bhndschieber (11) schieben (10) through the round dummy drawer (11). Couple on Den Schuttriegel (20), durch Verdrehen der Ladestange the prutective tungsten bar (20) by turning the loading (10) im Uhrteigersinn. ank oripeln. ( Auf laufen und rod (10) in a clock wise direction. { Tak e care that the Bohrung an den Kopplungsflachen achten (F"l 8). locating pins engage in their holes (fiq 8l). Firmly tighten Die Iwes innentechskantschrauben am Klemmstutk the 2 Allen screws on the clamping piece (10 a) so that (10 a) fest ansiehen, wodurch die erfordaAhe,7 ir e the necessary rigid union is estabbshed for later couphng Einheit zum spateren Anb oppeln an den Quellentager onto the source dianer. hergestellt ist. T 2 050 093.03 01 e [] N V l I.. ~ ~ Fig. 9 Ober diese starre Einheit ist in der in Fig. 9 gezeigten in the sequence shown in fig. 9, slide on a hollow feed Reihenfolge ein Hohlfullstuck (12) und eine Adapter-block (12) and an adapter sleeve (21) over this rigid hUlse (21) zu schieben, union. Pay attention that the flat non<hamfered sur-Oabei ist darauf zu achten, daS die nicht angeschrigte face (arrow, fig. 9) is facing downwards. Fliche (Pfeil/ Fig. 9) nach unten zeigt. 32. Vorbereitung am Transportinnenbehilter 32 Preparatens on the inner transport container Achtung: Caution: Beiallen Arbeiten am Transportinnenbehalter, bei with all work on the inner transport container, where denen die Quellentrager gegen Herausrutschen nicht the source drawers are not secured against sliding out, gesichert sind, ist der Transportinnenbehalter sicher auf the inner transport container must be placed safely on dem Boden abzustellen und waagrecht auszurichten. the floor and lined up vertically. o g a /~ \\ Muz42 ~ l 1 p 9 w 25a 9 25b -.= ..x er = y b b \\ R b w~.:. b h_b _j a 10b i I I-Fig.10 Fig.11 Vom Transportinnenbehalter die beiden Deckel (22) ab-Unscrew the two covers (22) from the inner container. schrauben. Remove the two lead blocks (23) from the upper Die beiden Blerklotte (231 vom oberen Schacht (1) her. channel (1). ausnehmen. Es ist iu prufen, ob in diesem Schacht der Blindschieber Check to see that the dummy drawer fits into this sitzt. Im Regelfall befindet sich die neue Quelle in channel As a general rule, the new source should be Schachtll. located in the channel ll. %/ T 2.050.033.03.01

O Nun den zusammenmontierten Blindschieber mit Hohl-Now slide the dummy drawer with the hollow feed block fullstuck und Adapterhulse in den oberen Schacht ein-and adapter sleeve as assembled, together into the upper schieben. Dabei schiebt sich auf der anderen Seite der channel. On the other side, the rectangular dummy insert Vierkant-Blindschieber (24) heraus. Dieser ist abzu-(24) is pushed out. nehmen. Das zweite Hohlfullst6ck ist auf dieser Seite einzuschie-This should be removed. Slide the second hollow feed ben, dabei liegt die nicht angeschragte Flache unten. block into this side, the nonchamfered surface must Durch diesen Vorgang wird gewahrleistet, da8 der here face downwards also, Schacht ohne Quelle in jeder Phase des Be-oder Ent. This process guarantees that the channel without a !Wevorganges ausgefullt ist und somit keine erhohte Oo-source is occupied in all phases of loading or unloading sisleistung auftreten kann. to reduce the radiation risk. An jeder Kopplungsscheibe rnussen sicn I.ve Spe.r Two locking screws (25 a + 25 b/ fig. Ill must be located schrauben (25 a/25 b/ Fig.11) oe'inden, de immer ein. in each attachment plate and must always be screwed m. gedrehtsind. This guarantees that the source drawer cannot Mide out Dadurch wird gewahrleistet, da3 der Quehentrager nicht accidentally. Hrausrutschen kann. M ai'eneit ge Kopplungsscheibe (13) au der einen Screw on the container attachment plate (13) onto the f Suite des BeMlters anschrauben (M 6 x 25). Hier ist side of the container (M 6 x 25). Attention must here ebenfalls auf eMwandf reie Zertriersoq ts.eha Pfe.1 also be paid to accurate centering (otnerwise jamming Ilg.11) zu achten (sonst Vern!emmv tern Be und Ent-mil occur during load;ng or unloading). Slide the loading laden moglich). Auf der anderen Saite ce> B.a.isters d,e disk (14) over the loading rod on the other side of the Beladescheibe (14) uber die Udesta l.e f ah' n und eben. conta ner and also screw on (fig 11) to the container. f a'Is anschrauben (Fig.11) Sicherheitskette (10 b) zur Hubbegrenzung an der Be-Hook in the safety chain (10 b) to the loading disk (14) ladescheibe (14) einhangen in order to 1;mit the travel of the loading rod. I N - ctachement plate I Kopf seitige t 'O' fittirg to head) b / Koppluncs / scheibe } N ~1 1 - wA(h x \\ W-n m - - _ - _ _ g 4 cm_m ( \\S ~ ~~ g 'a ' ) / y o t__ j .y Bleiring w k W. lead rmg l, '( Behalterseitige _ / L-C t j-e Kopplungs-i scheibe \\ attachement plate 25a 13 (for fitting to conta,ner) Fig.12 Fig.13 nnenbehder hoch2iehen, so dad der Zugeordnete Raise the container so that the appropriate channel (1) is % nacht (Schacht il mit dem G AMM ATRON Kopf-at the same level as the cannel in the G AMM ATRON schicht auf gleiche Holie kommt. head. Innenbehalter gegen 1en Kopf f ahren Uber me zuge-Move the container up against the head. Centering takes ordneten Zentrierringe erfolgt automat.sch me Zentrie-place automatically when the appropriate centering rings rung (siehe Fig.12), engage (see fig.12) Kopfseitige und behaf terse:tege Konplungssche:be mit Screw the head and the container-attachment plates to-4 Schrauben (M 6 x 30) verschrauben (Fs 13). gether with the four screws (M 6 x 30) tfig 13L Sperrschraube 125 al von Schacht I herausdrehen Unscrew the lockina screw (25 al from the channel to be used. T 2 050 033 03 01 G 4. Entladung 4. Unloading Die mit der Be oder Entladung eines GAMMATRON be-Persons charged with loading or unloading a GAMMA. [V] auftragten Personen dUrfen sich wahrend des eigentlichen TRON must not stay within the shaded area during loa-Ladevorganges, d.h. fur die Duaer der Gammatrom Ver-ding,i.e. for as long as the G AMM ATRON shutter is schluBof fnung und insbesondere beim Verschieben des opened and especially when shifting the source drawer, Quellentragers nicht innerhalb des schraf fier ten Bereiches as increased exposure to radiation would occur. aufhalten, da hier erhohte Dosisleistung auftritt. ".^..^.^..^....v.<<.

  • !; $$*.N ! **!-

!!!* */ ! ! *!*/ * ***** **$$**$$$$* **$

$$.$$$$$:.p*$$$::: *::erhohte Strahfung
$$gg:$$$p*
  • *:$.v:*$$$$$:4.v$$,:: *$.lncreased radiation dose l$$.$:::.$.:9

..,.,.w..v...w..,w. .w...v.w.w.w.w..w., v w.. w. w.w.v.v.w..

e. w v.

w e. kein Personenaufenthalt w.-

  • :.0..*.**.*:..* :v. v.-....O.wG,* O,

...we y Avoid this area

w. e.v..

v..v,..... .w......w...e

v...v, w.w.w w..

w .v. - . U.;,;.;.;9;;, $$:: *: 9:.9:9:.: r v..w w .v.. 4,,... w.v. v '..w. v... -H+,9.-,c., ...v . Ay.-

.:e.:

/m w.-? Ladevorn htung c g' v.v.

  • l.
  • l*

Loading rod 4., d[( l Behalter U Container Kopf e. .v. Head .v. .v. .w. w. .v.

v. w.

.w

w.,

.-..m.... w ..v.. v. .,v.w.v.w..

1. Person

.v.,,;+ ' w w .- *,w.w..v.v.v.v.:.. v L ll. .v.v.w 1st person .w.v. -

v...

.v.v.w.v. =-_ ..v. +. ;.ww...w.< Verschlua-Getriebe .v .w.v.v .v.:.y., e n... "*..T.w*...../. Shutter gears ,, w.v.w.m.u.w.v..v...v.w. w.v.v.v.v,vv :.' o.. w .v w .y - ....v.w..w.v.v v vv.v e v v.- .v..w v c. y w...w.- v. -___vw-w.v.w v.w..v. y .v.... w.

9*$

. v.v$$.:v:Y. $.:erhohte Strahiung 9*$$:.:$$:- ..,...y.:.v.:.:.:.:.y. I n..c.re.a.s.e.d..r.ad t.i.o.n. d.o.s.e....v.w.v v ia 4,.v.:.. +; :., ...v,w.....,.,.,......, ,..v..... ........... v v..v. w v...v... ....v.v..v.v,.,.....,...,w.w., ...v. v v. v.. ..f..

2. Person 2nd person Fig.14 l

l ') J T 2.050.033.03.01 1 I

o t ~ lf* &~~.~~.~,~~ 'A V ~ f = /'" _[ cc.1cm 20 e Fig.15 l Person 1 l l1st person l Blindschieber (11) und Schutzriegel (20) mit Hilf e der Using the loading rod (10), slowly slide the dummy Ladestange (10) langsam in den Kopf schieben, bis der drawer (11) and the protective tungsten rod (20) into Schutzriegel an der VerschluStrommel (26) anstoSt, sa-the head until the tungsten rod comes into centact with schlieBend den Schutzriegel etwa 1 cm zuruckziehen the shutter drum (26), then pull the tungsten rod back (Fig.15). approximately 1 cm (fig.15). a NI g f '3R A d c 't.' f r, ll, \\.; 3g; n),)3 Q{ l yI -+'M j 4 i h 20 efe e e x Fig.16 Fig.17 l Person 2 l l2nd peren l Grun rote Scheibe zur Anzeige der Verschlu8stellung ab-Unscrew the green / red disk indicating shutter position. schrauben. Uncouple the shutter drum from the shutter gears using Die VerschluBtrommel ist mittels des Kopplungshebels lever (27). (27) vom VerschluSgetriebe zu entkoppeln. For this, pull out the lever approximately 1 cm and push Dazu ist der Kopplungshebel ca.1 cm nach au8en zu towards the treatment head, thus uncoupling the shutter ziehen und in Richtung Strahlerkopf zu schwenken, da-drum from the gears. durch ist die VerschluBtrommel vom Verschlu8getriebe Using the lever, the shutter drum is to be turned through abgekoppelt, appro x.180 to the " shutter open" position and held Die Verschlu8trommel ist mittels Kopplungshebel um there. (See fig.16). 1800 in Stellung "Verschlu8 auf" zu drehen und in dieser Stellung zu halten (siehe Fig.16). O T 2.050 033 03 01.

a l Person 1 l l1st person l \\ Blindschieber (11) und Schutzriegel (20) einschieben, bis Slide in the dummy insert (11) and the tungsten rod (20) j der Schutzriegel am Quellentrager anst68t. until the tungsten rod comes into contact with the source Nun durch Rechtsdrehen der Ladestange (10) den Schutz. container. Now, by turning the loading rod (10) to the riegel am Que!!entriger ankoppeln (BajonettverschluS). right, couple the tungsten rod to the source drawer Die Verbindung (Schutzriegel/Quellentriger) ist herge. (bayonet lock). stellt wenn: The connection between tungsten rod and source con. tainer has been established when:

1. Die Ladestange sich nicht mehr nach rechts verdrehen
1. The loading rod cannot be turned any further to the liBt.

right

2. Die Ladestange sich nicht mehr herausziehen li8t.
2. The loading rod cannot be pulled outwards.

l Person 2 l l2nd person l Schrauben der Arretierstange (29/ Fig.16) losen ur9 die Loosen the screws of the locking rod (29/ fig.16) and Arretierstange etwa 5 cm herausziehen (Fig.16), pull the rod out approximately 5 cm (fig.16). I ~ ~ / 9 - (- I 41 I O E 88 Fig.18 l Person 1 l l1st person l Ladestange (10) mit Blindschieber, Schutzriegel und Quickly pull out the loading rod (10) with the dummy Quellentrager zugig so weit herausziehen, bis die Kette insert, tungsten rod and source holder until the chain (10 b) leicht gespannt ist. Die Quelle befindet sich nun (10 b) is tight. The source is now located in the con. im innenbehalter. Sperrschraube (25 a) am Schacht I tainer. Replace the locking screw (25 a) into its channel. Wieder eindrehen. l Person 2 l l2nd person l Die VerschluBtrommel (26) mit Hilfe des Kopplungs. Turn the shutter drum (26) through 1800 using the hebels (27) um 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS zu" drehen coupling lever (27) into " shutter closed" position and und an das VerschluBgetrieDe wieder ankoppeln. couple back onto the shutter gear system. Cosismessung: Sicherheitsprufung ob sich die Quelle Dose-rate measurement: Make a safety check to see that auch im Innenbehalter befindet. the source is actually located in the container. O l T 2.050.033.03.01

c l Person 1 und Person 2 l1st person and 2nd person l lonanbehalter durch Losen der vier Befestigungsschrau. Separate the container from the head by removing the ben vom Strahlerkopf trennen. four attaching screws, innenbehalter wegfahren und auf dem Boden absetzen. Move the container away and place on the floor. Caution: Achtung: The container must be horizontal;it must not be moved Der Innenbehalter muG waagrech t stehen, er darf jetzt from this position as the source drawer has not been nicht bewegt werden, da der Quellentrager bis zum Wiederanschrauben der behalterseitigen Kopplungs. secured against sliding out until the container attach-scheibe gegen Herausrutschen nicht gesichert ist. ment plate has been again screwed on! l Person 1 l l1st person l Die zwei innensechskantschrauben am Klemmstuck (10 a) Loosen the two Affen screws on the clamping piece (10 a) losen. Ladestange (10) gegen den Uhrzeigersinn ver. Unscrew the loading rod (10) in anti <lockwise direction drehen, bis der Blindschieber vom Schutzriegel getrennt until the dummy drawer is separated from the tungsten rod. ist. Kette (10 bl an der Beladescheibe aushangen. Disconnect chain (10 b) from the loading disk. Ladestange aus dem Blindschiebar herausziehen und Pull out the loading rod f rom the dummy drawer and Blindschieber abnehmen. remove the latter. Im Innenbehalter verbleibt der Schutzriegel mit dem The tungsten rod remains in the container with the Quellentrager. source. Sperrschraube (25 b) wieder einschrauben. Screw the locking screw (25 b) back in the loading disk. Behalterseitige Kopplungs und Beladescheibe vom Innen. Unscrew the container attachment plate and loading disk behalter abschrauben. from the conta;ner. 5. Beladung 5. Loading ' / / i,,/ / '/ 3 ,, / / / / .:r_ % g) \\wl ( _ .w t12.. >n (12 ) I O O / 25a 25b j 'ht H O '/ /,/ / -7', <// / / / ,/ / / / / /, /,f/ 14 / 9' Fig. 20 1 O T 2.050.033.03.01 e Hohlfallstacke (12) vom Schacht der alten Quelle Remove the hollow feed blocks (12) from the channel (Schacht 1) herausnehmen. containing the old source. O FUllstacke (30) von der Adapterhulse der neuen Quelle Unscrew the spacers (30) from the adapter sleeve of the V (Schacht II) abschrauben und an die Adapterhalse der. new source and screw onto the adapter sleeve of the old alten Quelle (Schacht 1) anschrauben. source. Hohlfallstacke (12) in Schacht il einschieben (darauf Check which end of the new source is marked with a achten,da6 die nicht angeschragte Seite nach unten zeigt) numl;ar (e.g. R 18). Side the hollow feed blocks (12) into the channel with Fig.19. Behalterseitige Kopplungsscheibe (13) wieder an der the new source (paying attention that the nonchamfered Seite des innenbeh&lters anschrauben, an der der neue side is facing downwards (Fig.19). Quellenriegel mit einer Nummer (z.B. R 18) gekenn. Screw the container-attachment plate (13) back onto the side of the container where the new source rod is marked zeichnet ist, with a number (e.g. R 18). Die Beladescheibe (14) auf der anderen Behalterseite an-Screw on the loading disk (14) onto the opposite side of schrauben (Fig. 20). the container (fig. 20). Ladestange (10) durch den Blindschieber (11) schieben. Slide the loading rod (10) through the dammy drawer (11). Den Blindschieber mit Ladestange am Schutzriegel der Couple the dumr7y drawer with the loading rod to the neuen Quelle (Schacht II) wie folgt ankoppeln: tungsten rod of the new source as follows: Sperrschraube (25 b) von Schacht il herausdrehen. Screw out the locking screw (25 b) from the cannel to Blindschieber mit ladestange in den Schacht einfuhren, be used. dabei muS der Zapfen an der Stirnseite des Blindschiebers Slide the dummy drawer with the loading rod into the in die Bohrung an der Stirnseite des Schutzriegels ein-channel, taking care that the pins on the front of the

greifen, dummy drawer fit into the holes on the rear of the tungsten rode.

Ladestange (10) im Uhrzeigersinn verdrehen. Dabei Turn the loading rod (10) in a clockwise direction, pay-mUssen die Zapfen des Klemmstockes (10 c) in die Boh* ing attention that the pins of the clamping piece (10 c) rungen des Blindschiebers eingreifen. lock into the holes of the dummy drawer. Ist die Ladestange fest eingeschraubt, so sind die beiden Once the loading rod is firmly screwed in, screw tight innensechskantschrauben am Klemmstuck (10 al festzu-the two Allen screws on the clamping ece (10 al schrauben (Fig. 21). (fig. 21), p Kontrolle der richtigen Kopplung: Ladestange im Uhr-Check for correct coupling: Turn the loading rod in a reigersinn drehen, dabei muS sich der Quellenriegel clockwise direction and see that the source rod (visible (sichtbar auf der Gegenseite) mitdrehen. on the opposite side) also turns. Sicherheitskette (10 b) an der Beladescheibe einhangen. Hook the safety chain (10 b) onto the loading disk, innenbehalter hochziehen, so dab der zugeordnete Raise the inner transport container so that the appropriate Schacht (Schacht ll) mit dem GAMMATRON-Kopf-channel is at the same level as the G AMM ATRON head schacht auf gfeiche Hohe kommt. channel. Innenbehalter gegen den Kopf fahren. Uber die zuge-Move the container to contact the head. Centering takes ordneten Zentrieringe erfolgt automatistli die Zentrie-place automatically when the appropriate centering rings rung. engage. Kopfseitige und behalterseitige Kopplungsscheibe mit Screw the head and container-attachment plates together 4 Schrauben M 10 x 25 verschrauben. with 4 screws M 10 x 25. O . T 2.050.033.03.01

1 e I 0 0 25a lf/~/A///TD/_) [ [-- H O e -E N ~ D j 1/-(m )~ / e @~ 8@ Fig. 21 Sperrschraube (25 a) vom Schacht !i herausdrehen. Remove the locking screw (25 a) from tne connei ;n use. Wahrend des Beladevorganges nehmen die Personen die During loading, the personnel take up the positions shown in Fig.14 gezeigte Stellung ein. in fig.14 I ' fyS& % ++ ) 'f {p \\; ~ djip; n - -l ( c v g, a s/ .b * !g - -i . 39! '.19 ,- - 1 -12 : (x Ad7 [ 1., ~ @@/ ee e e ~ Fig. 22 Fig. 23 l Person 2 l l 2nd person l Schrat. ben der Arretierstange (29) losen und Arretier. Loosen the screws of the locking rod (29) and pull the stange etwa 5 cm herausziehen, rod out approximate;y 5 cm Die VerschluBtrommel ist mittels des Kopplungshebels Uncouple the shutter drum from the shutter gear system (27) vom VerschluBgetriebe zu entkoppeln. using lever (27). For this, pull lever approximately 1 cm outwards and to-Dazu ist der Kopplungshebel ca. I cm nach auBen zu wards the head, thus uncoupling the shutter drum from ziehen und in Richtung St:ahlerkopf zu schwenken, da. the shutter gear system. durch ist die Verschlu8trommel vom VerschluGgetriebe abgekoppelt. l T 2.050.033.03.01 e Die Verschlu8trommel ist mittels Kopplungshebel um Using the coupling lever, turn the shutter drum through 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS auf" zu drehen und in 1800to the " shutter open" position and hold in this f dieser Stellung mit der Hand festzuhalten (siehe Fig. 22). position by hand (see fig. 22), \\ Person 1 1st person Blindschieber, Schutzriegel und Quellentrager mit Hilfe Quickly push the dummy drawer, the tungsten rod and der Ladestange zGgig in den Kopf einschieben, bis der the source drawer into the head using the loading rod, Quellentrsger am Ende des GAMMATRON-Kopfschach. until the source drawer comes into contact with the end tes anst6Et. AnschlieBend Ladestange nach rechts drehen, of the GAMMATRON-head channel. Then turn the dabei muB: loading rod to the right making sure that: Person 2 2nd person Arretierstange wieder einschieben, bis sie in die Bohrung pushes the locking rod back in until it fits into the hole im Quellentrager einrastet und festschrauben, in the source drawer and can be screwed tight. 1 Person 1 1st person Uberprufung der Arretierung des Quellentrigers: Checking the locking of the source drawer: Eine Bewegung des Quellentrigers darf weder durch Zug Movement of the source must not be possible either by noch durch Drehung im Uhrzeigersinn mittels Ladestange pulling or turning in the clockwise direction. Finally, turn m6glich sein. AnschlieBend ist die Ladestange gegen den the loading rod in the anti <lockwise direction (approxi. Uhrzeigersinn zu verdrehen (ca.1/2 Umdrehung), bis der mately 1/2 turn), until the tungsten rod is separated Schutzriegel vom Quellentrsger gelost ist. (Bajonettver. from the source holder (bayonet lock). Now pull out the schluB). Nun den Schutzriegel mit Blindschieber 1 - 2 cm tungsten rod and the dummy drawer by 1 - 2 cm. herausziehen. Person 2 2nd person Die VerschluStrommel ist mit Hilfe des Kopplungshebels The shutter drum is then to be turned through 1800 to (27) um 1800 in Stellung "VerschluS zu" zu drehen und the " shutter closed" position using the lever (27) ar'd an das Verschlu3getriebe anzukoppeln. again coupled to the shutter gear system. l Person 1 l l 1st person l Schutzriegel mit Blindschieber m den Transportinnen-Fully withdraw the tungsten rod and drawer. behalter zieheni Sperrsenraube (25 a) wieder einschrauben. Screw the locking screw (25 a) back in. Innenbehalter durch Losen der sier Befestigungs-Separate the irmer transport container from the ! ead Ly schrauben vom Strahlericopf trennen. f tmovity the four attaching screws. Innenbeha'tet wegf ahren und auf dem Boden abstellen. Move container away and lower to the floor. Kopplungs. und Beladescheibe abnel men. Remove the attachment plate and Ic.ading disk. Das Hohlfulhtucir (12/ Fig.19) aus dem Schacht ll Take the hollow feed block (12/ fig.19) from the channel. nehmen. Slide the square dummy drawer (24) from this side into Viereckigen Bhndschieber (24) von dieser Seite in den the channel thus pushing the round dummy drawer with Schacht il schieben und dabei den runden Blindschieber the tungsten rod, adapter sleeve and second hollow block mit Schutzriegel, Adapterhulse und zweitem Hohlfull. from the channel, stuct aus dem Schacht schieben.

T 2.050.033.03.01

e This guarantees: Dadurch ist gewahrleistet: That if a source should still be located in the other Sollte im Schacht I noch eine Quelle sein, kann keine erhohte Strahlung auftreten, da der Schacht ohne Quelle channel, no increased radiation dose will occur as the immer mit einem Blindschieber gefullt ist, channel without a source is always filled with the dummy Anschlie8end BleifUllstack (23) einschieben und die drawer. Finally, slide in the lead fiiler (23) and fit the beiden Abdeckungen (22) am Innenbehalter anschrauben. two covers (22) back onto the container. 6. AbschlieBende Arbeiten 6. Final assembly Nun den Strahlerkopf so verdrehen,daG die kopfseitige Now turn the head so that the head attachment plate Kopplungsscheibe (Kopplungsflache) waagerecht steht. (coupling surface) is in horizontal position. Gegengewicht und deren Befestigungsbolzen abmontie. Remove the counter-weights and their supports. Remove ren. Kopfseitige Kopplungsscheibe nach Losen der head attachment plate after removing the screws. Take Schraube abnehmen. Bleiring (6) aus dem Strahlerkopf the lead ring (6) from the head, herausnehmen. Caution: Achtung: Vom Herausnehmen des Blerringes bis zum Einsetzen der Between removing the lead ring and replacing the colli-Blende tritt an der Blendenseite des Strahlerkopfes er. mator, an increased radiation leakage occurs at the colli-mator side of the therapy head! hohte Leckdosisleistung auf. Fit the collimator back into the head and connect up Blende wieder in den Kopf einsetzen und Stecker K 1 miteinander verbinden. plug K 1 with its socket. Remove the ring headed screw (5) from the collimator Ringschrauben (5) von der Blende abschrauben. Attach the collimator to the head using the four proper Blende mit Hilfe der vier Schrauben befestigen. screws. Blendenabdeckung (17) aufsetzen und anschrauben. Place on the collimator cover (17) and screw into position, Arretierstange (16) abschrauben und im Gerat aufbe. Unscrew locking rod (16) and store within the unit. wahren. Check the treatment head for proper functioning of all Strahlerkopf auf sein Funktion uberpruf en! movements! S l T 2.050 OJ3 03 01 l l

7. Sicherheitshinweise 7. Safety measures (3 Sicherheitsvorkehrungen beim Umgang mit Safety measures when working with uranium V Uran-Teilen parts Caution: Achtung: The GAMMA TRON S contains URANIUM parts as shown Das GAMMA TRON S enthalt URAN.Teile gemaa fol. in the following illustrations. When working with the gender Abbildung. Bei Arbeiten am Strahlerkopf und an treatment head and the collimator, the following safety der Blende sind die nachstehenden Sicherheitshinweise instructions are to be observed. zu beacnten. ~ g-f n / m's h h W j W N' ~\\\\~w ((qW i @(Qr"4-N N h xN. - H I' H _.

  • Br BrNN s

\\ s 6 N / M' W\\s\\NN

\\Pb x

N i g k- 'N \\ N ^' \\ k k';-d N['k\\ 'N ,h; [\\ N, 1 kN /. NN N i x NW ^ k ( Ar l \\ l { ) M(uh I l.f(p s' uJ 4 l t-j. NPb PbD ' Pb W (i f , YL y f VY 'Pb ON O ' e] rl u w & e i d e ^ t[\\Pb Pb 9, Pb Pb l ._.PbM CL !i d@ .J WM( i L- - wJ rj /sw ii , I, L

L.__- % ; i W-fj

$W Trimmerausfuhrung bei ausziehbaren Halbschattentrim. Trimmer construction with pull out penumbra tr: mmc mern (GAMMATRON S 80) (GAMM ATRON S 80) Trimmeraus'uhrung bei abnehmbaren Halb>chatten. Trimmer construction with removeable penumbra trimmern (G AMM AT RON S 65) trimmers (G AMM ATRON S 65) Pb = Blei Pb = lead Br = Bronze Br = bronze St = Stahl St = steel W = Wolfram W = tungsten U = abgereichertes Uran U = depleted uranium Die Dosisteistung an der Oberflache der Uran-Bauteile The dose rate at the surface of uranium pa-ts is within liegt in der GroBenordnung von 50 mRlh. Besondere Ab. the region of 50 mR/h. Special shielding measures are schirmmaGnahmen sind nicht erforderlich. Es muR nur not necessary. Care must only be taken that direct con. dafur gesorgt werden, dab die direkte Kontaktberuhrung tact (touching) with uranium parts is reduced to an abso-der Uranteile auf das erforderliche Mindestmaa be. lute minimum. schrankt wird. \\ G T 2.050.033.03.01

Die zuginglichen Uranteile sind oberflichenbehandelt Accessible uranium parts have a treated surface and must und dUrfen deshalb in keiner Weise bearbeitet werdent therefore not be worked upon in any wayf Ferner ist bei den Ein-und Ausbauarbeiten der Blende in addition, the greatest care must be taken when fitting mit grMter Sorgfalt vorzugeheni and removing the collimatori All uranium parts which have been damaged or cannot Schadhaft gewordene oder aus sonstigen GrUnden nicht be used for any other reasons must be immediately re-mehr verwendbare Uranteile sind umgehend der Siemens turned to Siemens AG, Medical Engineering Group, AG, Med Erlangen zuzufUhren. Erlangen. Personen, die mit schadhaft gewordenen Uranteilen in Persons who have come into contact with damaged ura-BerUhrung gekommen sind, mUssen nach Beendigung der nium parts must wash their hand thoroughly with water Arbeiten und insbesondere vor dem Einnehmen von and soap af ter terminating work and especially before Speisen ihre Hinde grUndlich mit Wasser und Seife rei-eating. nigen. O O TVS/Meier l l VT 45/Hain l T 2.050.033.03.01 RVT 5/Kriemann

a

8. '/orhalten bei au8ergew6hnlichen Situationen
8. Action in unexpected situations Bei Einhaltung der vorliegenden Anweisung sind alle By the observation of these directions, all the precau-p Vorkehrungen fur ein sicheres Laden oder Entladen tions have been met for safely loading the radiation des Strahlerkopfes getroffen. Ladungen nach dieser head. Loadings in accordance with these directions Anweisung wurden bei der Siemens AG, UB Med have been carried out many times by the Medical Erlangan, ohne die geringsten Zwischenfille vielfach Engineering Group of the Siemens AG in Erlangen, without incident.

erprobt. Sollte wider Erwarten eine strahlengef 8hrdende Sit-If contrary to expectations a situation of radiation uation auftreten, so gelten folgende VerhaltensmaB-danger should arise, then the following instructions regeln: apply: Alle Beteiligten verlassen sofort den strahlengefhbr. All the persons involved immediately leave the room deten Raum, endangered by radiation. Der strahlengef&hrdete Raum und evtl. mitgefihrdete The room endangered by radiation and possibly neigh-Nachbarriume sind gegen Betreten unbeteiligter Per-bourning rooms also endangered by radiation must be sonen zu sict ern ! secured against the entry of persons not involved I Die Beteiligten sollten sich ein Bild von der einge-Those involved should formulate a picture of the sit-tretenen Situation verschaffen. uation which has arisen. Folgende Dienststellen sind unverz0glich telefonisch The following departments are to be informed imme-zu unterrichten: diately: Abteilung TVS Tel.09131 App.84-2568 Department TVS Tel.09131 App.84-2568 Abteilung VT Tel. 09131 App. 84-3108 Department VT Tel. 09131 App. 84-3108 Sollte dies nicht moglich sein,in Abt. VT per Telex If ithis is not possible, Department VT ist to be in-zu verstandigen. formed by telex.

9. BestUckung und Versandvorschriften fur den
9. Fitting out and dispatch directions for the Transportbehulter transport container a) Notiz von TVS 1 vom 27. Okt.1976 a) Notice from TVS 1 of the 27th Oct.1976 b) Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behalters S 1747 b) Direction for loading the container S 1747, Sheets Blatt 1-6.

1-6 10.Umladeformular

10. Reloading forms Die Formulare sind grundsatzlich auszuful:en, Kop en The forms must be fully fnled out and copies sent to davon sind an TVS und VT 43 zu senden. Formulare TVS and VT 43. The forms are to be requested from sind bei VT 43 anzufordern. Musterformular ist anbei.

VT 43. A sample form is enclosed. f m l T 2.050.033.03.03 l i

c Erlangen,27th October 1976 TVS 1 el-rh 23 59 O Notiz zur Anweisung fur die Transportbeh5lter Note for the instructions for the transporting Be-und Entladung container, loading and unloeding Anmerkung: Remark: Die Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behn;ter S 1747 The instruction for loading the container S 1747 Sh.1 Bl.1 bis 6 ist nach den " Regulations for the Safe Trans-to 6 is produced in acccrdance with the " Regulations port of Radioactive Materials 1967 Edition " der Inter-for the safe Transport of Radioactive Materials 1967 national Atomic Energy Agency, safety series N6, Wien Edition " of the International Atomic Energy Agency, 1967" erstellt.Diese Regeln sind 1973 Uberarbeitet und safety series N 6, Vienna 1967. These regulations were mit neuem Absatz bzw. Randnummern herausgekommen, revised in 1973 and were issued with new paragraph and margin numbers. Eine Anderung rier Anweisung und des Zulassungsscheines A change in the instruction and the licence for the type fur den Typ8 Behalter nach den neuen IAEA Regeln 8 container in accordance with the new IAEA-regula-soll jedoch erst Mitte des Jahres 1977 nach Ausgabe der tions should, however, take place first in the middle of Uberarbeiteten internationalen Eisenbahnverkehrsord-the year 1977 following the issue of the revised interna-nung filD, die nach den neuen Regeln erstellt ist, er-tional railway traffic rules RID, which is produced in folgen. Diese Auskunft erhielten wir telefonisch am accordance with the new regulations. We received this 19.10.1976 von Herrn Dr. Kolb der Physikalisch-Tech-information by telephone on the 19th Oct.1976 from nischen-Bundesanstalt Braunschweig. Dr. Kolb of the Physikalisch Technischen-Bundesan-stalt in Brunswick. O Die Anderung der Anweisung un,d die Antragstellung The change in the instruction and application for the fur die Anderung des zo r Zeit guitigen Zulassungsscheines change to the currently valid licence No. 6.32-E 1-3 Nr. 6.32-E 13 wird mit Herrn Dr. Kolb rechtzeitig ab-will be discussed in good time with Dr. Kolb. gesprochen. Elsner T 2.050.033.03.03 Anweisung fur die Beladung des Behiltes s S1747 Advice for loading the container S1747

1. Verantworlich f0r die Einhaltung dieser Vorschriften
1. The person dispatcher of these instructions is in each (m

ist der jeweilige Absender. case responsible to see that they are observed. L

2. Nach den Vorschriften der " International Atomic
2. The transporting container was developed in accor-Energy Agency, safety series No 6, Wien 1967 (1973) dance with the regulations of the " International Ato-

"wurde der Transport Behalter entwickelt und ist als mic Energy Agency, safety series No. 6, Vienna 1967 ."B (U) Verpackung" nach IAEA C 1.2 (228-241) unter (1973)" and it is licenced as "B (U) Packaging" in der identical No D/DB 0003 B (U) von der Bundes-accordance with I AEA (C-1.2 (228-241) under the anstalt fur Materialpr0 fung zur Bef6rderung von 60Co identical No. D/DB 0003 B (U) by the Bundesanstalt und 137 Cs Quellen in besonderer Form zugelassen, for Material Testing, for the conveyance of 60Co and 137 Cs sources in special form.

3. Far die Quellen muS nach IAEA A 2,15 (228 241) vom
3. In accordance with l AEA-A-2.15 (228-241) there Erzeuger eine Zulassung seiner zustandigen Landes-must be available from the manufacturer, a licence beh6rde vorhegen, for the sources from the responsible authorities in his country.
4. Zugelassen sind fur den Transport Behalter eine Go-
4. A total activity of at most 17000 Ci, Co-60 or Cs 137 samtaktivitat von h6chstens 17000 Ci, Co-60 oder is permissible for the transporting container, cs 137.

Das Cs 137 darf bis zu 10'% Cs 134 enthalteri. Beide The Cs 137 may contain up to 10% of Cs 134. Both Quellenarten entsprechen' der group l11 nach A 3 types of source correspond to group 111, in accordance (401 411 Aktivit&tsgrenze). Der Transport-Behditer with A-3 (401411 activity limit). The transporting con-ist so abgeschirmt, da8 er der category lil-yellow tainer is so screened that it corresponds to category nach C 3.4 (c) (508 und 509) entspricht. Der "trans-lli yellow in accordance with C-3.4 (c) (508 and 509). port index" nach A 2.16. (137139) richtet sich nach The " transport index" in accordance with A 2.16 den vorhandenen Quellen. Er darf den Wert 10 nicht (137 139) is dependent on the source in question. It Oberschreiten. Index 10 entspricht 10 mr/h/1 m vom must not exceed the value 10. Index 10 corresponds Zentrum des Transport Behalters. Als " Full load" to 10 mr/h/1 re f om the centre of the transporting b nach A 2.5. und C 3.4 d (531 und 532) konnen die container. In ace.ordance with A 2.5 and C-3.4 d genannten Werte unter besonderen Bedingungen (531 and 532) tae nominated values can be to some noch etwas uberschritten werden. extent exceeded under special circumstances.

5. Der Transport Behalter muS zum Versand in ordent-
5. The transporting container must be in good order lichem Zustand sein.

when used for conveyance. a) Alle Oberflachen, auch die in den Schachten und a) All surfaces, including those in the channels and an den Einbauteilen, mussen auf Verseuchung on the attached parts must be checked for con-UberprUf t sein. Zugelassen sind nach Bla bis tamination.'In accordance with 81 a, up to 0,5 zu 0,5 mr/h an der Oberflache und nach B1b bis mr/h are permissible at the surface and in accor-zu 10'4/u Ci/cm2 (504 und 549-533) fur lose an-dance with B 1 b, up to 10'4/ u Ci/cm2 (504 and haftende Verseuchur.aspartikel. 549 553) for loosely adhering contaminated par. icles. b) Der Transport Behalter darf nur komplett versendet b) The transport;ng container may enly be dispatched werden. Er besteht aus einem zwmteihgen AuSen-cor9plete. It consists of a two-part outer contair er, beha:ter, dessen Bodenteil ein Dammpaket und whose base part has an insulating pack and two zwei Kufen besitzt, und einer Holzauskleidung die runners ard a wooden lining whk h is seated firmly fest im Boden bzw. Oberteil des AuSer benalters in the bsse, or upper part of the outer cortainer. sitzt. Im Innenbehalter sind je nach Versandart 1 According to tne nat;re of the dispatch from 1 to bis 13 Quedenschieber, Bleischieber und Pfrop'en 13, in the inner contair.er source drawers, lead angeordcet, drawers and plugs are arranged. T 2.050.033.03.03 i .-._,_-,_____m.,

c) Im innenbehulter massen beide Schichte, Quellen-c) In the inner cont 6.er, both channels, source and und Bleischieber sowie Pfropfen sauber und lead drawers as well as plugs must be clean and dry. trocken sein. Die zwei Dichtungsflichen am Behul-The two sealing surfaces at the container and the iter und den Abdeckflanschen massen gratfrei und covering flanges must be clean and free our burrs. sauber sein. Alle 24 Schrauben (M20 x 40) dieser All 24 screws (M 20 x 40) of this covering flange Abdeckflansche massen gut angezogen und die must be properly tightened and the :afety catch Sicherheitsriegel mit HingeschloS abgesichert se:n. with padlock must be secuted. d) Der Innnenbeh&lter muS in das trockene Bodenteil d) The inner container must be inserted in the base des AuGenbehilters so eingesetzt sein, dab die roten of the outer container so that the red markings on Markierungen an innenbehditer und Bodenteil sich the inner container and base coincide with each gegenUber stehen,

other, e) Das Oberteil des AuSenbehilters muS so auf das e) The upper part of the outer container must be Unterteil abgelassen werden, dab der PaSstift dem lowered onto the lower part so that the dowel PaSloch gegenUber steht.

pin is in line with the dowel hole. f) Alle 12 Schrauben (M 16 x 220) des AuSenbehbiters f) All the 12 screws (M 16 x 220) of the outer con-massen eingefettet, mit Sicherungsringen versehen tainer must be greased, fitted with locking washers und fest angezogen sein. Der Riegelstift ist mittels and tightened firmly.The safety catch must be se-HingeschloS zu sichern. cured with the padlock, g) Ein mit Strahlenquellen beladener Transport-Be-g) A transporting container loaded with radiation halter darf, der category 111 yellow entsprechend, sources may not have more than 200 mr/h at any nicht mehr als 200 mr/h an irgendeinem Punkt der point on the surface of the outer container and not Oberflache des AuSenbehalters und nicht mehr als more than 10 mr/h at 1 m from the centre of the 10 mr/h in 1 m vom Zentrum des Transport Behal-transporting container, corresponding to the cate-ters haben. gory lli yellow. (Siehe Blatt 1 Abs. 4). (See sheet 1 section 4). h) Zur erh6hten Sicherheit gegen unbefugtes Offnen h) For increased safety against unauthorized opening, kann die Trennfuge zwischen Ober und Unterteil the joint between the upper and lower parts of the des AuSengehalters etwa an der Stelle, wo der PaB-outer container can be locked approximately at stift sitzt, versiegelt werden. the place where the dowel pin sits.

6. Angaben am AuSenbehaiter
6. Information on the outer container a) In jedem Fall muS am AuGenbehalter nach C 3.5.5 a) In accordance with C-3.5.5. and C-3.5.6. (516 und C-3.5.6.1516 und 517) ein Kennschild and 517) a nameplate 17 99 469 S 1747 must in 17 99 469 S 1747 dauerhaft angebracht sein.

every case be durably attached to the outer con-tainer. b) Bei Versand ohne Svahlenquellen muS das Selbst-b) When bei. g dispatcned withour radiatinn sources. klebeetikett 17 99 295 S 1747 mit dem Wortlauf the self-adhesive label 17 99 295 51747 with the " Empty packaging having contained radioac' ave wording " Empty packaging naving contained radio-materials" angebracht sein 8.1. 4 (313).Abgedeckt active materials" must be attached B 1.-1. (311). oder abgenommen muS sein Bl.-4. (313) das "Ra-The " Radioactive" warn.ng.abel 17 99 303 S1747 dioactive" Warnschild 17 99 303 S 1747 von fruheren from earlier del;verres mu-t be covered or removed Lieferungen Part. E Fig. 4 (Section v. Fig. 4). B 1.-4. (3'3) Part. E fig. 4 (section V. fig. 4). c) Pei Versand mit Strahlenquellen mussen an 2 gegen- . c) When being dispatched with radiatmn sources, labels Uberliegenden Seiten des AuSenbehalters Schilder 17 99 303 S 1747, with information on the natu.e 17 99 303 S 1747 mit den Angaben uber Art und and activity of the contents as well as information Aktivitat des Inhalts sowie der Angabe des Trans-on the transport index must be attached to 2 oppo-port Indexes angebracht sein. site sides of the outer container. Ev. vorhandene Schilder 17 99 295 S 1747 mussen Any already existing labels 17 99 295 S 1747 must entfernt sein. be removed. T 2.050.033.03.03 e

7. Bei Versend des Benuiters zum Quellen4ieferenten
7. When dispatching the container to the source supplier, sind den Begleitpapieren jeweils 2 Schilder 2 labels 17 99 303 S 1747 are to be included with the i

17 99 303 S 1747 beizulegen. advice papers.

8. Die Schlossel fur die 3 Vorhingeschl6sser sind den
8. The keys for the 3 padlocks are to be issued along Begleitpapieren beizugeben, with the advice note.
9. Dem Quellenlieferanten ist Angabe zu machen,in
9. The source supplier is to be informed in which channel welchen Schacht (No. I oben und il unten) die Lie-(No. I above and 11 below) the delivery should be forung erfolgen soll.

made. 1 4 4 l I i VT 45Avengert T 2.050.033.03.03 4 ) ,e- - - - - - - -. -, - - - - = - - ~ ~ -

G Versandart Schacht Beladung Nature of Channel Loading I j 17 82 044 S 1747 f ] 42 81 11 S 1601 \\ / 1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci 17 99 253 S 1747 [ 11 1 x Co60up to 11000 Ci l 1 x Co60 bis 6000 Ci 1 x Co60up to 6000 Ci 42 81 119 S 1 01 I Y -I ll 1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci 2 bei ungl. Ladg. stirkere Quelle in Schacht 11 \\ \\ / 1 x Co60 up to 11000 Ci V where the sources are of equal strength load L 17 99 253 S 1747 J the stronger source in channel 11 42 82 489 S 1603 q 17 99 279 S 1747 1799261S 1747 / 1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci 4 / I 1 x Cs137up to 4250 Ci y \\ / 1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci I \\-- 17 99 253 S 1747-- / 1 x Co up to 11000 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 261 S 1747 2xCs137bis insges. 5000 Ci / N 1 I 2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci 4 Y Y 42 81 119 S 1601 \\ v / ti 1 x Co60 bis 11000 Ci s 17 99 253 S 1747 _./ 1xCo60up to 11000 Ci 17 99 253 S 1747, / 17 82 044 S 1747 \\ Iy I i lg 1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci 1x s up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 L1799 261 S 1747 42 82 48. S 1603 17 99 279 S 1747 l 1xCs 137 bis 4250 Ci g / 1 x Cs 137 6 up to 4250 Ci 7 \\ v 1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci \\ 17 99 261 S 1747 _/ 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S,1603 17 99 279 S 1747 l 1 x Cs137 bis 4250 Ci 1 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 7 g 7 \\ v v 2xCs137 bis 4250 Cs \\_ 17 99 261 s 174l _/ 2 x Cs137 up to 4250 Ci 42 82 489 S 1603 l 2xCs137 / bis insges. 5000 Ci 2 x Cs137 up to a total of 5000 Ci y y 2xCs137 Y Y / bis insges. 9000 Ci - 17 99 261 S 1747 -/ 2 x Csf37 up to a total of 9000 Ci 42 81 119 S 1601 1 g 7 1 x Co 0up to 6000 Ci 9 k 17 82 044 S 1747 / 17 99 253 S 1747 -I Y = Strahlrechtung der Quellen = Radiation direction of the sources e T 2.050.033.03.03 e Versendert Schecht Beledung /7 Nature of 15 15 296 17 82 044 Channel Loading dispatch S 1747 S 1747 / \\ l 10 I 1xCo60 bis 9000 Ci 20 96 402 20 96 303 in rundem Quellentriger Il 1 x Co60up to 9000 C1 S 3513 S 3502 40 76 030 S 1747 in round source carriers 15 15 295 S 1747 1 x Co60 bis 6000 Ci in rundem Quellentriger I 1 x Co60up to 6000 C1 E f } in round source carriers 44 } a j j 1 x Co60 bis 9000 Ci 20 96 402 20 96 303 in rundem Quellentriger S 3513 S 3502 11 1xCo60 up to 9000 Ci 40 76 030 S 1747 in round source carriers 42 81 119 S 1601 17 99 253 S 1747 i x g60 bis in quadra-I 1 Co60 to in u I s:;uarse source carriers O 12 1 x Co60 bis in [l rundem Quellentriger 1 x Co60 up to in round source carriers 1 x Co60 bis in rundem Quellentriger I 1 x Co60 up to in p round source carries T 1 x Co60 bis in quadra-Il t;5chern Quellestrape 42 81 119 S 1661 17 99 253 S 1747 1 x Co up to in ,quaise sou ce ca:riers y = Strahlrichtung der Quellen,1000 Ce Co60entsprechend 1150 Orhm,1000 Ci C;,137 = 20 Ohrm. = Radiation direction of the sources,1000 Ci Co60 corresponding to 1150 rnm,1000 Ci C,137 = 200 thm Achtung:Ausfuhrliche Bestuckungsangaben tur runde Quellentrager stehe "Quellenversand S 3502 BL 1.

  • Cautson:For comprehensive fitting instructions for roundcarriers see " Source dospatch 5 3502 Sh.1" O T 2.050.033.03.03

C AN VCN teassas=<=.ru UB Med Erlangen ...,5..., VT 43 r.i.,on Erlangen m,.z.,e.ao oia,.N..,,ei va.... z..e.a o,i oad r.o a Load changeover form Confirmation of the change at a Gammatron 1,2,3, R, Cs, S installation with Co40 or Cs-137 source. installation Test number BZ-number Location Customer Source old new Certificate number BZ-number Certificate date Manufacturer Source d;ameter in cm l Certificate dose rate RHM i l l Drawer number l l Unload / load date-Whereabouts of unloaded source Remarks and special occurrences Place, Da*e. Technician. Tech. Manager.

e c e 427 -L Oberpr0 fung der Transportbehsiter Typ S 1747 T2-910.036.01.01.05 g1 SIEMENS v' for co bzw. cs-137-oueiren il m win e.m.- I n v.ws ov hjli o.io-so.i. Check of shipping container Model S 1747 for Co-60 or Cs-137 sources 1.(il.

h. j Sicherheitschecklisten fur Montage Safety checklist for installation s!

a id I l.lIf fur die Be-und Umladungen an Gammatron-Anlagen er-Co-60 or Cs-137 sources for loading and reloading g folgt die Anlieferung der Co40- bzw. Cs-137-Quellen in Gammatron systems are delivered in Siemens shipping Ig3Q Siemens Transportbeh Itern, Typ S 1747. Andere containers, Model S 1747. No other shipping containers j!b Transportbehilter sind nicht zugelassen. are permitted, anz r ja "qt Der Transportbehulter muS zum Versand in ordent-The shipping container must be in proper condition for lichem Zustand sein, d.h. es dUrfen keine Mingel vor-shipments, i.e. it must not have any defects which could liegen, die den gefahrlosen Transport beeintruchtigen jeopardize a safe shipment. Responsibility for this be-Q k6nnen. Verantwortlich hierfUr ist der jeweilige Absen-longs to the current sender or,in return shipments, to {j der, d.h. beim RUckversand die zustEndige Gesch5f ts-the corresponding branch office or Siemens subsidiary. !I stelle bzw. Landesgesellschaft. ld In der Tl 413 (T2.910.033.01.01) ist unter Punkt 6 die in Tl 413 (T2.910.033.01.01) under Item 6, the con- !p BestUckung und Versandvorschrift fur den Transportbe-tents and shipping regulations for the shipping container y h5lter ausfUhrlich beschrieben. are described in detail. Iij Zus5tzlich wurde beiliegende Checkliste mit Obersichts-In addition, there are the attached check lists and sur-zeichnung erstellt. vey diagram.

  • !N Nach jeder Be-und Umladung muS vor der Freigabe zum After loading and reloading, the shipping container must jM Weitertransport der Transportbeh51ter anhand dieser always be checked against this check list before being re-Q{5 Checkliste UberprOf t werden.

kased for further use. U-H;j Sollten Mangel vorhanden sein, die den gefahrlosen if any defects show up whth could jeopardize safe ship- {ila Transport beeintrschtigen k6nnen, ist der Transport zu ment, shipment must be stoppeo and TDT 43, telephone stoppen und TDT 43. Telefon 09131/84--3108/3454 zu 09131-84-3108/34E4, contacteJ for further instruc-ma benachrichtigen und weitere Anweisungen einzuholen. tions. Nach AbschluS der Arbeiten ist die ausgefallte und At the conc!usion of wurk, the check list is to be filled 83 unteschriebene Check;iste an TDT 43/2 in Erlangen zt. out, signed, and sent to TDT 43/2 in Erlangen. 'I senden. l!N*

3

-f a ,h1 1 1t 1 !H i bf! pm! dO! m! a l kII i3%D -' jf TDT 43/Wengert 8i GVK 9/Northrup deutsch/englisch O SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Bereich Medizinische Technik Erlangen

= = = = - - =

An To: O UB Med Med. Eng. Group g TDT 43/2 TDT 43/2 Erlangen Erlangen Checkliste fur Transportbeh5lter Check list for shipping container Fab r.-N r.1747/............ Serial No.1474/.......... Positions Nummern entsprechen den in der Zeichnung angegebenen Nummern. K5stchen hinter jeder Position abhaken, wenn diese in Ordnung ist. Item Numbers correspond to the numbers indicated in the diagram. Check off the box after each item when okay. 1. Haube schmutzfrei und auf Beschudigung achten Hood No dirt;look for damages ( 2. a) Schild "Typ 0/2001/B(U)" dauerhaf t befestigt und Text vollstEndig lesbar a) Label plate "Model 0/2001/B(U)" permanently attached, text completely legible h b) Schild "Gewicht des BehElters ca. 2000 kg" dauer-haf t befestigt und Text vollstEndig lesbar b) Label plate " Weight of container approx. 2000 kg" per-manently attached, text completely legible 3. Holzinnenauskleidung fest und vollst5ndig Inner wooden lining Secure and complete h 4. 12 Stck. Spezialschraube 17 99 246 S 1747 unbescl*5digt und gefettet 12 special screws 17 99 246 S 1747 undamaged and greased 12 Stek. F5cherscheibe 33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798-St 6980 12 lock washers 33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798-St 6980 5. Boden schmutzfrei, auf einwandfreien Zustand der Holzauskleidung und Besch5digungen achten Bottom no dirt, wooden lining in satisfactory condi-tion;look for damages +

6. Kufe Befestigung der Kufe mit dem Boden pr0 fen O 8ese check ettechment er bese te the <ieer O 7. Dichtung 17 99 378 S 1747 am ganzen Umfang vorhan-den, unbesch5digt und Ober die Flanschfluche vorstehend Seal 17 99 378 S 1747 present over complete girth, undamaged and protruding over the flange surface 8. DEmmplatte 17 91056 S 1747 Paketh5he 120 mm, bei Unterschreitung des MaSes um mehr als 10 mm entsprechend Dumm-Material aufkleben Insulating board 17 91056 S 1747 Package height 120 mm; when exceeded by more than 10 mm, glue on appropriate insulating mater _ial 9. 4 Stck. Schraube 35 39111 M16 x 120 DIN 931-8.8 6603 Four screws 35 39111 M16 x 120 DIN 931-8.8 6603 4 Stck. F5cherscheibe 33 46 566 A 16.5 DIN 6798 - St. 6980 Four lock washers 33 46 566 A 1o.5 DIN 6798 -St.6980 0 ~ 10. Innenbeh51ter schmutzfrei, unbesch5digt ~ Inside container no dirt, undamaged ~ 11. Kennschild 33 72 737 (1019 SRN 825) Fabr.-Nr. (entsoricht der Fabr.-Nr. des Transportbe-hutters) dauerhaf t befestigt und Text voll-stundig lesbar O Label plate 33 72 737 (1019 SRN 825) Serial No. (the Serial No. of the shipping container) per-manently attached, text completely legible 12. 2 Stck. Deckel schmutzf rei, unbeschudigt Two covers no dirt, undamaged 13. Beidseitige Klingeritdichtungen 17 99 683 S 1747 unbesch5digt und eingeklebt ~ Two-sided Klingerit seals 17 99 683 S 1747 undamaged and glued in O O _3_ 12_,, e.e3e.e,

14. 24 Stek. Schraubo 35 39 129 S 1747 M20 x 40 DIN 6912-8.8, gefettet g 24 screws 35 39 129 S 1747 M20 x 40 DIN 6912-8.8, greased g 15. Roter Markierungsstrich und Schachtkennzeichnungen gut lesbar vorhanden Red mark and compart.nent identification marks present and legible 16. Beidseitige Zentrierflansche Ausdrehung gratfrei und unbesch5digt Two-side centering flanges recess without burrs, undamaged 17. Vor jeder Bef5rderung einer Therapiestrahlenquelle muS an diese Use ein Vorh5ngeschloS angebracht werden. Before transporting a therapy radiation source, a padlock must always be attched to this hook. 18. Bemerkungen: Remarks: O , den (Ort)/(Location) (Datum)/(Date) O Prufer/ Examiner (Name) Unterschrif t/(Name) signature Falls Mdngel vorliegen, die den gefahrlosen Transport if there are any defect which could jeopardize a safe beeintrdchtigen k6nnen,ist der Transport zu stoppen shipment, shipment must be stopped and TDT 43, und TDT 43, Tel. 09131-84-3108/84--34 54, zu be-Tel. 09131 3108/84-34 54 contacted for further nachrichtigen, um weitere Anweisungen einzuholen. instructions. T2-910.036.01 _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

4 9 C 'l Q [j@' @'MW'd B S't' M//, 1 3 '- b g - < < <w 2 j g x s w: s y 7'r $m:k a 8'Y' 'd b 3 u m is 12 If 15 13 'd s { ~ ~ ~ ^ ~ " j , "i I; c .s .p.. f$! ) x I 16 s. ( 16

xs ll./

u 1 x ~:t n- ~ \\ f., { 10 i.- O v l 1 7/ -i ,1 yF1 yi: 0 l'r ] 5 L \\ \\ % I 1 O 1 \\ \\ l \\ \\ \\ \\ 6 8 9 15 O O O T2-910.030.01}}

Retrieved from "https://kanterella.com/w/index.php?title=ML20141P249&oldid=4182455"